The Director serves as a versatile network service designed to redirect incoming HTTP(s) requests to the optimal host or Content Delivery Network (CDN) by evaluating various request properties through a set of rules. Although requests can be generic, the primary focus centers around audio-video content delivery. The rule engine allows users to construct routing configurations using predefined blocks, providing for the creation of intricate routing logic. This modular approach allows the users to tailor and streamline the content delivery process to meet their specific needs. The Director’s flexible rule engine takes into account factors such as geographical location, server load, content type, and other metadata from external sources to intelligently route incoming requests. It supports dynamic adjustments to seamlessly adapt to changing network conditions, ensuring efficient and reliable content delivery. The Director improves the overall user experience by delivering content from the most suitable and responsive sources, thereby reducing latency and enhancing performance.

Requirements

Hardware

The Director is designed to be installed and operated on commodity hardware, ensuring accessibility for a broad range of users. The minimum hardware specifications are as follows:

CPU: x86-64 AMD or Intel with at least 2 cores.
Memory: At least 2 GB free at runtime.

Operating System Compatibility

The Director is officially supported on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 8 or 9 or any compatible operating system. In order to run the service, a minimum CPU architecture of x86-64-v2 is required. This can be determined by running the following command. If supported, it will be listed as “(supported)” in the output.

/usr/lib64/ld-linux-x86-64.so.2 --help | grep x86-64-v2

External Internet access is necessary during the installation process for the installer to download and install additional dependencies. This ensures a seamless setup and optimal functionality of the Director on Red Hat Enterprise Linux 8 or 9. It’s worth noting that, due to the unique workings of the DNF package manager in Red Hat Enterprise Linux with rolling package streams, an air-gapped installation process is not available.

Firewall Recommendations

See Firewall.

Installation

See Installation.

Operations

See Operations.

Configuration Process

Once the router is operational, it requires a valid configuration before it can route incoming requests.

There are currently three methods available for configuring the router, each catering to different levels of complexity. The first is a Web UI, suitable for the most common use-cases, providing an intuitive interface for configuration. The second involves utilizing a confd REST service, complemented by an optional command line tool, confcli, suitable for all but the most advanced scenarios. The third method involves leveraging an internal REST API, ideal for the most intricate cases where using confd proves to be less flexible. It’s essential to note that as the configuration method advances through these levels, both flexibility and complexity increase, providing users with tailored options based on their specific needs and expertise.

API Key Management

Regardless of the method used to configure the system, a unique API key is crucial for safeguarding the router’s configuration and preventing unauthorized access to the API. This key must be supplied when interacting with the API. During the router software installation, an automatically generated API key is created and can be located on the installed system at /opt/edgeware/acd/router/cache/rest-api-key.json. The structure of this file is as follows:

{"api_key": "abc123"}

When accessing the internal configuration API, the key must be included in the X-API-key header of the request, as shown below:

curl -v -k -H "X-API-Key: abc123" https://<router-host.example>:5001/v2/configuration

Modification to the authentication key and behavior can be done through the /v2/rest_api_key endpoint. To change the key, a PUT request with a JSON body of the same structure can be sent to the endpoint:

curl -v -k -X PUT -T new-key.json -H "X-API-Key: abc123" \
-H "Content-Type: application/json" https://<router-host.example>:5001/v2/rest_api_key

Additionally, key authentication can be disabled completely by sending a DELETE request to the endpoint:

curl -v -k -X DELETE -H "X-API-Key: abc123" \
https://<router-host.example>:5001/v2/rest_api_key

In the event of a lost or forgotten authentication key, it can always be retrieved at /opt/edgeware/acd/router/cache/rest-api-key.json on the machine running the router. It is critical to emphasize that the API key should remain private to prevent unauthorized access to the internal API, as it grants full access to the router’s configuration.

Configuration Basics

Upon completing the installation process and configuring the API keys, the subsequent section will provide guidance on configuring the router to route all incoming requests to a single host. For straightforward CDN Offload use cases, there is a web based user interface described here.

For further details on configuring the router using confd and confcli, please consult the Confd documentation.

The initial step involves defining the target host group. In this illustration, a singular group named all will be established, comprising two hosts.

$ confcli services.routing.hostGroups -w
Running wizard for resource 'hostGroups'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

hostGroups : [
  hostGroup can be one of
    1: dns
    2: host
    3: redirecting
  Choose element index or name: host
  Adding a 'host' element
    hostGroup : {
      name (default: ): all
      type (default: host):
      httpPort (default: 80):
      httpsPort (default: 443):
      hosts : [
        host : {
          name (default: ): host1.example.com
          hostname (default: ): host1.example.com
          ipv6_address (default: ):
        }
        Add another 'host' element to array 'hosts'? [y/N]: y
        host : {
          name (default: ): host2.example.com
          hostname (default: ): host2.example.com
          ipv6_address (default: ):
        }
        Add another 'host' element to array 'hosts'? [y/N]: n
      ]
    }
  Add another 'hostGroup' element to array 'hostGroups'? [y/N]: n
]
Generated config:
{
  "hostGroups": [
    {
      "name": "all",
      "type": "host",
      "httpPort": 80,
      "httpsPort": 443,
      "hosts": [
        {
          "name": "host1.example.com",
          "hostname": "host1.example.com",
          "ipv6_address": ""
        },
        {
          "name": "host2.example.com",
          "hostname": "host2.example.com",
          "ipv6_address": ""
        }
      ]
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]:

After defining the host group, the next step is to establish a rule that directs incoming requests to the designated host. In this example, a sole rule named random will be generated, ensuring that all incoming requests are consistently routed to the previously defined host.

$ confcli services.routing.rules -w
Running wizard for resource 'rules'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

rules : [
  rule can be one of
    1: allow
    2: consistentHashing
    3: contentPopularity
    4: deny
    5: firstMatch
    6: random
    7: rawGroup
    8: rawHost
    9: split
    10: weighted
  Choose element index or name: random
  Adding a 'random' element
    rule : {
      name (default: ): random
      type (default: random):
      targets : [
        target (default: ): host1.example.com
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: y
        target (default: ): host2.example.com
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: n
      ]
    }
  Add another 'rule' element to array 'rules'? [y/N]: n
]
Generated config:
{
  "rules": [
    {
      "name": "random",
      "type": "random",
      "targets": [
        "host1.example.com",
        "host2.example.com"
      ]
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]:

The last essential step involves instructing the router on which rule should serve as the entry point into the routing tree. In this example, we designate the rule random as the entrypoint for the routing process.

$ confcli services.routing.entrypoint random
services.routing.entrypoint = 'random'

Once this configuration is defined, all incoming requests will initiate their traversal through the routing rules, starting with the rule named random. This rule is designed to consistently match for every incoming request, effectively load balancing evenly between host1.example.com and host2.example.com on port 80 or 443, depending on whether the initial request was made using HTTP or HTTPS.

Integration with Convoy

The router is equipped with the capability to synchronize specific configuration metadata with a separate Convoy installation through the integrated convoy-bridge service. However, this service necessitates additional setup and configuration, and you can find comprehensive details on the process here..

Additional Resources

Additional documentation resources are included with the Director and can be accessed at the following directory: /opt/edgeware/acd/documentation/. This directory contains supplementary materials to provide users with comprehensive information and guidance for optimizing their experience with the Director.

Ready for Production

Once the Director software is completely installed and configured, there are a few additional considerations before moving to a full production environment. See the section Ready for Production for additional information.

1.2 - Installation

How to install and upgrade ESB3024 Router

1.2.1 - Installing a 1.22 release

How to install and upgrade to ESB3024 Router release 1.22.x

To install ESB3024 Router, you first need to copy the installation ISO image to the target node where the router will be run. Due to the way the installer operates, it is necessary that the host is reachable by ssh from itself for the user account that will perform the installation, and that this user has sudo access.

Prerequisites:

Ensure that the current user has sudo access.
```
sudo -l
```
If the above command fails, you may need to add the user to the /etc/sudoers file.
Ensure that the installer has ssh access to localhost.
If using the root user, the PermitRootLogin property of the /etc/ssh/sshd_config file must be set to ‘yes’.
Ensure that sshpass is installed.
If the installer is run by the root user, this step is not necessary.
sshpass is installed by typing this:
```
sudo dnf install -y sshpass
```

Assuming the installation ISO image is in the current working directory, the following steps need to be executed either by root user or with sudo.

Mount the installation ISO image under /mnt/acd.
Note: The mount-point may be any accessible path, but /mnt/acd will be used throughout this document.
```
mkdir -p /mnt/acd
mount esb3024-acd-router-1.22.0.iso /mnt/acd
```
Run the installer script.
```
/mnt/acd/installer
```
If it is not running as root, the installer will ask both for the “SSH password” and the “BECOME password”. The “SSH password” is the password that the user running the installer uses to log in to the local machine, and the “BECOME password” is the password for the user to gain sudo access. They are usually the same.

Upgrading From an Earlier ESB3024 Router Release

The following steps can be taken to upgrade the router from a 1.10 or later release to 1.22.0. If upgrading from an earlier release it is recommended to first upgrade to 1.10.1 and then to upgrade to 1.22.0.

The upgrade procedure for the router is performed by taking a backup of the configuration, installing the new release of the router, and applying the saved configuration.

With the router running, save a backup of the configuration.
The exact procedure to accomplish this depends on the current method of configuration, e.g. if confd is used, then the configuration should be extracted from confd, but if the REST API is used directly, then the configuration must be saved by fetching the current configuration snapshot using the REST API.
Extracting the configuration using confd is the recommend approach where available.
```
confcli | tee config_backup.json
```
To extract the configuration from the REST API, the following may be used instead. Depending on the version of the router used, an API-Key may be required to fetch from the REST API.
```
curl --insecure https://localhost:5001/v2/configuration \
  | tee config_backup.json
```
If the API Key is required, it can be found in the file /opt/edgeware/acd/router/cache/rest-api-key.json and can be passed to the API by setting the value of the X-API-Key header.
```
curl --insecure -H "X-API-Key: 1234abcd" \
  https://localhost:5001/v2/configuration \
  | tee config_backup.json
```
Mount the new installation ISO under /mnt/acd.
Note: The mount-point may be any accessible path, but /mnt/acd will be used throughout this document.
```
mkdir -p /mnt/acd
mount esb3024-acd-router-1.22.0.iso /mnt/acd
```
Stop the router and all associated services.
Before upgrading the router it needs to be stopped, which can be done by typing this:
```
systemctl stop 'acd-*'
```
Run the installer script.
```
/mnt/acd/installer
```
Please note that the installer will install new container images, but it will not remove the old ones. The old images can be removed manually after the upgrade is complete.
Migrate the configuration.
Note that this step only applies if the router is configured using confd. If it is configured using the REST API, this step is not necessary.
The confd configuration used in the previous versions is not directly compatible with 1.22, and may need to be converted. If this is not done, the configuration will not be valid and it will not be possible to make configuration changes.
The acd-confd-migration tool will automatically apply any necessary schema migrations. Further details about this tool can be found at Confd Auto Upgrade Tool.
The tool takes as input the old configuration file, either by reading the file directly, or by reading from standard input, applies any necessary migrations between the two specified versions, and outputs a new configuration to standard output which is suitable for being applied to the upgraded system. While the tool has the ability to migrate between multiple versions at a time, the earliest supported version is 1.10.1.
The example below shows how to upgrade from 1.20.1. If upgrading from 1.18.0, --from 1.20.1 should be replaced with --from 1.18.0.
The command line required to run the tool is different depending on which esb3024 release it is run on. On 1.22.0 it is run like this:
```
cat config_backup.json | \
  podman run -i --rm \
  images.edgeware.tv/acd-confd-migration:1.22.0 \
  --in - --from 1.20.1 --to 1.22.0 \
  | tee config_upgraded.json
```
After running the above command, apply the new configuration to confd by running cat config_upgraded.json | confcli -i.

Troubleshooting

If there is a problem running the installer, additional debug information can be output by adding -v or -vv or -vvv to the installer command, the more “v” characters, the more detailed output.

1.2.1.1 - Configuration changes between 1.20 and 1.22

This describes the configuration changes between ESB3024 Router version 1.20 and 1.22

Confd configuration changes

Below are the changes to the confd configuration between versions 1.20 and 1.22 listed.

Removed `services.routing.settings.usageLog.enabled`

The services.routing.settings.usageLog.enabled setting has been removed. The usage log is always enabled and this setting is no longer necessary.

Replaced `forwardHostHeader` with `headersToForward`

The services.routing.hostGroups.<name>.forwardHostHeader setting has been replaced with services.routing.hostGroups.<name>.headersToForward, which is a list of headers to forward to the origin server.

See CDNs and Hosts for more information.

Added `selectionInputFetchBase`

The integration.manager.selectionInputFetchBase setting has been added. It is used to configure the base URL for fetching initial selection input from the manager. See Selection Input API for more information.

Added the `requestHeader` classifier

A new classifier, requestHeader, has been added. See Session Classification for more information.

Added `patternSource` to the `subnet` classifier

The subnet classifier has been extended with a new setting, patternSource. See Session Classification for more information.

1.2.2 - Installing a 1.20 release

How to install and upgrade to ESB3024 Router release 1.20.x

To install ESB3024 Router, you first need to copy the installation ISO image to the target node where the router will be run. Due to the way the installer operates, it is necessary that the host is reachable by password-less SSH from itself for the user account that will perform the installation, and that this user has sudo access.

Prerequisites:

Ensure that the current user has sudo access.
```
sudo -l
```
If the above command fails, you may need to add the user to the /etc/sudoers file.
Ensure that the installer has password-less SSH access to localhost.
If using the root user, the PermitRootLogin property of the /etc/ssh/sshd_config file must be set to ‘yes’.
The local host key must also be included in the .ssh/authorized_keys file of the user running the installer. That can be done by issuing the following as the intended user:
```
mkdir -m 0700 -p ~/.ssh
ssh-keyscan localhost >> ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
```
Note! The ssh-keyscan utility will result in the key fingerprint being output on the console. As a security best-practice it is recommended to verify that this host-key matches the machine’s true SSH host key. As an alternative, to this ssh-keyscan approach, establishing an SSH connection to localhost and accepting the host key will have the same result.
Disable SELinux.
The Security-Enhanced Linux Project (SELinux) is designed to add an additional layer of security to the operating system by enforcing a set of rules on processes. Unfortunately out of the box the default configuration is not compatible with the way the installer operates. Before proceeding with the installation, it is recommended to disable SELinux. It can be re-enabled after the installation completes, if desired, but will require manual configuration. Refer to the Red Hat Customer Portal for details.
To check if SELinux is enabled:
```
getenforce
```
This will result in one of 3 states, “Enforcing”, “Permissive” or “Disabled”. If the state is “Enforcing” use the following to disable SELinux. Either “Permissive” or “Disabled” is required to continue.
```
setenforce 0
```
This disables SELinux, but does not make the change persistent across reboots. To do that, edit the /etc/selinux/config file and set the SELINUX property to disabled.
It is recommended to reboot the computer after changing SELinux modes, but the changes should take effect immediately.

Assuming the installation ISO image is in the current working directory, the following steps need to be executed either by root user or with sudo.

Mount the installation ISO image under /mnt/acd.
Note: The mount-point may be any accessible path, but /mnt/acd will be used throughout this document.
```
mkdir -p /mnt/acd
mount esb3024-acd-router-1.20.1.iso /mnt/acd
```
Run the installer script.
```
/mnt/acd/installer
```

Upgrading From an Earlier ESB3024 Router Release

The following steps can be taken to upgrade the router from a 1.10 or later release to 1.20.1. If upgrading from an earlier release it is recommended to first upgrade to 1.10.1 and then to upgrade to 1.20.1.

The upgrade procedure for the router is performed by taking a backup of the configuration, installing the new release of the router, and applying the saved configuration.

With the router running, save a backup of the configuration.
The exact procedure to accomplish this depends on the current method of configuration, e.g. if confd is used, then the configuration should be extracted from confd, but if the REST API is used directly, then the configuration must be saved by fetching the current configuration snapshot using the REST API.
Extracting the configuration using confd is the recommend approach where available.
```
confcli | tee config_backup.json
```
To extract the configuration from the REST API, the following may be used instead. Depending on the version of the router used, an API-Key may be required to fetch from the REST API.
```
curl --insecure https://localhost:5001/v2/configuration \
  | tee config_backup.json
```
If the API Key is required, it can be found in the file /opt/edgeware/acd/router/cache/rest-api-key.json and can be passed to the API by setting the value of the X-API-Key header.
```
curl --insecure -H "X-API-Key: 1234abcd" \
  https://localhost:5001/v2/configuration \
  | tee config_backup.json
```
Mount the new installation ISO under /mnt/acd.
Note: The mount-point may be any accessible path, but /mnt/acd will be used throughout this document.
```
mkdir -p /mnt/acd
mount esb3024-acd-router-1.20.1.iso /mnt/acd
```
Stop the router and all associated services.
Before upgrading the router it needs to be stopped, which can be done by typing this:
```
systemctl stop 'acd-*'
```
Run the installer script.
```
/mnt/acd/installer
```
Please note that the installer will install new container images, but it will not remove the old ones. The old images can be removed manually after the upgrade is complete.
Migrate the configuration.
Note that this step only applies if the router is configured using confd. If it is configured using the REST API, this step is not necessary.
The confd configuration used in the previous versions is not directly compatible with 1.20, and may need to be converted. If this is not done, the configuration will not be valid and it will not be possible to make configuration changes.
The acd-confd-migration tool will automatically apply any necessary schema migrations. Further details about this tool can be found at Confd Auto Upgrade Tool.
The tool takes as input the old configuration file, either by reading the file directly, or by reading from standard input, applies any necessary migrations between the two specified versions, and outputs a new configuration to standard output which is suitable for being applied to the upgraded system. While the tool has the ability to migrate between multiple versions at a time, the earliest supported version is 1.10.1.
The example below shows how to upgrade from 1.10.2. If upgrading from 1.14.0, --from 1.10.2 should be replaced with --from 1.14.0.
The command line required to run the tool is different depending on which esb3024 release it is run on. On 1.20.1 it is run like this:
```
cat config_backup.json | \
  podman run -i --rm \
  images.edgeware.tv/acd-confd-migration:1.20.1 \
  --in - --from 1.10.2 --to 1.20.1 \
  | tee config_upgraded.json
```
After running the above command, apply the new configuration to confd by running cat config_upgraded.json | confcli -i.

Troubleshooting

1.2.2.1 - Configuration changes between 1.18 and 1.20

This describes the configuration changes between ESB3024 Router version 1.18 and 1.20

Confd configuration changes

Below are the changes to the confd configuration between versions 1.18 and 1.20 listed.

Added Kafka bootstrap server settings

The integration.kafka section has been added. It only contains bootstrapServers, which is a list of Kafka bootstrap servers that the router may connect to. The Kafka settings are described in the Data streams section.

Added data streams settings

The services.routing.dataStreams section has been added. It contains configuration for incoming and outgoing data streams in the incoming and outgoing sections. See Data streams for more information.

Added `allowAnyRedirectType` setting

A new setting, services.routing.hostGroups.<name>.allowAnyRedirectType, has been added. It makes the Director interpret any 3xx response from a redirecting as a redirect. See CDNs and Hosts for more information.

1.2.3 - Installing a 1.18 release

How to install and upgrade to ESB3024 Router release 1.18.x

To install ESB3024 Router, one first needs to copy the installation ISO image to the target node where the router will be run. Due to the way the installer operates, it is necessary that the host is reachable by password-less SSH from itself for the user account that will perform the installation, and that this user has sudo access.

Prerequisites:

Ensure that the current user has sudo access.
```
sudo -l
```
If the above command fails, you may need to add the user to the /etc/sudoers file.
Ensure that the installer has password-less SSH access to localhost.
If using the root user, the PermitRootLogin property of the /etc/ssh/sshd_config file must be set to ‘yes’.
The local host key must also be included in the .ssh/authorized_keys file of the user running the installer. That can be done by issuing the following as the intended user:
```
mkdir -m 0700 -p ~/.ssh
ssh-keyscan localhost >> ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
```
Note! The ssh-keyscan utility will result in the key fingerprint being output on the console. As a security best-practice it is recommended to verify that this host-key matches the machine’s true SSH host key. As an alternative, to this ssh-keyscan approach, establishing an SSH connection to localhost and accepting the host key will have the same result.
Disable SELinux.
The Security-Enhanced Linux Project (SELinux) is designed to add an additional layer of security to the operating system by enforcing a set of rules on processes. Unfortunately out of the box the default configuration is not compatible with the way the installer operates. Before proceeding with the installation, it is recommended to disable SELinux. It can be re-enabled after the installation completes, if desired, but will require manual configuration. Refer to the Red Hat Customer Portal for details.
To check if SELinux is enabled:
```
getenforce
```
This will result in one of 3 states, “Enforcing”, “Permissive” or “Disabled”. If the state is “Enforcing” use the following to disable SELinux. Either “Permissive” or “Disabled” is required to continue.
```
setenforce 0
```
This disables SELinux, but does not make the change persistent across reboots. To do that, edit the /etc/selinux/config file and set the SELINUX property to disabled.
It is recommended to reboot the computer after changing SELinux modes, but the changes should take effect immediately.

Assuming the installation ISO image is in the current working directory, the following steps need to be executed either by root user or with sudo.

Mount the installation ISO image under /mnt/acd.
Note: The mount-point may be any accessible path, but /mnt/acd will be used throughout this document.
```
mkdir -p /mnt/acd
mount esb3024-acd-router-1.18.0.iso /mnt/acd
```
Run the installer script.
```
/mnt/acd/installer
```

Upgrading From an Earlier ESB3024 Router Release

The following steps can be taken to upgrade the router from a 1.10 or later release to 1.18.0. If upgrading from an earlier release it is recommended to first upgrade to 1.10.1 and then to upgrade to 1.18.0.

The upgrade procedure for the router is performed by taking a backup of the configuration, installing the new release of the router, and applying the saved configuration.

With the router running, save a backup of the configuration.
The exact procedure to accomplish this depends on the current method of configuration, e.g. if confd is used, then the configuration should be extracted from confd, but if the REST API is used directly, then the configuration must be saved by fetching the current configuration snapshot using the REST API.
Extracting the configuration using confd is the recommend approach where available.
```
confcli | tee config_backup.json
```
To extract the configuration from the REST API, the following may be used instead. Depending on the version of the router used, an API-Key may be required to fetch from the REST API.
```
curl --insecure https://localhost:5001/v2/configuration \
  | tee config_backup.json
```
If the API Key is required, it can be found in the file /opt/edgeware/acd/router/cache/rest-api-key.json and can be passed to the API by setting the value of the X-API-Key header.
```
curl --insecure -H "X-API-Key: 1234abcd" \
  https://localhost:5001/v2/configuration \
  | tee config_backup.json
```
Mount the new installation ISO under /mnt/acd.
Note: The mount-point may be any accessible path, but /mnt/acd will be used throughout this document.
```
mkdir -p /mnt/acd
mount esb3024-acd-router-1.18.0.iso /mnt/acd
```
Stop the router and all associated services.
Before upgrading the router it needs to be stopped, which can be done by typing this:
```
systemctl stop 'acd-*'
```
Run the installer script.
```
/mnt/acd/installer
```
Please note that the installer will install new container images, but it will not remove the old ones. The old images can be removed manually after the upgrade is complete.
Migrate the configuration.
Note that this step only applies if the router is configured using confd. If it is configured using the REST API, this step is not necessary.
The confd configuration used in the previous versions is not directly compatible with 1.18, and may need to be converted. If this is not done, the configuration will not be valid and it will not be possible to make configuration changes.
The acd-confd-migration tool will automatically apply any necessary schema migrations. Further details about this tool can be found at Confd Auto Upgrade Tool.
The tool takes as input the old configuration file, either by reading the file directly, or by reading from standard input, applies any necessary migrations between the two specified versions, and outputs a new configuration to standard output which is suitable for being applied to the upgraded system. While the tool has the ability to migrate between multiple versions at a time, the earliest supported version is 1.10.1.
The example below shows how to upgrade from 1.10.2. If upgrading from 1.14.0, --from 1.10.2 should be replaced with --from 1.14.0.
The command line required to run the tool is different depending on which esb3024 release it is run on. On 1.18.0 it is run like this:
```
cat config_backup.json | \
  podman run -i --rm \
  images.edgeware.tv/acd-confd-migration:1.18.0 \
  --in - --from 1.10.2 --to 1.18.0 \
  | tee config_upgraded.json
```
After running the above command, apply the new configuration to confd by running cat config_upgraded.json | confcli -i.

Troubleshooting

1.2.3.1 - Configuration changes between 1.16 and 1.18

This describes the configuration changes between ESB3024 Router version 1.16 and 1.18

Confd Configuration Changes

Below are the changes to the confd configuration between versions 1.16 and 1.18 listed.

Added Content Popularity Settings

The services.routing.settings.contentPopularity section has got the following new settings.

popularityListMaxSize
scoreBased
timeBased

The new settings are described in the content popularity section.

1.2.4 - Installing a 1.16 release

How to install and upgrade to ESB3024 Router release 1.16.x

Prerequisites:

Ensure that the current user has sudo access.
```
sudo -l
```
If the above command fails, you may need to add the user to the /etc/sudoers file.
Ensure that the installer has password-less SSH access to localhost.
If using the root user, the PermitRootLogin property of the /etc/ssh/sshd_config file must be set to ‘yes’.
The local host key must also be included in the .ssh/authorized_keys file of the user running the installer. That can be done by issuing the following as the intended user:
```
mkdir -m 0700 -p ~/.ssh
ssh-keyscan localhost >> ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
```
Note! The ssh-keyscan utility will result in the key fingerprint being output on the console. As a security best-practice it is recommended to verify that this host-key matches the machine’s true SSH host key. As an alternative, to this ssh-keyscan approach, establishing an SSH connection to localhost and accepting the host key will have the same result.
Disable SELinux.
The Security-Enhanced Linux Project (SELinux) is designed to add an additional layer of security to the operating system by enforcing a set of rules on processes. Unfortunately out of the box the default configuration is not compatible with the way the installer operates. Before proceeding with the installation, it is recommended to disable SELinux. It can be re-enabled after the installation completes, if desired, but will require manual configuration. Refer to the Red Hat Customer Portal for details.
To check if SELinux is enabled:
```
getenforce
```
This will result in one of 3 states, “Enforcing”, “Permissive” or “Disabled”. If the state is “Enforcing” use the following to disable SELinux. Either “Permissive” or “Disabled” is required to continue.
```
setenforce 0
```
This disables SELinux, but does not make the change persistent across reboots. To do that, edit the /etc/selinux/config file and set the SELINUX property to disabled.
It is recommended to reboot the computer after changing SELinux modes, but the changes should take effect immediately.

Assuming the installation ISO image is in the current working directory, the following steps need to be executed either by root user or with sudo.

Mount the installation ISO image under /mnt/acd.
Note: The mount-point may be any accessible path, but /mnt/acd will be used throughout this document.
```
mkdir -p /mnt/acd
mount esb3024-acd-router-1.16.0.iso /mnt/acd
```
Run the installer script.
```
/mnt/acd/installer
```

Upgrade from and earlier ESB3024 Router release

The following steps can be taken to upgrade the router from a 1.10 or later release to 1.16.0. If upgrading from an earlier release it is recommended to first upgrade to 1.10.1 and then to upgrade to 1.16.0.

The upgrade procedure for the router is performed by taking a backup of the configuration, installing the new release of the router, and applying the saved configuration.

With the router running, save a backup of the configuration.
The exact procedure to accomplish this depends on the current method of configuration, e.g. if confd is used, then the configuration should be extracted from confd, but if the REST API is used directly, then the configuration must be saved by fetching the current configuration snapshot using the REST API.
Extracting the configuration using confd is the recommend approach where available.
```
confcli | tee config_backup.json
```
To extract the configuration from the REST API, the following may be used instead. Depending on the version of the router used, an API-Key may be required to fetch from the REST API.
```
curl --insecure https://localhost:5001/v2/configuration \
  | tee config_backup.json
```
If the API Key is required, it can be found in the file /opt/edgeware/acd/router/cache/rest-api-key.json and can be passed to the API by setting the value of the X-API-Key header.
```
curl --insecure -H "X-API-Key: 1234abcd" \
  https://localhost:5001/v2/configuration \
  | tee config_backup.json
```
Mount the new installation ISO under /mnt/acd.
Note: The mount-point may be any accessible path, but /mnt/acd will be used throughout this document.
```
mkdir -p /mnt/acd
mount esb3024-acd-router-1.16.0.iso /mnt/acd
```
Stop the router and all associated services.
Before upgrading the router it needs to be stopped, which can be done by typing this:
```
systemctl stop 'acd-*'
```
Run the installer script.
```
/mnt/acd/installer
```
Migrate the configuration.
Note that this step only applies if the router is configured using confd. If it is configured using the REST API, this step is not necessary.
The confd configuration used in the previous versions is not directly compatible with 1.16, and may need to be converted. If this is not done, the configuration will not be valid and it will not be possible to make configuration changes.
The acd-confd-migration tool will automatically apply any necessary schema migrations. Further details about this tool can be found at Confd Auto Upgrade Tool.
The tool takes as input the old configuration file, either by reading the file directly, or by reading from standard input, applies any necessary migrations between the two specified versions, and outputs a new configuration to standard output which is suitable for being applied to the upgraded system. While the tool has the ability to migrate between multiple versions at a time, the earliest supported version is 1.10.1.
The example below shows how to upgrade from 1.10.2. If upgrading from 1.14.0, --from 1.10.2 should be replaced with --from 1.14.0.
The command line required to run the tool is different depending on which esb3024 release it is run on. On 1.16.0 it is run like this:
```
cat config_backup.json | \
  podman run -i --rm \
  images.edgeware.tv/acd-confd-migration:1.16.0 \
  --in - --from 1.10.2 --to 1.16.0 \
  | tee config_upgraded.json
```
After running the above command, apply the new configuration to confd by running cat config_upgraded.json | confcli -i.

Troubleshooting

1.2.4.1 - Configuration changes between 1.14 and 1.16

This describes the configuration changes between ESB3024 Router version 1.14 and 1.16

Confd configuration changes

Below are the changes to the confd configuration between versions 1.14 and 1.16 listed.

Added `region` GeoIP classifier

Classifiers of type geoip now have a region property.

Added `integration.routing.gui` configuration

There is now an integration.routing.gui section which will be used by the GUI.

Added `services.routing.accounts` configuration

The services.routing.accounts list has been added to the configuration.

1.2.5 - Installing a 1.14 release

How to install and upgrade to ESB3024 Router release 1.14.x

Prerequisites:

Ensure that the current user has sudo access.
```
sudo -l
```
If the above command fails, you may need to add the user to the /etc/sudoers file.
Ensure that the installer has password-less SSH access to localhost.
If using the root user, the PermitRootLogin property of the /etc/ssh/sshd_config file must be set to ‘yes’.
The local host key must also be included in the .ssh/authorized_keys file of the user running the installer. That can be done by issuing the following as the intended user:
```
mkdir -m 0700 -p ~/.ssh
ssh-keyscan localhost >> ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
```
Note! The ssh-keyscan utility will result in the key fingerprint being output on the console. As a security best-practice it is recommended to verify that this host-key matches the machine’s true SSH host key. As an alternative, to this ssh-keyscan approach, establishing an SSH connection to localhost and accepting the host key will have the same result.
Disable SELinux.
The Security-Enhanced Linux Project (SELinux) is designed to add an additional layer of security to the operating system by enforcing a set of rules on processes. Unfortunately out of the box the default configuration is not compatible with the way the installer operates. Before proceeding with the installation, it is recommended to disable SELinux. It can be re-enabled after the installation completes, if desired, but will require manual configuration. Refer to the Red Hat Customer Portal for details.
To check if SELinux is enabled:
```
getenforce
```
This will result in one of 3 states, “Enforcing”, “Permissive” or “Disabled”. If the state is “Enforcing” use the following to disable SELinux. Either “Permissive” or “Disabled” is required to continue.
```
setenforce 0
```
This disables SELinux, but does not make the change persistent across reboots. To do that, edit the /etc/selinux/config file and set the SELINUX property to disabled.
It is recommended to reboot the computer after changing SELinux modes, but the changes should take effect immediately.

Assuming the installation ISO image is in the current working directory, the following steps need to be executed either by root user or with sudo.

Mount the installation ISO image under /mnt/acd.
Note: The mount-point may be any accessible path, but /mnt/acd will be used throughout this document.
```
mkdir -p /mnt/acd
mount esb3024-acd-router-1.14.0.iso /mnt/acd
```
Run the installer script.
```
/mnt/acd/installer
```

Upgrade from and earlier ESB3024 Router release

The following steps can be used to upgrade the router from a 1.10 or 1.12 release to 1.14.0. If upgrading from an earlier release it is recommended to first upgrade to 1.10.1 in multiple steps; for instance when upgrading from release 1.8.0 to 1.14.0, it is recommended to first upgrade to 1.10.1 and then to 1.14.0.

The upgrade procedure for the router is performed by taking a backup of the configuration, installing the new release of the router, and applying the saved configuration.

With the router running, save a backup of the configuration.
The exact procedure to accomplish this depends on the current method of configuration, e.g. if confd is used, then the configuration should be extracted from confd, but if the REST API is used directly, then the configuration must be saved by fetching the current configuration snapshot using the REST API.
Extracting the configuration using confd is the recommend approach where available.
```
confcli | tee config_backup.json
```
To extract the configuration from the REST API, the following may be used instead. Depending on the version of the router used, an API-Key may be required to fetch from the REST API.
```
curl --insecure https://localhost:5001/v2/configuration \
  | tee config_backup.json
```
If the API Key is required, it can be found in the file /opt/edgeware/acd/router/cache/rest-api-key.json and can be passed to the API by setting the value of the X-API-Key header.
```
curl --insecure -H "X-API-Key: 1234abcd" \
  https://localhost:5001/v2/configuration \
  | tee config_backup.json
```
Mount the new installation ISO under /mnt/acd.
Note: The mount-point may be any accessible path, but /mnt/acd will be used throughout this document.
```
mkdir -p /mnt/acd
mount esb3024-acd-router-1.14.0.iso /mnt/acd
```
Stop the router and all associated services.
Before upgrading the router it needs to be stopped, which can be done by typing this:
```
systemctl stop 'acd-*'
```
Run the installer script.
```
/mnt/acd/installer
```
Migrate the configuration.
Note that this step only applies if the router is configured using confd. If it is configured using the REST API, this step is not necessary.
The confd configuration used in the previous versions is not directly compatible with 1.14, and may need to be converted. If this is not done, the configuration will not be valid and it will not be possible to make configuration changes.
The acd-confd-migration tool will automatically apply any necessary schema migrations. Further details about this tool can be found at Confd Auto Upgrade Tool.
The tool takes as input the old configuration file, either by reading the file directly, or by reading from standard input, applies any necessary migrations between the two specified versions, and outputs a new configuration to standard output which is suitable for being applied to the upgraded system. While the tool has the ability to migrate between multiple versions at a time, the earliest supported version is 1.10.1.
The example below shows how to upgrade from 1.10.2. If upgrading from 1.12.0, --from 1.10.2 should be replaced with --from 1.12.0.
The command line required to run the tool is different depending on which esb3024 release it is run on. On 1.14.0 it is run like this:
```
cat config_backup.json | \
  podman run -i --rm \
  images.edgeware.tv/acd-confd-migration:1.14.0 \
  --in - --from 1.10.2 --to 1.14.0 \
  | tee config_upgraded.json
```
After running the above command, apply the new configuration to confd by running cat config_upgraded.json | confcli -i.

Troubleshooting

1.2.5.1 - Configuration changes between 1.12.1 and 1.14

This describes the configuration changes between ESB3024 Router version 1.12.1 and 1.14.x

Confd configuration changes

Below are the changes to the confd configuration between versions 1.12.1 and 1.14.x listed.

Renamed `services.routing.settings.allowedProxies`

The configuration setting services.routing.settings.allowedProxies has been renamed to services.routing.settings.trustedProxies.

Added `services.routing.tuning.general.restApiMaxBodySize`

This parameter configures the maximum body size for the REST API. It mainly applies to the configuration, which sometimes has a large payload size.

1.2.6 - Installing a 1.12 release

How to install and upgrade to ESB3024 Router release 1.12.0 and 1.12.1

Prerequisites:

Ensure that the current user has sudo access.
```
sudo -l
```
If the above command fails, you may need to add the user to the /etc/sudoers file.
Ensure that the installer has password-less SSH access to localhost.
If using the root user, the PermitRootLogin property of the /etc/ssh/sshd_config file must be set to ‘yes’.
The local host key must also be included in the .ssh/authorized_keys file of the user running the installer. That can be done by issuing the following as the intended user:
```
mkdir -m 0700 -p ~/.ssh
ssh-keyscan localhost >> ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
```
Note! The ssh-keyscan utility will result in the key fingerprint being output on the console. As a security best-practice its recommended to verify that this host-key matches the machine’s true SSH host key. As an alternative, to this ssh-keyscan approach, establishing an SSH connection to localhost and accepting the host key will have the same result.
Disable SELinux.
The Security-Enhanced Linux Project (SELinux) is designed to add an additional layer of security to the operating system by enforcing a set of rules on processes. Unfortunately out of the box the default configuration is not compatible with the way the installer operates. Before proceeding with the installation, it is recommended to disable SELinux. It can be re-enabled after the installation completes, if desired, but will require manual configuration. Refer to the Red Hat Customer Portal for details.
To check if SELinux is enabled:
```
getenforce
```
This will result in one of 3 states, “Enforcing”, “Permissive” or “Disabled”. If the state is “Enforcing” use the following to disable SELinux. Either “Permissive” or “Disabled” is required to continue.
```
setenforce 0
```
This disables SELinux, but does not make the change persistent across reboots. To do that, edit the /etc/selinux/config file and set the SELINUX property to disabled.
It is recommended to reboot the computer after changing SELinux modes, but the changes should take effect immediately.

Assuming the installation ISO image is in the current working directory, the following steps need to be executed either by root user or with sudo.

Mount the installation ISO image under /mnt/acd.
Note: The mount-point may be any accessible path, but /mnt/acd will be used throughout this document.
```
mkdir -p /mnt/acd
mount esb3024-acd-router-esb3024-1.12.1.iso /mnt/acd
```
Run the installer script.
```
/mnt/acd/installer
```

Upgrade from ESB3024 Router release 1.10

The following steps can be used to upgrade the router from a 1.10 release to 1.12.0 or 1.12.1. If upgrading from an earlier release it is recommended to perform the upgrade in multiple steps; for instance when upgrading from release 1.8.0 to 1.12.1, it is recommended to first upgrade to 1.10.1 or 1.10.2 and then to 1.12.1.

The upgrade procedure for the router is performed by taking a backup of the configuration, installing the new release of the router, and applying the saved configuration.

With the router running, save a backup of the configuration.
The exact procedure to accomplish this depends on the current method of configuration, e.g. if confd is used, then the configuration should be extracted from confd, but if the REST API is used directly, then the configuration must be saved by fetching the current configuration snapshot using the REST API.
Extracting the configuration using confd is the recommend approach where available.
```
confcli | tee config_backup.json
```
To extract the configuration from the REST API, the following may be used instead. Depending on the version of the router used, an API-Key may be required to fetch from the REST API.
```
curl --insecure https://localhost:5001/v2/configuration \
  | tee config_backup.json
```
If the API Key is required, it can be found in the file /opt/edgeware/acd/router/cache/rest-api-key.json and can be passed to the API by setting the value of the X-API-Key header.
```
curl --insecure -H "X-API-Key: 1234abcd" \
  https://localhost:5001/v2/configuration \
  | tee config_backup.json
```
Mount the new installation ISO under /mnt/acd.
Note: The mount-point may be any accessible path, but /mnt/acd will be used throughout this document.
```
mkdir -p /mnt/acd
mount esb3024-acd-router-esb3024-1.12.1.iso /mnt/acd
```
Stop the router and all associated services.
Before upgrading the router it needs to be stopped, which can be done by typing this:
```
systemctl stop 'acd-*'
```
Run the installer script.
```
/mnt/acd/installer
```
Migrate the configuration.
Note that this step only applies if the router is configured using confd. If it is configured using the REST API, this step is not necessary.
The confd configuration used in the 1.10 versions is not directly compatible with 1.12, and may need to be converted. If this is not done, the configuration will not be valid and it will not be possible to make configuration changes.
To help with migrating the configuration, a new tool has been included in the 1.12.0 release, which will automatically apply any necessary schema migrations. Further details about this tool can be found here. Confd Auto Upgrade.
The confd-auto-upgrade tool takes as input the old configuration file, either by reading the file directly, or by reading from standard input, applies any necessary migrations between the two specified versions, and outputs a new configuration to standard output which is suitable for being applied to the upgraded system. While the tool has the ability to migrate between multiple versions at a time, the earliest supported version is 1.10.1.
The example below shows how to upgrade from 1.10.2. If upgrading from 1.10.1, --from 1.10.2 should be replaced with --from 1.10.1.
The command line required to run the tool is different if it is run on esb3024-1.12.0 or esb3024-1.12.1. On 1.12.1 it is run like this:
```
cat config_backup.json | \
  podman run -i --rm \
  images.edgeware.tv/auto-upgrade-esb3024-1.12.1-master:20240702T151205Z-f1b53a98f \
  --in - --from 1.10.2 --to 1.12.1 \
  | tee config_upgraded.json
```
On esb3024-1.12.0 it is run like this:
```
cat config_backup.json | \
  podman run -i --rm \
  images.edgeware.tv/auto-upgrade-esb3024-1.12.0:20240619T154952Z-2b72f7400 \
  --in - --from 1.10.2 --to 1.12.0 \
  | tee config_upgraded.json
```
After running the above command, apply the new configuration to confd by running cat config_upgraded.json | confcli -i.

Troubleshooting

1.2.6.1 - Configuration changes between 1.10.2 and 1.12

This describes the configuration changes between ESB3024 Router version 1.10.2 and 1.12.0/1.12.1.

Confd configuration changes

Below are the major changes to the confd configuration between versions 1.10.2 and 1.12.0/1.12.1. Note that there are no configuration changes between versions 1.12.0 and 1.12.1, so the differences apply to both.

Added `services.routing.translationFunctions.hostRequest`

A new translation function has been added which will allow custom Lua code to modify requests to backend hosts before they are sent.

Added `services.routing.translationFunctions.session`

A new translation function has been added which will allow custom Lua code to be executed after the router has made the routing decision but before generating the redirect URL.

An example use case would be for enabling instream sessions, which can be done by setting this value to return set_session_type('instream').

Removed `services.routing.settins.managedSessions` configuration

This configuration is no longger used.

Added `services.routing.tuning.general.maxActiveManagedSessions` tuning parameter.

This parameter configures the maximum number of active managed sessions.

1.2.7 - Installing release 1.10.x

How to install and upgrade to ESB3024 Router release 1.10.x

Prerequisites:

Ensure that the current user has sudo access.
```
sudo -l
```
If the above command fails, you may need to add the user to the /etc/sudoers file.
Ensure that the installer has password-less SSH access to localhost.
If using the root user, the PermitRootLogin property of the /etc/ssh/sshd_config file must be set to ‘yes’.
The local host key must also be included in the .ssh/authorized_keys file of the user running the installer. That can be done by issuing the following as the intended user:
```
mkdir -m 0700 -p ~/.ssh
ssh-keyscan localhost >> ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
```
Note! The ssh-keyscan utility will result in the key fingerprint being output on the console. As a security best-practice its recommended to verify that this host-key matches the machine’s true SSH host key. As an alternative, to this ssh-keyscan approach, establishing an SSH connection to localhost and accepting the host key will have the same result.
Disable SELinux.
The Security-Enhanced Linux Project (SELinux) is designed to add an additional layer of security to the operating system by enforcing a set of rules on processes. Unfortunately out of the box the default configuration is not compatible with the way the installer operates. Before proceeding with the installation, it is recommended to disable SELinux. It can be re-enabled after the installation completes, if desired, but will require manual configuration. Refer to the Red Hat Customer Portal for details.
To check if SELinux is enabled:
```
getenforce
```
This will result in one of 3 states, “Enforcing”, “Permissive” or “Disabled”. If the state is “Enforcing” use the following to disable SELinux. Either “Permissive” or “Disabled” is required to continue.
```
setenforce 0
```
This disables SELinux, but does not make the change persistent across reboots. To do that, edit the /etc/selinux/config file and set the SELINUX property to disabled.
It is recommended to reboot the computer after changing SELinux modes, but the changes should take effect immediately.

Assuming the installation ISO image is in the current working directory, the following steps need to be executed either by root user or with sudo.

Mount the installation ISO image under /mnt/acd.
Note: The mount-point may be any accessible path, but /mnt/acd will be used throughout this document.
```
mkdir -p /mnt/acd
mount esb3024-acd-router-esb3024-1.10.1.iso /mnt/acd
```
Run the installer script.
```
/mnt/acd/installer
```

Upgrade from ESB3024 Router release 1.8.0

The following steps can be used to upgrade the router from release 1.8.0 to 1.10.x. If upgrading from an earlier release it is recommended to perform the upgrade in multiple steps; for instance when upgrading from release 1.6.0 to 1.10.x, it is recommended to first upgrade to 1.8.0 and then to 1.10.x.

The upgrade procedure for the router is performed by taking a backup of the configuration, installing the new release of the router, and applying the saved configuration.

With the router running, save a backup of the configuration.
The exact procedure to accomplish this depends on the current method of configuration, e.g. if confd is used, then the configuration should be extracted from confd, but if the REST API is used directly, then the configuration must be saved by fetching the current configuration snapshot using the REST API.
Extracting the configuration using confd is the recommend approach where available.
```
confcli | tee config_backup.json
```
To extract the configuration from the REST API, the following may be used instead. Depending on the version of the router used, an API-Key may be required to fetch from the REST API.
```
curl --insecure https://localhost:5001/v2/configuration \
  | tee config_backup.json
```
If the API Key is required, it can be found in the file /opt/edgeware/acd/router/cache/rest-api-key.json and can be passed to the API by setting the value of the X-API-Key header.
```
curl --insecure -H "X-API-Key: 1234abcd" \
  https://localhost:5001/v2/configuration \
  | tee config_backup.json
```
Mount the new installation ISO under /mnt/acd.
Note: The mount-point may be any accessible path, but /mnt/acd will be used throughout this document.
```
mkdir -p /mnt/acd
mount esb3024-acd-router-esb3024-1.10.1.iso /mnt/acd
```
Stop the router and all associated services.
Before upgrading the router it needs to be stopped, which can be done by typing this:
```
systemctl stop 'acd-*'
```
Run the installer script.
```
/mnt/acd/installer
```
Migrate the configuration.
Note that this step only applies if the router is configured using confd. If it is configured using the REST API, this step is not necessary.
The confd configuration used in version 1.8.0 is not directly compatible with 1.10.x, and may need to be converted. If this is not done, the configuration will not be valid and it will not be possible to make configuration changes.
To determine if the configuration needs to be converted, confcli can be run like below. If it prints error messages, the configuration needs to be converted. If no error messages are printed, the configuration is valid and no further updates are necessary.
```
confcli | head -n5
[2024-04-02 14:48:37,155] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /integration
[2024-04-02 14:48:37,162] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/settings/qoeTracking
[2024-04-02 14:48:37,222] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/hostGroups/convoy-rr/hosts/convoy-rr-1/healthChecks
[2024-04-02 14:48:37,222] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/hostGroups/convoy-rr/hosts/convoy-rr-2/healthChecks
[2024-04-02 14:48:37,242] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/hostGroups/e-dns/hosts/linton-dns-1/healthChecks
{
   "integration": {
      "convoy": {
            "bridge": {
               "accounts": {
```
If error messages are printed, the configuration needs to be converted. If the configuration was saved in the file config_backup.json, the conversion can be done by typing this at the command line:
```
sed -E -e '/"hosts":/,/]/ s/([[:space:]]+)("hostname":.*)/\1\2\n\1"healthChecks": [],/' -e '/"apiKey":/ d' config_backup.json | \
curl -s -X PUT -T - -H 'Content-Type: application/json' http://localhost:5000/config/__active/
```
```
systemctl restart acd-confd
```
This adds empty healthChecks sections to all hosts and removes the apiKey configuration. After that, acd-confd is restarted. See Configuration changes between 1.8.0 and 1.10.x for more details about the configuration changes.
Migrating configuration to esb3024-1.10.2
When upgrading to version 1.10.2, an extra step is required to migrate the consistent hashing configuration. This step is necessary both when upgrading from an earlier 1.10 release and when upgrading from older versions. It is only needed if consistent hashing was configured in the previous version.
To determine if consistent hashing was configured, execute the following command:
```
confcli | head -n2
[2024-05-31 09:43:55,932] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/rules/constantine/hashAlgorithm
{
    "integration": {
```
If an error message about a missing configuration key appears, the configuration must be migrated. If no such error message appears, this step should be skipped.
To migrate the configuration, execute the following command at the command line:
```
curl -s http://localhost:5000/config/__active/ | \
sed -E 's/(.*)("type":.*"consistentHashing")(,?)/\1\2,\n\1"hashAlgorithm": "MD5"\3/' | \
curl -s -X PUT -T - -H 'Content-Type: application/json' http://localhost:5000/config/__active/
```
This command will read the current configuration, add the hashAlgorithm configuration key, and write back the updated configuration.
Remove the Account Monitor container
Older versions of the router installed the Account Monitor tool. This was removed in release 1.8.0, but if it is still present and unused, it can be removed by typing:
```
podman rm account-monitor
```
Remove the confd-transformer.lua file
After installing or upgrading to 1.10.x, ensure that the confd-transformer.lua script located in /opt/edgeware/acd/router/lib/standard_lua directory is removed.
This file contains deprecated Lua language definitions which will override newer versions of those functions already present in the ACD Router’s Lua Standard Library. When upgrading beyond 1.10.2, the installer will automatically remove this file, however for this particular release, it requires manual intervention.
```
rm -f /opt/edgeware/acd/router/lib/standard_lua/confd-transformer.lua
```
After removing this file, it will be necessary to restart the router to flush the definitions from the router’s memory:
```
systemctl restart acd-router
```

Troubleshooting

1.2.7.1 - Configuration changes between 1.8.0 and 1.10.x

This describes the configuration changes between ESB3024 Router version 1.8.0 and 1.10.x.

Confd configuration changes

Below are the major changes to the confd configuration between version 1.8.0 and 1.10.x listed.

Added `integration.convoy` section

An integration.convoy section has been added to the configuration. It is currently used for configuring the Convoy Bridge service.

Removed `services.routing.apiKey` configuration

The services.routing.apiKey configuration key has been removed. This was an obsolete way of giving the configuration access to the router. The key has to be removed from the configuration when upgrading, otherwise the configuration will not be accepted.

Added `services.routing.settings.qoeTracking`

A services.routing.settings.qoeTracking section has been added to the configuration.

Added `healthChecks` sections to the hosts

The hosts in the hostGroup entries have been extended with a healthChecks key, which is a list of functions that determine if a host is in good health.

For example, a redirecting host might look like this after the configuration has been updated:

{
    "services": {
        "routing": {
            "hostGroups": [
                {
                    "name": "convoy-rr",
                    "type": "redirecting",
                    "httpPort": 80,
                    "httpsPort": 443,
                    "forwardHostHeader": true,
                    "hosts": [
                        {
                            "name": "convoy-rr-1",
                            "hostname": "convoy-rr-1",
                            "ipv6_address": "",
                            "healthChecks": [
                                "health_check('convoy-rr-1')"
                            ]
                        }
                    ]
                }
            ],

Added `hashAlgorithm` to the `consistentHashing` rule

In esb3024-1.10.2 the consistentHashing routing rule has been extended with a hashAlgorithm key, which can have the values MD5, SDBM and Murmur. The default value is MD5.

1.2.8 - Installing release 1.8.0

How to install and upgrade to ESB3024 Router release 1.8.0

Prerequisites:

Ensure that the current user has sudo access.
```
sudo -l
```
If the above command fails, you may need to add the user to the /etc/sudoers file.
Ensure that the installer has password-less SSH access to localhost.
If using the root user, the PermitRootLogin property of the /etc/ssh/sshd_config file must be set to ‘yes’.
The local host key must also be included in the .ssh/authorized_keys file of the user running the installer. That can be done by issuing the following as the intended user:
```
mkdir -m 0700 -p ~/.ssh
ssh-keyscan localhost >> ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
```
Note! The ssh-keyscan utility will result in the key fingerprint being output on the console. As a security best-practice its recommended to verify that this host-key matches the machine’s true SSH host key. As an alternative, to this ssh-keyscan approach, establishing an SSH connection to localhost and accepting the host key will have the same result.
Disable SELinux.
The Security-Enhanced Linux Project (SELinux) is designed to add an additional layer of security to the operating system by enforcing a set of rules on processes. Unfortunately out of the box the default configuration is not compatible with the way the installer operates. Before proceeding with the installation, it is recommended to disable SELinux. It can be re-enabled after the installation completes, if desired, but will require manual configuration. Refer to the Red Hat Customer Portal for details.
To check if SELinux is enabled:
```
getenforce
```
This will result in one of 3 states, “Enforcing”, “Permissive” or “Disabled”. If the state is “Enforcing” use the following to disable SELinux. Either “Permissive” or “Disabled” is required to continue.
```
setenforce 0
```
It is recommended to reboot the computer after changing SELinux modes, but the changes should take effect immediately.

Assuming the installation ISO image is in the current working directory, the following steps need to be executed either by root user or with sudo.

Mount the installation ISO image under /mnt/acd.
Note: The mount-point may be any accessible path, but /mnt/acd will be used throughout this document.
```
mkdir -p /mnt/acd
mount esb3024-acd-router-esb3024-1.8.0.iso /mnt/acd
```
Run the installer script.
```
/mnt/acd/installer
```

Upgrade

The upgrade procedure for the router is performed by taking a backup of the configuration, installing the new version of the router, and applying the saved configuration.

With the router running, save a backup of the configuration.
The exact procedure to accomplish this depends on the current method of configuration, e.g. if confd is used, then the configuration should be extracted from confd, but if the REST API is used directly, then the configuration must be saved by fetching the current configuration snapshot using the REST API.
Extracting the configuration using confd is the recommend approach where available.
```
confcli | tee config_backup.json
```
To extract the configuration from the REST API, the following may be used instead. Depending on the version of the router used, an API-Key may be required to fetch from the REST API.
```
curl --insecure https://localhost:5001/v2/configuration \
  | tee config_backup.json
```
If the API Key is required, it can be found in the file /opt/edgeware/acd/router/cache/rest-api-key.json and can be passed to the API by setting the value of the X-API-Key header.
```
curl --insecure -H "X-API-Key: 1234abcd" \
  https://localhost:5001/v2/configuration \
  | tee config_backup.json
```
Mount the new installation ISO under /mnt/acd.
Note: The mount-point may be any accessible path, but /mnt/acd will be used throughout this document.
```
mkdir -p /mnt/acd
mount esb3024-acd-router-1.2.0.iso /mnt/acd
```
Stop the router and all associated services.
Before upgrading the router it needs to be stopped, which can be done by typing this:
```
systemctl stop 'acd-*'
```
Run the installer script.
```
/mnt/acd/installer
```
Migrate the configuration.
Note that this step only applies if the router is configured using confd. If it is configured using the REST API, this step is not necessary.
The confd configuration used in version 1.6.0 is not directly compatible with 1.8.0, and may need to have a few minor manual updates in order to be valid. If this is not done, the configuration will not be valid and it will not be possible to make configuration changes.
To determine if the configuration needs to be manually updated, confcli can be run like below. If it prints error messages, the configuration needs to be updated. If no error messages are printed, the configuration is valid and no further updates are necessary.
```
confcli services.routing | head
[2024-02-01 19:05:10,769] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/hostGroups/convoy-rr/forwardHostHeader
[2024-02-01 19:05:10,779] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/hostGroups/e-dns/forwardHostHeader
[2024-02-01 19:05:10,861] [ERROR] 'forwardHostHeader'
```
If error messages are printed, a forwardHostHeader configuration needs to be added to the hostGroups configuration. This can be done by running this at the command line:
```
curl -s http://localhost:5000/config/__active/ | \
sed -E 's/([[:space:]]+)"type": "(host|redirecting|dns)"(,?)/\1"type": "\2",\n\1"forwardHostHeader": false\3/' | \
curl -s -X PUT -T - -H 'Content-Type: application/json' http://localhost:5000/config/__active/
```
This reads the active configuration from the router, adds the “forwardHostHeader” configuration to all host groups, and then sends the updated configuration back to the router.
See Configuration changes between 1.6.0 and 1.8.0 for more details about the configuration changes.
Remove the Account Monitor container
Previous versions of the router installed the Account Monitor tool. This is no longer included, but since the previous version installed, there will be a stopped Account Monitor container. If it is not used, the container can be removed by typing:
```
podman rm account-monitor
```

Troubleshooting

1.2.8.1 - Configuration changes between 1.6.0 and 1.8.0

This describes the configuration changes between ESB3024 Router version 1.6.0 and 1.8.0.

Confd configuration changes

Below are some of the configuration changes between version 1.4.0 and 1.6.0 listed. The list only contains the changes that might affect already existing configuration, enirely new items are not listed. Normally nothing needs to be done about this since they will be upgraded automatically, but they are listed here for reference.

Added `enabled` to `contentPopularity`

An enabled key has been added to services.routing.settings.contentPopularity. After the key has been added, the configuration looks like this:

{
    "services": {
        "routing": {
            "settings": {
                "contentPopularity": {
                    "enabled": true,
                    "algorithm": "score_based",
                    "sessionGroupNames": []
                },
                ...

Added `selectionInputItemLimit` to `tuning`

A selectionInputItemLimit key has been added to services.routing.tuning.general. After the key has been added, the configuration looks like this:

{
    "services": {
        "routing": {
            "tuning": {
                "general": {
                    ...
                    "selectionInputItemLimit": 10000,
                    ...

Added `forwardHostHeader` to `hostGroups`

All three hostGroup types (host, redirecting and dns) have been extended with a forwardHostHeader key. For example, a redirecting host might look like this after the change:

{
    "services": {
        "routing": {
            "hostGroups": [
                {
                    "name": "convoy-rr",
                    "type": "redirecting",
                    "httpPort": 80,
                    "httpsPort": 443,
                    "forwardHostHeader": true,
                    "hosts": [
                        {
                            "name": "convoy-rr-1",
                            "hostname": "convoy-rr-1",
                            "ipv6_address": ""
                        }
                    ]
                }
            ],
            ...

REST API configuration changes

The following items have been added to the REST API configuration. They will not need to be manually updated, the router will add the new keys with default values. Note that this is not a complete list of all changes, it only contains the changes that will be automatically added when upgrading the router.

If the router is configured via confd and confcli, these changes will be applied by them. This section is only relevant if the router is configured via the v2/configuration API.

Added the session_translation_function key.
Added the tuning.selection_input_item_limit key.

1.2.9 - Installing release 1.6.0

How to install and upgrade to ESB3024 Router release 1.6.0

Prerequisites:

Ensure that the current user has sudo access.
```
sudo -l
```
If the above command fails, you may need to add the user to the /etc/sudoers file.
Ensure that the installer has password-less SSH access to localhost.
If using the root user, the PermitRootLogin property of the /etc/ssh/sshd_config file must be set to ‘yes’.
The local host key must also be included in the .ssh/authorized_keys file of the user running the installer. That can be done by issuing the following as the intended user:
```
mkdir -m 0700 -p ~/.ssh
ssh-keyscan localhost >> ~/.ssh/authorized_keys
```
Note! The ssh-keyscan utility will result in the key fingerprint being output on the console. As a security best-practice its recommended to verify that this host-key matches the machine’s true SSH host key. As an alternative, to this ssh-keyscan approach, establishing an SSH connection to localhost and accepting the host key will have the same result.
Disable SELinux.
The Security-Enhanced Linux Project (SELinux) is designed to add an additional layer of security to the operating system by enforcing a set of rules on processes. Unfortunately out of the box the default configuration is not compatible with the way the installer operates. Before proceeding with the installation, it is recommended to disable SELinux. It can be re-enabled after the installation completes, if desired, but will require manual configuration. Refer to the Red Hat Customer Portal for details.
To check if SELinux is enabled:
```
getenforce
```
This will result in one of 3 states, “Enforcing”, “Permissive” or “Disabled”. If the state is “Enforcing” use the following to disable SELinux. Either “Permissive” or “Disabled” is required to continue.
```
setenforce 0
```
It is recommended to reboot the computer after changing SELinux modes, but the changes should take effect immediately.

Assuming the installation ISO image is in the current working directory, the following steps need to be executed either by root user or with sudo.

Mount the installation ISO image under /mnt/acd.
Note: The mount-point may be any accessible path, but /mnt/acd will be used throughout this document.
```
mkdir -p /mnt/acd
mount esb3024-acd-router-esb3024-1.8.0.iso /mnt/acd
```
Run the installer script.
```
/mnt/acd/installer
```

Upgrade

The upgrade procedure for the router is performed by taking a backup of the configuration, installing the new version of the router, and applying the saved configuration.

With the router running, save a backup of the configuration.
The exact procedure to accomplish this depends on the current method of configuration, e.g. if confd is used, then the configuration should be extracted from confd, but if the REST API is used directly, then the configuration must be saved by fetching the current configuration snapshot using the REST API.
Extracting the configuration using confd is the recommend approach where available.
```
confcli | tee config_backup.json
```
To extract the configuration from the REST API, the following may be used instead. Depending on the version of the router used, an API-Key may be required to fetch from the REST API.
```
curl --insecure https://localhost:5001/v2/configuration \
  | tee config_backup.json
```
If the API Key is required, it can be found in the file /opt/edgeware/acd/router/cache/rest-api-key.json and can be passed to the API by setting the value of the X-API-Key header.
```
curl --insecure -H "X-API-Key: 1234abcd" \
  https://localhost:5001/v2/configuration \
  | tee config_backup.json
```
Mount the new installation ISO under /mnt/acd.
Note: The mount-point may be any accessible path, but /mnt/acd will be used throughout this document.
```
mkdir -p /mnt/acd
mount esb3024-acd-router-1.2.0.iso /mnt/acd
```
Stop the router and all associated services.
Before upgrading the router it needs to be stopped, which can be done by typing this:
```
systemctl stop 'acd-*'
```
Run the installer script.
```
/mnt/acd/installer
```
Migrate the configuration.
Note that this step only applies if the router is configured using confd. If it is configured using the REST API, this step is not necessary.
See Configuration changes between 1.4.0 and 1.6.0 for instructions on how to migrate the configuration to release 1.6.0.

Troubleshooting

1.2.9.1 - Configuration changes between 1.4.0 and 1.6.0

This describes the configuration changes between ESB3024 Router version 1.4.0 and 1.6.0.

confd configuration

The confd configuration used in version 1.4.0 is not directly compatible with 1.6.0, and will need to have a few minor updates in order to be valid. If this is not done, the configuration will not be valid and it will not be possible to make configuration changes. Running confcli will cause error messages and an empty default configuration to be printed.

$ confcli services.routing.
[2023-12-12 16:08:07,120] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/translationFunctions
[2023-12-12 16:08:07,122] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/settings/instream/dashManifestRewrite/sessionGroupNames
[2023-12-12 16:08:07,122] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/settings/instream/hlsManifestRewrite/sessionGroupNames
[2023-12-12 16:08:07,123] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/settings/managedSessions
[2023-12-12 16:08:07,123] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/tuning/target/recentDurationMilliseconds
{
    "routing": {
        "apiKey": "",
        "settings": {
            "allowedProxies": [],
            "contentPopularity": {
                "algorithm": "score_based",
                "sessionGroupNames": []
            },
            "extendedContentIdentifier": {
            ...

The first thing that needs to be done is to rename the keys sessionGroupIds to sessionGroupNames. If the configuration was backed up to the file config_backup.json before upgrading, the keys can be renamed and the updated configuration can be applied by typing this:

sed 's/"sessionGroupIds"/"sessionGroupNames"/' config_backup.json | confcli -i
[2023-12-19 12:33:17,725] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/translationFunctions
[2023-12-19 12:33:17,726] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/settings/instream/dashManifestRewrite/sessionGroupNames
[2023-12-19 12:33:17,727] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/settings/instream/hlsManifestRewrite/sessionGroupNames
[2023-12-19 12:33:17,727] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/settings/managedSessions
[2023-12-19 12:33:17,727] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/tuning/target/recentDurationMilliseconds

The configuration has not yet been converted, so the error messages are still printed. The configuration will be converted when the acd-confd service is restarted.

systemctl restart acd-confd

This concludes the conversion of the configuration and the router is ready to be used.

Configuration changes

Below are all configuration changes between version 1.4.0 and 1.6.0 listed. Normally nothing needs to be done about this since they will be upgraded automatically, but they are listed here for reference.

Added `translationFunctions` block

services.routing.translationFunctions has been added. It can be added as a map with two empty strings as values, to make the top of the configuration look like this:

{
    "services": {
        "routing": {
            "translationFunctions": {
                "request": "",
                "response": ""
            },
            ...

Renamed `sessionGroupIds` to `sessionGroupNames`

The keys services.routing.settings.instream.dashManifestRewrite.sessionGroupIds and services.routing.settings.instream.hlsManifestRewrite.sessionGroupIds have been renamed to services.routing.settings.instream.dashManifestRewrite.sessionGroupNames and services.routing.settings.instream.hlsManifestRewrite.sessionGroupNames respectively. Any session group IDs need to be manually converted to session group names.

After the conversion, the head of the configuration file might look like this:

{
    "services": {
        "routing": {
            "apiKey": "",
            "settings": {
                "allowedProxies": [],
                "contentPopularity": {
                    "algorithm": "score_based",
                    "sessionGroupNames": []
                },
                "extendedContentIdentifier": {
                    "enabled": false,
                    "includedQueryParams": []
                },
                "instream": {
                    "dashManifestRewrite": {
                        "enabled": false,
                        "sessionGroupNames": []
                    },
                    "hlsManifestRewrite": {
                        "enabled": false,
                        "sessionGroupNames": []
                    },
                    "reversedFilenameComparison": false
                },
                ...

Added `managedSessions` block

A services.routing.settings.managedSessions block has been added. After adding the block, the configuration might look like this:

{
    "services": {
        "routing": {
            "apiKey": "",
            "settings": {
                "allowedProxies": [],
                "contentPopularity": {
                    "algorithm": "score_based",
                    "sessionGroupNames": []
                },
                ...
                "managedSessions": {
                    "fraction": 0.0,
                    "maxActive": 100000,
                    "sessionTypes": []
                },
                "usageLog": {
                    "enabled": false,
                    "logInterval": 3600000
                }
            },
            ...

Added `recentDurationMilliseconds`

A services.routing.tuning.target.recentDurationMilliseconds key has been added to the configuration file, with a default value of 500. After adding the key, the configuration might look like this:

{
    "services": {
        "routing": {
            "apiKey": "",
            ...
            "tuning": {
                "target": {
                    ...
                    "recentDurationMilliseconds": 500,
                    ...

Storing the updated configuration

After all these changes have been done to the configuration file, it can be applied to the router using confcli.

confcli will still display error messages because the stored configuration is not valid. They will not be displayed anymore after the valid configuration has been applied.

$ confcli -i < updated_config.json
[2023-12-12 18:52:05,500] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/translationFunctions
[2023-12-12 18:52:05,502] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/settings/instream/dashManifestRewrite/sessionGroupNames
[2023-12-12 18:52:05,502] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/settings/instream/hlsManifestRewrite/sessionGroupNames
[2023-12-12 18:52:05,503] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/settings/managedSessions
[2023-12-12 18:52:05,511] [ERROR] Missing configuration key /services/routing/tuning/target/recentDurationMilliseconds

Raw configuration

The following changes have been made to the raw configuration. If the router is configured via confd and confcli, these changes will be applied by them. This section is only relevant if the router is configured via the v2/configuration API.

Simple changes

The following keys were added or removed. They will not need to be manually updated, the router will add the new keys with default values.

Removed the tuning.repeated_session_start_threshold_seconds key.
Removed the lua_paths key.
Added the tuning.target_recent_duration_milliseconds key.

EDNS proxy changes

If the router has been configured to use an EDNS server, the following has to be changed for the configuration to work.

The hosts.proxy_address key has been renamed to hosts.proxy_url and now accepts a port that is used when connecting to the proxy.

The cdns.http_port and cdns.https_port keys now configure the port that is used for connecting to the EDNS server, before they configured the port that is used for connecting to the proxy.

1.3 - Firewall

Firewall Configuration

For security reasons, the ESB3024 Installer does not automatically configure the local firewall to allow incoming traffic. It is the responsibility of the operations person to ensure that the system is protected from external access by placing it behind a suitable firewall solution. The following table describes the set of ports required for operation of the router.

Application	Port	Protocol	Direction	Source	Description
Prometheus Alert Manager	9093	TCP	IN	internal	Monitoring Services
Confd	5000	TCP	IN	internal	Configuration Services
Router	80	TCP	IN	public	Incoming HTTP Requests
Router	443	TCP	IN	public	Incoming HTTPS Requests
Router	5001	TCP	IN	localhost	Access to router’s REST API
Router	8000	TCP	IN	localhost	Internal monitoring port
EDNS-Proxy	8888	TCP	IN	localhost	Proxy EDNS Requests
Grafana	3000	TCP	IN	internal	Monitoring Services
Grafana-Loki	3100	TCP	IN	internal	Log monitoring daemon
Prometheus	9090	TCP	IN	internal	Monitoring Service

The “Direction” column represents the direction in which the connection is established.

IN - The connection is originated from an outside server
OUT - The connection is established from the host to an external server.

Once a connection is established through the firewall, bidirectional traffic must be allowed using the established connection.

For the “Source” column, the following terms are used.

internal - Any host or network which is allowed to monitor or operate the system.
public - Any host or subnet that can access the router. This includes any customer network that will be making routing requests.
localhost - Access can be limited to local connections only.
any - All traffic from any source or to any destination.

Additional Ports

Convoy Bridge Integration

The optional convoy-bridge service needs the ability to access the Convoy MariaDB service, which by default runs on port 3306 on all of the Convoy Management servers. To allow this integration to run, port 3306/tcp must be allowed from the router to the configured Convoy Management node.

1.4 - Selection Input API

The Selection Input API

The selection input API is used to inject user-defined data into the routing engine, making the data available for making routing decisions. Any JSON structures can be stored in the selection input.

One use case for selection input is to provide data on cache availability. For example, if {"edge-streamer-2-online": true} is sent to the selection input API, the routing condition eq('edge-streamer-2-online', true) can be used to ensure that no traffic gets routed to the streamer if it’s offline.

Details on how to store data in the selection input can be found in the API overview.

Configuration

There is a configurable limit to the number of items that the selection input can hold. This is controlled by the selectionInputItemLimit tuning parameter, which sets the maximum number of leaf items that can be stored in the selection input. The reason for this configuration is to prevent the selection input to grow indefinitely. There is no harm in increasing it if needed.

$ confcli services.routing.tuning.general.selectionInputItemLimit
{
    "selectionInputItemLimit": 10000
}

Some classifiers can take their patterns from the selection input. In order for them to have the latest data in a system with multiple instances of the Director, their selection input data can be fetched from the AgileTV CDN Manager. This is configured with the selectionInputFetchBase parameter:

$ confcli integration.manager.selectionInputFetchBase
{
    "selectionInputFetchBase": "https://acd-manager.example.com/api/selection-input/"
}

1.5 - API Overview

A brief description of the API:s served by ESB3024 Router

ESB3024 Router provides two different types of API:s:

A content request API that is used by video clients to ask for content, normally using port 80 for HTTP and port 443 for HTTPS.
A few REST API:s used by administrators to configure and monitor the router installation, using port 5001 over HTTPS by default.

The content API won’t be described further in this document, since it’s a simple HTTP interface serving content as regular files or redirect responses.

Raw configuration – `/v2/configuration`

Used to check and update the raw configuration of ESB3024 Router. Note that this API is considered an implementation detail and is not documented further.

REQUEST Method	Content-Type	RESPONSE Result	Status Code	Content-Type
`GET`	<N/A>	Success	200 OK	`application/json`
`PUT`	`application/json`	Success	204 No Content	<N/A>
`PUT`	`application/json`	Failure	400 Bad Request	`application/json`¹

Validate Configuration – `/v2/validate_configuration`

Used to determine if a JSON payload is correctly formatted without actually applying its configuration. A successful return status does not guarantee that the applied configuration will work, it only validates the JSON structure.

REQUEST Method	Content-Type	RESPONSE Result	Status Code	Content-Type
`PUT`	`application/json`	Success	204 No Content	<N/A>
`PUT`	`application/json`	Failure	400 Bad Request	`application/json`¹

Example request

When an expected field is missing from the payload, the validation will show which one and return an appropriate error message in its payload:

$ curl -i -X PUT \
    -d '{"routing": {"log_level": 3}}' \
    -H "Content-Type: application/json" \
    https://router.example:5001/v2/validate_configuration
HTTP/1.1 400 Bad Request
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 132
Content-Type: application/json
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

"Configuration validation: Configuration parsing failed. \
  Exception: [json.exception.out_of_range.403] (/routing) key 'id' not found"

Selection Input

There are two versions of the selection input API, /v1/selection_input and /v3/selection_input. The former is the legacy version and the latter is the new version. It is recommended that all new integrations use the /v3/selection_input API.

`/v3/selection_input`

The /v3/selection_input API supports the GET, POST, PUT, and DELETE methods.

PUT replaces the data at the specified path with the provided data. If the path does not exist, it will be created.
POST is only used for appending data to arrays. The last element in the path must be an array. If the path does not exist, it will be created, with the last segment as an array.
GET requests fetch the current selection input data at the given path.
DELETE requests remove the data at the given path.

Example `PUT` request

$ curl -i -X PUT \
    -d '{"bitrate": 13000, "capacity": 50000}' \
    -H "Content-Type: application/json" \
    https://router.example.com:5001/v3/selection_input/hosts/host1
HTTP/1.1 201 Created
Access-Control-Allow-Headers: Content-Type, Authorization
Access-Control-Allow-Methods: GET, POST, PUT, DELETE, OPTIONS
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 0
X-Service-Identity: router.example.com-5fc78d

Example `POST` request

$ curl -i -X POST \
    -d '"server1"' \
    -H "Content-Type: application/json" \
     https://router.example.com:5001/v3/selection_input/modules/allowed_servers
HTTP/1.1 201 Created
Access-Control-Allow-Headers: Content-Type, Authorization
Access-Control-Allow-Methods: GET, POST, PUT, DELETE, OPTIONS
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 0
X-Service-Identity: router.example.com-5fc78d

Example `GET` request

$ curl -i https://router.example.com:5001/v3/selection_input
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Headers: Content-Type, Authorization
Access-Control-Allow-Methods: GET, POST, PUT, DELETE, OPTIONS
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 156
Content-Type: application/json
X-Service-Identity: router.example.com-5fc78d

{
  "hosts": {
    "host1": {
      "bitrate": 13000,
      "capacity": 50000
    }
  },
  "modules": {
    "allowed_servers": [
      "server1"
    ]
  }
}

Example `DELETE` request

$ curl -i -X DELETE \
    https://router.example.com:5001/v3/selection_input/modules/allowed_servers
HTTP/1.1 204 No Content
Access-Control-Allow-Headers: Content-Type, Authorization
Access-Control-Allow-Methods: GET, POST, PUT, DELETE, OPTIONS
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 0
X-Service-Identity: router.example.com-5fc78d

`/v1/selection_input`

The /v1/selection_input API supports the GET, PUT, and DELETE methods.

When performing GET or DELETE requests, specific selection input values can be accessed or deleted by including a path to the request. Note that not specifying a path will select all selection input values. PUT requests do not support supplying paths, the path to the element to be modified is deduced by the keys in the provided JSON object.

REQUEST Method	Content-Type	RESPONSE Result	Status Code	Content-Type
`PUT`	`application/json`	Success	204 No Content	<N/A>
`PUT`	`application/json`	Failure	400 Bad Request	`application/json`
`GET`	<N/A>	Success	200 OK	`application/json`
`DELETE`	<N/A>	Success	204 No Content	<N/A>
`DELETE`	<N/A>	Failure	404 Not Found	<N/A>

Example successful request (`PUT`)

$ curl -i -X PUT \
    -d '{"host1_bitrate": 13000, "host1_capacity": 50000}' \
    -H "Content-Type: application/json" \
    https://router.example.com:5001/v1/selection_input
HTTP/1.1 204 No Content
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 0
X-Service-Identity: router.example.com-5fc78d

Example unsuccessful request (`PUT`)

$ curl -i -X PUT \
    -d '{"cdn-status": {"session-count": 12345, "load-percent" 98}}' \
    -H "Content-Type: application/json" \
    https://router.example.com:5001/v1/selection_input
HTTP/1.1 400 Bad Request
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 169
Content-Type: application/json
X-Service-Identity: router.example.com-5fc78d

{
  "error": "[json.exception.parse_error.101] parse error at line 1, column 57: \
    syntax error while parsing object separator - \
    unexpected number literal; expected ':'"
}

Example successful request (`GET`)

curl -i https://router.example.com:5001/v1/selection_input
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 129
Content-Type: application/json
X-Service-Identity: router.example.com-5fc78d

{
  "host1_bitrate": 13000,
  "host1_capacity": 50000
}

Example successful specific value request (`GET`)

curl -i https://router.example.com:5001/v1/selection_input/path/to/value
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 129
Content-Type: application/json
X-Service-Identity: router.example.com-5fc78d

1

Example successful request (`DELETE`)

curl -i -X DELETE https://router.example.com:5001/v1/selection_input
HTTP/1.1 204 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 129
X-Service-Identity: router.example.com-5fc78d

Example successful specific value request (`DELETE`)

curl -i -X DELETE  https://router.example.com:5001/v1/selection_input/value/to/delete
HTTP/1.1 204 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 129
X-Service-Identity: router.example.com-5fc78d

Example unsuccessful request (`DELETE`)

curl -i -X DELETE  https://router.example.com:5001/v1/selection_input/non/existent/value
HTTP/1.1 404 Not Found
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 129
X-Service-Identity: router.example.com-5fc78d

Subnets – `/v1/subnets`

An API for managing named subnets that can be used for routing and block lists. See Subnets for more details.

PUT requests inject key value pairs with the form {<subnet>: <value>}, where <subnet> is a valid CIDR string, into ACD, e.g.:

$ curl -i -X PUT \
    -d '{"255.255.255.255/24": "area1", "1.2.3.4/24": "area2"}' \
    -H "Content-Type: application/json" \
    https://router.example:5001/v1/subnets
HTTP/1.1 204 No Content
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 0
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

GET requests are used to fetch injected subnets, e.g.:

# Fetch all injected subnets
$ curl -i https://router.example:5001/v1/subnets
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 411
Content-Type: application/json
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

{
  "1.2.3.4/16": "area2",
  "1.2.3.4/24": "area1",
  "1.2.3.4/8": "area3",
  "255.255.255.255/16": "area2",
  "255.255.255.255/24": "area1",
  "255.255.255.255/8": "area3",
  "2a02:2e02:9bc0::/16": "area8",
  "2a02:2e02:9bc0::/32": "area7",
  "2a02:2e02:9bc0::/48": "area6",
  "2a02:2e02:9de0::/44": "combined_area",
  "2a02:2e02:ada0::/44": "combined_area",
  "5.5.0.4/8": "area5",
  "90.90.1.3/16": "area4"
}

DELETE requests are used to delete injected subnets, e.g.:

# Delete all injected subnets
$ curl -i https://router.example:5001/v1/subnets -X DELETE
HTTP/1.1 204 No Content
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 0
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

Both GET and DELETE requests can be specified with the paths /byKey/ and /byValue/ to filter which subnets to GET or DELETE.

# Fetch subnet with the CIDR string 1.2.3.4/8 if it exists
$ curl -i https://router.example:5001/v1/subnets/byKey/1.2.3.4/8
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 26
Content-Type: application/json
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

{
  "1.2.3.4/8": "area3"
}

# Fetch all subnets whose CIDR string begins with the IP 1.2.3.4
$ curl -i https://router.example:5001/v1/subnets/byKey/1.2.3.4
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 76
Content-Type: application/json
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

{
  "1.2.3.4/16": "area2",
  "1.2.3.4/24": "area1",
  "1.2.3.4/8": "area3"
}

# Fetch all subnets whose value equals 'area1'
$ curl -i https://router.example:5001/v1/subnets/byValue/area1
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 60
Content-Type: application/json
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

{
  "1.2.3.4/24": "area1",
  "255.255.255.255/24": "area1"
}

# Delete subnet with the CIDR string 1.2.3.4/8 if it exists
$ curl -i https://router.example:5001/v1/subnets/byKey/1.2.3.4/8
HTTP/1.1 204 No Content
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 0
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

# Delete all subnets whose CIDR string begins with the IP 1.2.3.4
$ curl -i https://router.example:5001/v1/subnets/byKey/1.2.3.4
HTTP/1.1 204 No Content
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 0
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

# Delete all subnets whose value equals 'area1'
$ curl -i https://router.example:5001/v1/subnets/byValue/area1
HTTP/1.1 204 No Content
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 0
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

REQUEST Method	Content-Type	RESPONSE Result	Status Code	Content-Type
`PUT`	`application/json`	Success	204 No Content	<N/A>
`PUT`	`application/json`	Failure	400 Bad Request	`application/json`
`GET`	<N/A>	Success	200 OK	`application/json`
`GET`	<N/A>	Failure	400 Bad Request	`application/json`
`DELETE`	<N/A>	Success	204 No Content	`application/json`
`DELETE`	<N/A>	Failure	400 Bad Request	`application/json`

Subrunner Resource Usage – `/v1/usage`

Used to monitor the load on subrunners, the processes performing those tasks that are possible to run in parallel.

REQUEST Method	Content-Type	RESPONSE Result	Status Code	Content-Type
`GET`	<N/A>	Success	200 OK	`application/json`

Example request

$ curl -i https://router.example:5001/v1/usage
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 1234
Content-Type: application/json
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

{
  "total_usage": {
    "content": {
      "lru": 0,
      "newest": "-",
      "oldest": "-",
      "total": 0
    },
    "sessions": 0,
    "subrunner_usage": {
      [...]
    }
  },
  "usage_per_subrunner": [
    {
      "subrunner_usage": {
        [...]
      }
    },
    [...]
  ]
}

Metrics – `/m1/v1/metrics`

An interface intended to be scraped by Prometheus. It is possible to scrape it manually to see current values, but doing so will reset some counters and cause actual Prometheus data to become faulty.

REQUEST Method	Content-Type	RESPONSE Result	Status Code	Content-Type
`GET`	<N/A>	Success	200 OK	`text/plain`

Example request

$ curl -i https://router.example:5001/m1/v1/metrics
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 1234
Content-Type: text/plain
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

# TYPE num_configuration_changes counter
num_configuration_changes 12
# TYPE num_log_errors_total counter
num_log_errors_total 0
# TYPE num_log_warnings_total counter
num_log_warnings_total{category=""} 123
# TYPE num_log_warnings_total counter
num_log_warnings_total{category="cdn"} 0
# TYPE num_log_warnings_total counter
num_log_warnings_total{category="content"} 0
# TYPE num_log_warnings_total counter
num_log_warnings_total{category="generic"} 10
# TYPE num_log_warnings_total counter
num_log_warnings_total{category="repeated_session"} 0
# TYPE num_ssl_errors_total counter
[...]

Node Visit Counters – `/v1/node_visits`

Used to gather statistics about the number of visits to each node in the routing tree. The returned value is a JSON object containing node ID names and their corresponding counter values.

REQUEST Method	Content-Type	RESPONSE Result	Status Code	Content-Type
`GET`	<N/A>	Success	200 OK	`application/json`

See Routing Rule Evaluation Metrics for more details.

Example request

$ curl -i https://router.example:5001/v1/node_visits
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 73
Content-Type: application/json
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

{
  "cache1.tv": "99900",
  "offload": "100"
  "routingtable": "100000"
}

Node Visit Graph – `/v1/node_visits_graph`

Creates a GraphML representation of the node visitation data that can be rendered into an image to make it easier to understand the data.

REQUEST Method	Content-Type	RESPONSE Result	Status Code	Content-Type
`GET`	<N/A>	Success	200 OK	`application/xml`

See Routing Rule Evaluation Metrics for more details.

Example request

> curl -i -k https://router.example:5001/v1/node_visits_graph
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 731
Content-Type: application/xml
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

<?xml version="1.0"?>
<graphml xmlns="http://graphml.graphdrawing.org/xmlns"
  xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
  xsi:schemaLocation="http://graphml.graphdrawing.org/xmlns http://graphml.graphdrawing.org/xmlns/1.0/graphml.xsd">
  <key id="visits" for="node" attr.name="visits" attr.type="string" />
  <graph id="G" edgedefault="directed">
    <node id="routingtable">
      <data key="visits">100000</data>
    </node>
    <node id="cache1.tv">
      <data key="visits">99900</data>
    </node>
    <node id="offload">
      <data key="visits">100</data>
    </node>
    <edge id="e0" source="routingtable" target="cache1.tv" />
    <edge id="e1" source="routingtable" target="offload" />
  </graph>
</graphml>

Session list - `/v1/sessions`

Used to monitor the load on subrunners, the processes performing those tasks that are possible to run in parallel.

REQUEST Method	Content-Type	RESPONSE Result	Status Code	Content-Type
`GET`	<N/A>	Success	200 OK	`application/json`

Example request

$ curl -k -i https://router.example:5001/v1/sessions
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 12345
Content-Type: application/json
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

{
  "sessions": [
    {
      "age_seconds": 103,
      "cdn": "edgeware",
      "cdn_is_redirecting": false,
      "client_ip": "1.2.3.4",
      "host": "cdn.example:80",
      "id": "router.example-5fc78d-00000001",
      "idle_seconds": 103,
      "last_request_time": "2022-12-02T14:05:05Z",
      "latest_request_path": "/__cl/s:storage1/__c/v/f/0/5/v_sintel3v_f05a05f07d352e891d79863131ef4df7/__op/hls-default/__f/index.m3u8",
      "no_of_requests": 1,
      "requested_bytes": 0,
      "requests_redirected": 0,
      "requests_served": 0,
      "session_groups": [
        "all"
      ],
      "session_groups_generation": 2,
      "session_path": "/__cl/s:storage1/__c/v/f/0/5/v_sintel3v_f05a05f07d352e891d79863131ef4df7/__op/hls-default/__f/index.m3u8",
      "start_time": "2022-12-02T14:05:05Z",
      "type": "instream",
      "user_agent": "libmpv"
    },
    [...]
  ]
}

Session details - `/v1/sessions/<id: str>`

Used to get details about a specific session from the above session list. The id part of the URL corresponds to the id field in one of the returned session entries in the above response.

REQUEST Method	Content-Type	RESPONSE Result	Status Code	Content-Type
`GET`	<N/A>	Success	200 OK	`application/json`
`GET`	<N/A>	Failure	404 Not Found	`application/json`

Example request

$ curl -k -i https://router.example:5001/v1/sessions/router.example-5fc78d-00000001
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 763
Content-Type: application/json
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

{
  "age_seconds": 183,
  "cdn": "edgeware",
  "cdn_is_redirecting": false,
  "client_ip": "1.2.3.4",
  "host": "cdn.example:80",
  "id": "router.example-5fc78d-00000001",
  "idle_seconds": 183,
  "last_request_time": "2022-12-02T14:05:05Z",
  "latest_request_path": "/__cl/s:storage1/__c/v/f/0/5/v_sintel3v_f05a05f07d352e891d79863131ef4df7/__op/hls-default/__f/index.m3u8",
  "no_of_requests": 1,
  "requested_bytes": 0,
  "requests_redirected": 0,
  "requests_served": 0,
  "session_groups": [
    "all"
  ],
  "session_groups_generation": 2,
  "session_path": "/__cl/s:storage1/__c/v/f/0/5/v_sintel3v_f05a05f07d352e891d79863131ef4df7/__op/hls-default/__f/index.m3u8",
  "start_time": "2022-12-02T14:05:05Z",
  "type": "instream",
  "user_agent": "libmpv"
}

Content List - `/v1/content`

REQUEST Method	Content-Type	RESPONSE Result	Status Code	Content-Type
`GET`	<N/A>	Success	200 OK	`application/json`

Example request

$ curl -k -i https://router.example:5001/v1/content
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 572
Content-Type: application/json
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

{
  "content": [
    [
      "/__cl/s:storage1/__c/v/f/0/5/v_sintel3v_f05a05f07d352e891d79863131ef4df7/__op/hls-default/__f/index.m3u8",
      {
        "cached_count": 0,
        "content_requested": false,
        "content_set": false,
        "expiration_time": "2022-12-02T14:05:05Z",
        "key": "/__cl/s:storage1/__c/v/f/0/5/v_sintel3v_f05a05f07d352e891d79863131ef4df7/__op/hls-default/__f/index.m3u8",
        "listeners": 0,
        "manifest": "",
        "request_count": 4,
        "state": "HLS:MANIFEST-PENDING",
        "wait_count": 0
      }
    ]
  ]
}

Lua scripts – `/v1/lua/<path str>.lua`

Used to upload, retrieve and delete custom named Lua scripts on the router. Global functions in uploaded scripts automatically become available to Lua code in the configuration (which effectively may be viewed as hooks). Upload a script by PUTing a application/x-lua to the endpoint, and retrieve it by GETing the endpoint without payload.

REQUEST Method	Content-Type	RESPONSE Result	Status Code	Content-Type
`PUT`	`application/x-lua`	Success	204 No Content	<N/A>
`PUT`	`application/x-lua`	Failure	400 Bad Request	`application/json`
`GET`	<N/A>	Success	200 OK	`application/x-lua`
`GET`	<N/A>	Failure	404 Not Found	`application/json`
`DELETE`	<N/A>	Success	204 No Content	<N/A>
`DELETE`	<N/A>	Failure	400 Bad Request	`application/json`
`DELETE`	<N/A>	Failure	404 Not Found	`application/json`

Example request (`PUT`)

Save a Lua script under the name advanced_functions/f1.lua:

$ curl -i -X PUT \
    -d 'function fun1() return 1 end' \
    -H "Content-Type: application/x-lua" \
    https://router.example:5001/v1/lua/advanced_functions/f1.lua
HTTP/1.1 204 Successfully saved Lua file
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 0
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

Example request (`PUT`, from file)

Upload an entire Lua file under the name advanced_functions/f1.lua:

First put your code in a file.

$ cat f1.lua
function fun1()
    return 1
end

Then upload it using the --data-binary flag to preserve newlines

$ curl -i -X PUT \
    --data-binary @f1.lua \
    -H "Content-Type: application/x-lua" \
    https://router.example:5001/v1/lua/advanced_functions/f1.lua
HTTP/1.1 204 Successfully saved Lua file
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 0
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

Example request (`GET`)

Request the Lua script named advanced_functions/f1.lua using a GET request:

$ curl -i https://router.example:5001/v1/lua/advanced_functions/f1.lua
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 28
Content-Type: application/x-lua
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

function fun1() return 1 end

Example request (`DELETE`)

Delete the Lua script named advanced_functions/f1.lua using a DELETE request:

$ curl -i -X DELETE \
    https://router.example:5001/v1/lua/advanced_functions/f1.lua
HTTP/1.1 204 Successfully removed Lua file
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 0
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

List Lua scripts – `/v1/lua`

Used to list previously uploaded custom Lua scripts on the router, retrieving their respective paths and file checksums.

REQUEST Method	Content-Type	RESPONSE Result	Status Code	Content-Type
`GET`	<N/A>	Success	200 OK	`application/json`

Example request

$ curl -k -i https://router.example:5001/v1/lua
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 108
Content-Type: application/json
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

[
  {
    "file_checksum": "d41d8cd98f00b204e9800998ecf8427e",
    "path": "advanced_functions/f1.lua"
  }
]

Debug a Lua expression – `/v1/lua/debug`

Used to debug an arbitrary Lua expression on the router in a “sandbox” (with no visible side effects to the state of the router), and inspect the result.

The Lua expression in the body is evaluated inside an isolated copy of the internal Lua environment including selection input. The stdout field of the resulting JSON body is populated with a concatenation of every string provided as argument to the Lua print() function during the course of evaluation. Upon a successful evaluation, as indicated by the success flag, return.value and return.lua_type_name capture the resulting Lua value. Otherwise, if valuation was aborted (e.g. due to a Lua exception), error_msg reflects any error description arising from the Lua environment.

REQUEST Method	Content-Type	RESPONSE Result	Status Code	Content-Type
`POST`	`application/x-lua`	Success	200 OK	`application/json`

Example successful request

$ curl -i -X POST \
    -d 'fun1()' \
    -H "Content-Type: application/x-lua" \
    https://router.example:5001/v1/lua/debug
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 123
Content-Type: application/json
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

{
  "error_msg": "",
  "return": {
    "lua_type_name": "number",
    "value": 1.0
  },
  "stdout": "",
  "success": true
}

Example unsuccessful request

(attempt to invoke unknown function)

$ curl -i -X POST \
    -d 'fun5()' \
    -H "Content-Type: application/x-lua" \
    https://router.example:5001/v1/lua/debug
HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Access-Control-Allow-Origin: *
Content-Length: 123
Content-Type: application/json
X-Service-Identity: router.example-5fc78d

{
  "error_msg": "[string \"function f0() ...\"]:2: attempt to call global 'fun5' (a nil value)",
  "return": {
    "lua_type_name": "",
    "value": null
  },
  "stdout": "",
  "success": false
}

Footnotes

The content type of the response is set to “application/json” but the payload is actually a regular string without JSON syntax. ↩︎ ↩︎

1.6 - Configuration

How to write and deploy configuration for ESB3024 Router

1.6.1 - WebUI Configuration

How to use the web user interface for configuration.

The web-based user interface can be used to configure many common use cases for the CDN Director.

Normally the GUI is accessible from the CDN Manager at an address like https://cdn-manager/gui/. After navigating to the UI, a login screen will be presented:

Enter your credentials and log in.

Once logged in, the middle of the screen will present a few sections. Depending on your user’s permissions and licensed features, different options will be made available.

In the general case, two options will be presented:

CDN Director
Configuration Panel

At the top right corner is a user menu with an option to log out.

The left-hand side of the page shows a collapsible menu with a few icons:

filters the menu options
used to return to the landing page
link to the Director Routing rule configuration view
link to the Director configuration panel view

CDN Director Routing

This view provides a graphical tree-based model for configuring how the Director should classify and route incoming content requests.

After navigating to the CDN Director Routing page, the left side will show a list of routing rule block types and host group variants. The user can drag and drop items from this list onto the main canvas in order to design a routing solution.

The Search component input field at the top can be used to search and filter among the available components. Clicking the question mark next to a component shows a description popup.

Title Bar

Above the main canvas is the title bar. On the left side is the name of the currently selected routing configuration and its creation date:

Configuration Title

To the right are a series of buttons, from left to right:

Routing Rule Group

Creates a grouping rectangle on the canvas. Any routing rules placed on this rectangle can be moved around together, making it easier to construct logical units. This is only a visual and practical effect, it doesn’t in any way change the generated configuration.

Routing Settings

Opens a popup menu on the right-hand side of the canvas where various configuration options can be changed. A list of CDN Director instances to apply the configuration to can be found and modified here, as well as the general look and feel of the GUI.

Routing Configuration

Opens a display of the configuration JSON generated from the graphical representation and allows for editing the text directly. Any changes made will automatically be loaded into the graphical representation.

Arrange

Automatically arranges all the blocks in the canvas, hopefully making it less messy. Routing decision flow begins from the top left and moves rightwards.

Publish

Pushes the currently active configuration onto all the configured CDN Director instances. Changes take effect immediately assuming they do not contain any errors and the GUI will display a dialog with the update results.

Save

Saves the configuration to the listed CDN Director targets, with a name provided by the user. Previously saved configurations can be accessed by clicking the house icon next to the configuration title at the middle top of the canvas.

Note that merely saving a configuration does not make it take effect, it is just for making backups or alternative configurations.
To make a configuration take effect, you have to Publish it.

Saved Configurations

Clicking the House icon in the title bar navigates to the saved configurations section.

The upper part of this section is a template list allowing the user to either start a new configuration from scratch by selecting “New configuration” or start from a skeleton configuration by selecting one of the available template tiles.

Templates

The lower part contains all stored configurations. First in the list is always the currently published configuration, followed by any user-created configurations that have been saved.

Each entry in the list contain information about its name, who created it and when it was last saved. Next to each saved configuration is a trash can button used to delete it.

Version List

Configuration Options

Clicking the Routing Settings icon opens a panel with configuration options and settings on the right-hand side of the screen. This panel has the two tabs Configurations and Style.

Configuration

The configuration tab allows the user to manage the CDN Director instances that are to be configured by the GUI.

Whenever a user pushes either Publish or Save version, the configuration will be sent to routers configured in this list.

Router List

Each entry has a name, an address and a radio button to disable publication to specific instances that are e.g. taken out for maintenance. Turning a Director off won’t affect the current running status of that instance, it will only disable pushing any new configuration to it.

As seen above, the address can be either a full URL with scheme, hostname, port and path such as http://router1.example.com:5000/config or a relative path used e.g. to push configurations through an CDN Manager node: /confd/router1/config.

Style Options

This pane contains various settings for the look and feel of the routing configuration view. The user can change line width and stroke type as well as colors associated with different node types.

Style

Arrange Button

This button will automatically arrange the routing nodes in the canvas, trying to make the connections easier to follow.

Imagine a user has designed the routing flow organically, placing components anywhere on the screen as their need arose. This can make it difficult to get an overview.

Chaos

Clicking the Arrange button makes the GUI suggest a more structured arrangement:

Order

Save Version Button

Sometimes it can be useful to save a copy of a configuration, either because you need to try an entirely different design, or because you want to store a working setup before tweaking it to make sure you can revert to a working state in case anything goes wrong.

Clicking the Save version button opens a dialog box allowing you to pick a name and save the currently displayed configuration to all the linked CDN Director instances without activating it.

Save Save

Going back to the saved configurations list, the new entry has appeared:

Save

Publish Button

Clicking the Publish button sends the currently displayed configuration to be sent to all enabled CDN Director instances. If it contains a complete and valid configuration the Directors will then apply any changes.

A dialog box will display the publish status for each configured Director:

Publish

Configuration Panel

The configuration panel view allows for configuring routing-adjacent features, such as blocked/allowed referral addresses, blocked/allowed user agent strings or CDN host capacity values.

At the moment there are two supported configurations: Blocked tokens and blocked referrers.

Tokens

Selecting Tokens allows the user to observe and edit a list of currently blocked tokens:

Empty Token List

Several actions are available at this point:

Add a new token string to be blocked, along with a corresponding time-to-live (TTL) value in seconds.

Add Dialog

A newly added token will automatically be removed after TTL seconds, to avoid filling up the database with outdated or stale values.

In order to avoid performance hits when there are many tokens, nothing is shown in this list until a search string is entered manually by the operator. This is because a token is added to the list every time a valid token request is made and the database can grow to millions of entries.

At least three characters must be entered for searching to begin. A maximum of 100 results are shown. Write more specific search strings to filter out irrelevant token entries.

Note that token-reuse blocking depends on there being a Routing node, e.g. a Deny block, with a suitable condition function that performs the token extraction and blocking.

Referrers

This section allows for blocking specific referrer addresses. Unlike the token list, this table will display entries immediately since it is not anticipated to contain nearly as many entries.

Like with the token list, at most 100 entries are shown at a time. Use the search box to find the relevant referrers if the list is full.

Add Referrer

Clicking the button will open a window to add a new referrer string to the block list. Clicking the ‘X’ closes the window without adding a new entry.

The search box filters which already-added referrer strings are displayed in the list. At least three characters must be written for filtering to begin, and regardless of how many matching results there are, only 100 will be displayed in the list so it is recommended to be as specific as necessary when searching.

Trash can

Clicking the trash can next to a referrer removes it from the list of blocked referrers.

Example Routing Configuration

The following text will describe how to set up a simple routing system that has an internal CDN with two streaming servers and one external CDN.

The internal CDN is meant for serving live TV with low latency as well as VOD traffic provided there is enough capacity left without overloading the servers and affect live traffic latency.

In order to demonstrate the Director’s traffic filtering capability the setup will also send any mobile traffic from outside of Stockholm, Sweden to the external CDN.

Finally, a load balancing node is added to split the remaining incoming requests equally between the two internal hosts.

In summary, the configuration will:

Route off-net traffic from mobile phones to the external CDN.
Route Live traffic to the external CDN if the internal CDN is overloaded.
Route any remaining traffic to the internal CDN.

Step-by-Step Walkthrough

When creating a new configuration the only thing that exists is an Entrypoint node. This node is used to indicate where the routing engine should begin traversing the routing tree for a new incoming request.

Empty

Begin by dragging a Split node onto the canvas and connect it to the Entrypoint.

First Split Initial

A Split node splits the incoming traffic into two separate streams based on a condition. The default condition is a function called always() that evaulates as true for any request. This is not very useful for this example, replace it by clicking on the Condition input field in the node.

This brings us to a dialog box where we can simply replace the condition with another string or go to a graphical representation of the condition to help guide us through the steps to getting the Split node to do what we need.

Condition Dialog

Graphical Condition Builder

Clicking the Graphical View button opens up the graphical representation which currently shows two condition nodes connected together, one representing the default condition always() previously mentioned, and one called Condition Output which is a target placeholder for the end result of the entire graph.

Output from one condition node is connected to the input of another node until the entire chain ends up with the Condition Output node.

Condition List Classifier List SessionGroup List

On the left-hand side is a menu with the items Session Groups, Conditions and Classifiers. The Conditions section contains different condition components whose outputs can be connected to either other condition nodes or the Condition Output.

Condition Graphical View

Delete the Always node and replace it with one from the Conditions menu, specifically In Session Group, and connect its output to Condition Output.

The new condition node takes a Session Group as its input. Drag one of those from the menu onto the canvas and connect its output to the input labeled “Session Group”. Give the Session Group node the name “mobile-off-net” since it is going to contain requests from mobile units outside of the main network.

The Session Group takes a number of classifiers as inputs. Open the Classifiers section of the menu and drag a Geo IP and a User Agent node onto the canvas and connect their outputs to the Session Group. Note that when one classifier is connected, the connection label is updated with its name and a new empty connection slot is added.

Classifiers

Fill in the two classifier nodes with appropriate values:

Give the Geo IP node the name “off-net”, set Continent to “Europe”, Country to “Sweden” and City to “Stockholm”. Finally, change the Inverted toggle to true since we want this condition to match any traffic that comes from anywhere but Stockholm.

The User Agent node is meant to match mobile devices, but for simplicity’s sake this classifier is limited to Apple devices for this example. Set the name to “mobile”, make sure Pattern Type is “stringMatch” and set the pattern to “apple”. The asterisks will match against any strings at the beginning and end of the user agent string, and “apple” is case insensitive.

The resulting graph should look like this:

Condition Graphical View

Click Save to return to the routing tree configuration view. Note that "always()" has been replaced with "in_session_group('mobile-off-net')".

First Split With Condition

It is time to add a node for the external CDN. Open up the Hosts section in the left-hand side menu if it is closed. Then drag a Host node onto the canvas and name it “OffloadCDN”.

This creates a host group which contains hosts which belong together and share common settings such as ports.

First Host

Click the Edit button to open a dialog where the actual hosts can be added to the host group by clicking the icon with a new document on it. Add a host with the name “offload-host-1” and address “offload-1.example.com”. The IPv6 address field can be left empty.

Click Save to return to the canvas view and connect the Split node’s onMatch slot to the newly created host. Now any request that matches the condition we added to the Split node will be sent to the external host.

Host Creation

The next step is to add an offload in case the internal CDN is overloaded. Add another Split node, call it “LiveOffload” and connect it to the previous Split node’s onMiss slot. We will use a Selection Input value named "live_bandwidth_left" to determine whether or not the internal CDN is overloaded.

Click the Condition field and bring up the graphical view. Remove the default Always node and replace it with a Less Than node. Set its Selection Input string to “live_bandwidth_left” and the Value to 100 in order to send traffic to the offload CDN whenever the internal CDN reports less than 100 capacity left.

Save the condition and connect the Split node’s onMatch output to the “offload-host-1” Host.

Second Split

In order to balance the incoming Live traffic between the two internal CDN nodes we create a Random node, which simply splits the traffic equally among its targets.

First Random

Finally we create another Host node and give it two hosts called “private-host-1” and “private-host-2”. Connect the Random node to the two hosts and the routing configuration is finished.

Finished Configuration

1.6.2 - OLD WebUI Configuration

How to use the web user interface for configuration.

The web based user interface is installed as a separate component and can be used to configure many common use cases. After navigating to the UI, a login screen will be presented.

Enter your credentials and log in. In the top left corner is a menu to select what section of the configuration to change. The configuration that will be active on the router is added in the Routing Workflow view. However, basic elements such as classification rules and routing targets, etc must be added first. Hence the following main steps are required to produce a proper configuration:

Create classifiers serving as basic elements to create session groups.
Create session groups which, using the classifiers, tag requests/clients for later use in the routing logic. of the incoming traffic.
Define offload rules.
Define rules to control behavior of internal traffic.
Define backup rules to be used if the routing targets in the above step are unavailable.
Finally, create the desired routing workflow using the elements defined in the previous steps.

A simplified concrete example of the above steps could be:

Create two classifiers “smartphone” and “off-net”.
Create a session group “mobile off-net”.
Offload off-net traffic from mobile phones to a public CDN.
Route other traffic to a private CDN.
If the private CDN has an outage, use the public CDN for all traffic.

Hence, to start with, define the classifiers you will need. Those are based on information in the incoming request, optionally in combination with GeoIP databases or subnet information configured via the Subnet API. Here we show how to set up a GeoIP classifier. Note that the Director ships with a compatible snapshot of the GeoIP database, but for a production system a licensed and updated database is required.

GeoIP Classifier

Click the plus sign indicated in the picture above to create a new GeoIP classifier. You will be presented with the following view:

GeoIP Classifier Create

Here you can enter the geographical data on which to match, or check the “Inverted” check box to match anything except the entered geographical data.

The other kinds of classifiers are configured in a similar way.

After having added all the classifiers you need, it is time to create the session groups. Those are named filters that group incoming requests, typically video playback sessions in a video streaming CDN, and are defined with the help of the classifiers. For example, a session group “off-net mobile devices” could be composed of the classifiers “off-net traffic” and “mobile devices”.

Open the Session Groups view from the menu and hit the plus sign to add a new session group.

Session Groups Session Group Create

Define the new sessions groups by combining the previously created classifiers. It is often convenient to define an “All” session group that matches any incoming request.

Next go the “CDN Offload” view:

CDN Offload

Here you define conditions for CDN offload. Each row defines a rule for offloading a specified session group. The rule makes use of the Selection Input API. This is an integration API that provides a way to supply additional data for use in the routing decision. Common examples are current bitrates or availability status. The selection input variables to use must be defined in the “Selection Input Types” view in the “Administration” section of the menu:

Selection Input Types

Reach out to the solution engineers from AgileTV in order to perform this integration in the best way. If no external data is required, such that the offload rule can be based solely based on session groups, this is not necessary and the condition field can be set to “Always” or “Disabled”.

When clicking the plus sign to add a new CDN Offload rule, the following view is presented:

CDN Offload Create

The selection input rule is phrased in terms of a variable being above or below a threshold, but also a state such as “available” taking values 0 or 1 can be supported by for instance checking if “available” is below 1.

Moving on, if an incoming request is not offloaded, it will be handled by the Primary CDN section of the routing configuration.

Primary CDN

Add all hosts in your primary CDN, together with a weight. A row in this table will be selected by random weighted load balancing. If each weight is the same, each row will be selected with the same probability. Another example would be three rows with weights 100, 100 and 200 which would randomly balance 50% of the load on the last row and the remaining load on the first two rows, i.e. 25% on each of the first and second row. If a Primary CDN host is unavailable, that host will not take part in the random selection.

If all hosts are unavailable, as a final resort the routing evaluation will go to the final Backup CDN step:

Backup CDN

Here you can define what to do when all else fail. If not all requests are covered, for example with an “All” session group, then the request will fail with 403 Forbidden.

Now you have defined the basic elements and it is time to define the routing workflow. Select “Routing Workflow” from the menu, as pictured below. Here you can combine the elements previously created to achieve the desired routing behavior.

Routing Workflow

When everything seems correct, open the “Publish Routing” view from the menu:

Publish Routing

Hit “Publish All Changes” and verify that you get a successful result.

1.6.3 - Confd and Confcli

Using the command line tool confcli to set up routing rules

Configuration of a complex routing tree can be difficult. The command line interface tool called confcli has been developed to make it simpler. It combines building blocks, representing simple routing decisions, into complex routing trees capable of satisfying almost any routing requirements.

These blocks are translated into an ESB3024 Router configuration which is automatically sent to the router, overwriting existing routing rules, CDN list and host list.

Installation and Usage

The confcli tools are installed alongside ESB3024 Router, on the same host, and the confcli command line tool itself is made available on the host machine.

Simply type confcli in a shell on the host to see the current routing configuration:

$ confcli
{
    "services": {
        "routing": {
            "settings": {
                "trustedProxies": [],
                "contentPopularity": {
                    "algorithm": "score_based",
                    "sessionGroupNames": []
                },
                "extendedContentIdentifier": {
                    "enabled": false,
                    "includedQueryParams": []
                },
                "instream": {
                    "dashManifestRewrite": {
                        "enabled": false,
                        "sessionGroupNames": []
                    },
                    "hlsManifestRewrite": {
                        "enabled": false,
                        "sessionGroupNames": []
                    },
                    "reversedFilenameComparison": false
                },
                "usageLog": {
                    "enabled": false,
                    "logInterval": 3600000
                }
            },
            "tuning": {
                "content": {
                    "cacheSizeFullManifests": 1000,
                    "cacheSizeLightManifests": 10000,
                    "lightCacheTimeMilliseconds": 86400000,
                    "liveCacheTimeMilliseconds": 100,
                    "vodCacheTimeMilliseconds": 10000
                },
                "general": {
                    "accessLog": false,
                    "coutFlushRateMilliseconds": 1000,
                    "cpuLoadWindowSize": 10,
                    "eagerCdnSwitching": false,
                    "httpPipeliningEnable": false,
                    "logLevel": 3,
                    "maxConnectionsPerHost": 5,
                    "overloadThreshold": 32,
                    "readyThreshold": 8,
                    "redirectingCdnManifestDownloadRetries": 2,
                    "repeatedSessionStartThresholdSeconds": 30,
                    "selectionInputMetricsTimeoutSeconds": 30
                },
                "session": {
                    "idleDeactivateTimeoutMilliseconds": 20000,
                    "idleDeleteTimeoutMilliseconds": 1800000
                },
                "target": {
                    "responseTimeoutSeconds": 5,
                    "retryConnectTimeoutSeconds": 2,
                    "retryResponseTimeoutSeconds": 2,
                    "connectTimeoutSeconds": 5,
                    "maxIdleTimeSeconds": 30,
                    "requestAttempts": 3
                }
            },
            "sessionGroups": [],
            "classifiers": [],
            "hostGroups": [],
            "rules": [],
            "entrypoint": "",
            "applyConfig": true
        }
    }
}

The CLI tool can be used to modify, add and delete values by providing it with the “path” to the object to change. The path is constructed by joining the field names leading up to the value with a period between each name, e.g. the path to the entrypoint is services.routing.entrypoint since entrypoint is nested under the routing object, which in turn is under the services root object. Lists use an index number in place of a field name, where 0 indicates the very first element in the list, 1 the second element and so on.

If the list contains objects which have a field with the name name, the index number can be replaced by the unique name of the object of interest.

Tab completion is supported by confcli. Pressing tab once will complete as far as possible, and pressing tab twice will list all available alternatives at the path constructed so far.

Display the values at a specific path:

$ confcli services.routing.hostGroups
{
    "hostGroups": [
        {
            "name": "internal",
            "type": "redirecting",
            "httpPort": 80,
            "httpsPort": 443,
            "hosts": [
                {
                    "name": "rr1",
                    "hostname": "rr1.example.com",
                    "ipv6_address": ""
                }
            ]
        },
        {
            "name": "external",
            "type": "host",
            "httpPort": 80,
            "httpsPort": 443,
            "hosts": [
                {
                    "name": "offload-streamer1",
                    "hostname": "streamer1.example.com",
                    "ipv6_address": ""
                },
                {
                    "name": "offload-streamer2",
                    "hostname": "streamer2.example.com",
                    "ipv6_address": ""
                }
            ]
        }
    ]
}

Display the values in a specific list index:

$ confcli services.routing.hostGroups.1
{
    "1": {
        "name": "external",
        "type": "host",
        "httpPort": 80,
        "httpsPort": 443,
        "hosts": [
            {
                "name": "offload-streamer1",
                "hostname": "streamer1.example.com",
                "ipv6_address": ""
            },
            {
                "name": "offload-streamer2",
                "hostname": "streamer2.example.com",
                "ipv6_address": ""
            }
        ]
    }
}

Display the values in a specific list index using the object’s name:

$ confcli services.routing.hostGroups.1.hosts.offload-streamer2
{
    "offload-streamer2": {
        "name": "offload-streamer2",
        "hostname": "streamer2.example.com",
        "ipv6_address": ""
    }
}

Modify a single value:

confcli services.routing.hostGroups.1.hosts.offload-streamer2.hostname new-streamer.example.com
services.routing.hostGroups.1.hosts.offload-streamer2.hostname = 'new-streamer.example.com'

Delete an entry:

$ confcli services.routing.sessionGroups.Apple.classifiers.
{
    "classifiers": [
        "Apple",
        ""
    ]
}

$ confcli services.routing.sessionGroups.Apple.classifiers.1 -d
http://localhost:5000/config/__active/services/routing/sessionGroups/Apple/classifiers/1 reset to default/deleted

$ confcli services.routing.sessionGroups.Apple.classifiers.
{
    "classifiers": [
        "Apple"
    ]
}

Adding new values in objects and lists is done using a wizard by invoking confcli with a path and the -w argument. This will be shown extensively in the examples further down in this document rather than here.

If you have a JSON file with a previously generated confcli configuration output it can be applied to a system by typing confcli -i <file path>.

CDNs and Hosts

Configuration using confcli has no real concept of CDNs, instead it has groups of hosts that share some common settings such as HTTP(S) port and whether they return a redirection URL, serve content directly or perform a DNS lookup. Of these three variants, the two former share the same parameters, while the DNS variant is slightly different.

Note that by default, the Director expects redirecting CDNs to redirect with response code 302. If the CDN returns a redirection URL with another HTTP response code, the field allowAnyRedirectType must be set to true in the hostGroup configuration. Then any 3xx response code will result in a 302 response code being sent to the client.

If any of the request headers need to be forwarded to the CDN, they can be listed in the headersToForward field. This is useful if the CDN needs to know about the original Host header or any custom headers added by the client or an upstream proxy.

Each host belongs to a host group and may itself be an entire CDN using a single public hostname or a single streamer server, all depending on the needs of the user.

Host Health

When creating a host in the confd configuration, you have the option to define a list of health check functions. Each health check function must return true for a host to be selected. This means that the host will only be considered available if all the defined health check functions evaluate to true. If any of the health check functions return false, the host will be considered unavailable and will not be selected for routing. All health check functions are detailed in the section Built-in Lua functions.

$ confcli services.routing.hostGroups -w
Running wizard for resource 'hostGroups'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

hostGroups : [
  hostGroup can be one of
    1: dns
    2: host
    3: redirecting
  Choose element index or name: redirecting
  Adding a 'redirecting' element
    hostGroup : {
      name (default: ): edgeware
      type (default: redirecting): ⏎
      httpPort (default: 80): ⏎
      httpsPort (default: 443): ⏎
      headersToForward <A list of HTTP headers to forward to the CDN. (default: [])>: [
        headersToForward (default: ): ⏎
        Add another 'headersToForward' element to array 'headersToForward'? [y/N]: ⏎
      ]
      allowAnyRedirectType (default: False): ⏎
      hosts : [
        host : {
          name (default: ): rr1
          hostname (default: ): convoy-rr1.example.com
          ipv6_address (default: ): ⏎
          healthChecks : [
            healthCheck (default: always()): health_check()
            Add another 'healthCheck' element to array 'healthChecks'? [y/N]: n
          ]
        }
        Add another 'host' element to array 'hosts'? [y/N]: y
        host : {
          name (default: ): rr2
          hostname (default: ): convoy-rr2.example.com
          ipv6_address (default: ): ⏎
          healthChecks : [
            healthCheck (default: always()): ⏎
            Add another 'healthCheck' element to array 'healthChecks'? [y/N]: n
          ]
        }
        Add another 'host' element to array 'hosts'? [y/N]: ⏎
      ]
    }
  Add another 'hostGroup' element to array 'hostGroups'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "hostGroups": [
    {
      "name": "edgeware",
      "type": "redirecting",
      "httpPort": 80,
      "httpsPort": 443,
      "headersToForward": [],
      "allowAnyRedirectType": false,
      "hosts": [
        {
          "name": "rr1",
          "hostname": "convoy-rr1.example.com",
          "ipv6_address": "",
          "healthChecks": [
            "health_check()"
          ]
        },
        {
          "name": "rr2",
          "hostname": "convoy-rr2.example.com",
          "ipv6_address": "",
          "healthChecks": [
            "always()"
          ]
        }
      ]
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.hostGroups -w
Running wizard for resource 'hostGroups'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

hostGroups : [
  hostGroup can be one of
    1: dns
    2: host
    3: redirecting
  Choose element index or name: dns
  Adding a 'dns' element
    hostGroup : {
      name (default: ): external-dns
      type (default: dns): ⏎
      hosts : [
        host : {
          name (default: ): dns-host
          hostname (default: ): dns.example.com
          ipv6_address (default: ): ⏎
          healthChecks : [
            healthCheck (default: always()): ⏎
            Add another 'healthCheck' element to array 'healthChecks'? [y/N]: n
          ]
        }
        Add another 'host' element to array 'hosts'? [y/N]: ⏎
      ]
    }
  Add another 'hostGroup' element to array 'hostGroups'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "hostGroups": [
    {
      "name": "external-dns",
      "type": "dns",
      "hosts": [
        {
          "name": "dns-host",
          "hostname": "dns.example.com",
          "ipv6_address": "",
          "healthChecks": [
            "always()"
          ]
        }
      ]
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

Rule Blocks

The routing configuration using confcli is done using a combination of logical building blocks, or rules. Each block evaluates the incoming request in some way and sends it on to one or more sub-blocks. If the block is of the host type described above, the client is sent to that host and the evaluation is done.

Existing Blocks

Currently supported blocks are:

allow: Incoming requests, for which a given rule function matches, are immediately sent to the provided onMatch target.
consistentHashing: Splits incoming requests randomly between preferred hosts, determined by the proprietary consistent hashing algorithm. The amount of hosts to split between is controlled by the spreadFactor.
contentPopularity: Splits incoming requests into two sub-blocks depending on how popular the requested content is.
deny: Incoming requests, for which a given rule function matches, are immediately denied, and all non-matching requests are sent to the onMiss target.
firstMatch: Incoming requests are matched by an ordered series of rules, where the request will be handled by the first rule for which the condition evaluates to true.
random: Splits incoming requests randomly and equally between a list of target sub-blocks. Useful for simple load balancing.
split: Splits incoming requests between two sub-blocks depending on how the request is evaluated by a provided function. Can be used for sending clients to different hosts depending on e.g. geographical location or client hardware type.
weighted: Randomly splits incoming requests between a list of target sub-blocks, weighted according to each target’s associated weight rule. A higher weight means a higher portion of requests will be routed to a sub-block. Rules can be used to decide whether or not to pick a target.
rawGroup: Contains a raw ESB3024 Router configuration routing tree node, to be inserted as is in the generated configuration. This is only meant to be used in the rare cases when it’s impossible to construct the required routing behavior in any other way.
rawHost: A host reference for use as endpoints in rawGroup trees.

$ confcli services.routing.rules -w
Running wizard for resource 'rules'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

rules : [
  rule can be one of
    1: allow
    2: consistentHashing
    3: contentPopularity
    4: deny
    5: firstMatch
    6: random
    7: rawGroup
    8: rawHost
    9: split
    10: weighted
  Choose element index or name: allow
  Adding a 'allow' element
    rule : {
      name (default: ): allow
      type (default: allow): ⏎
      condition (default: ): customFunction()
      onMatch (default: ): rr1
    }
  Add another 'rule' element to array 'rules'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "rules": [
    {
      "name": "content",
      "type": "contentPopularity",
      "condition": "customFunction()",
      "onMatch": "rr1"
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.rules -w
Running wizard for resource 'rules'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

rules : [
  rule can be one of
    1: allow
    2: consistentHashing
    3: contentPopularity
    4: deny
    5: firstMatch
    6: random
    7: rawGroup
    8: rawHost
    9: split
    10: weighted
  Choose element index or name: consistentHashing
  Adding a 'consistentHashing' element
    rule : {
      name (default: ): consistentHashingRule
      type (default: consistentHashing): 
      spreadFactor (default: 1): 2
      hashAlgorithm (default: MD5):
      targets : [
        target : {
          target (default: ): rr1
          enabled (default: True): 
        }
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: y
        target : {
          target (default: ): rr2
          enabled (default: True): 
        }
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: y
        target : {
          target (default: ): rr3
          enabled (default: True): 
        }
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: n
      ]
    }
  Add another 'rule' element to array 'rules'? [y/N]: n
]
Generated config:
{
  "rules": [
    {
      "name": "consistentHashingRule",
      "type": "consistentHashing",
      "spreadFactor": 2,
      "hashAlgorithm": "MD5",
      "targets": [
        {
          "target": "rr1",
          "enabled": true
        },
        {
          "target": "rr2",
          "enabled": true
        },
        {
          "target": "rr3",
          "enabled": true
        }
      ]
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.rules -w
Running wizard for resource 'rules'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

rules : [
  rule can be one of
    1: allow
    2: consistentHashing
    3: contentPopularity
    4: deny
    5: firstMatch
    6: random
    7: rawGroup
    8: rawHost
    9: split
    10: weighted
  Choose element index or name: contentPopularity
  Adding a 'contentPopularity' element
    rule : {
      name (default: ): content
      type (default: contentPopularity): ⏎
      contentPopularityCutoff (default: 10): 20
      onPopular (default: ): rr1
      onUnpopular (default: ): rr2
    }
  Add another 'rule' element to array 'rules'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "rules": [
    {
      "name": "content",
      "type": "contentPopularity",
      "contentPopularityCutoff": 20.0,
      "onPopular": "rr1",
      "onUnpopular": "rr2"
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.rules -w
Running wizard for resource 'rules'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

rules : [
  rule can be one of
    1: allow
    2: consistentHashing
    3: contentPopularity
    4: deny
    5: firstMatch
    6: random
    7: rawGroup
    8: rawHost
    9: split
    10: weighted
  Choose element index or name: deny
  Adding a 'deny' element
    rule : {
      name (default: ): deny
      type (default: deny): ⏎
      condition (default: ): customFunction()
      onMiss (default: ): rr1
    }
  Add another 'rule' element to array 'rules'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "rules": [
    {
      "name": "content",
      "type": "contentPopularity",
      "condition": "customFunction()",
      "onMiss": "rr1"
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.rules -w
Running wizard for resource 'rules'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

rules : [
  rule can be one of
    1: allow
    2: consistentHashing
    3: contentPopularity
    4: deny
    5: firstMatch
    6: random
    7: rawGroup
    8: rawHost
    9: split
    10: weighted
  Choose element index or name: firstMatch
  Adding a 'firstMatch' element
    rule : {
      name (default: ): firstMatch
      type (default: firstMatch): ⏎
      targets : [
        target : {
          onMatch (default: ): rr1
          rule (default: ): customFunction()
        }
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: y
        target : {
          onMatch (default: ): rr2
          rule (default: ): otherCustomFunction()
        }
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: n
      ]
    }
  Add another 'rule' element to array 'rules'? [y/N]: n
]
Generated config:
{
  "rules": [
    {
      "name": "firstMatch",
      "type": "firstMatch",
      "targets": [
        {
          "onMatch": "rr1",
          "condition": "customFunction()"
        },
        {
          "onMatch": "rr2",
          "condition": "otherCustomFunction()"
        }
      ]
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.rules -w
Running wizard for resource 'rules'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

rules : [
  rule can be one of
    1: allow
    2: consistentHashing
    3: contentPopularity
    4: deny
    5: firstMatch
    6: random
    7: rawGroup
    8: rawHost
    9: split
    10: weighted
  Choose element index or name: random
  Adding a 'random' element
    rule : {
      name (default: ): random
      type (default: random): ⏎
      targets : [
        target (default: ): rr1
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: y
        target (default: ): rr2
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: ⏎
      ]
    }
  Add another 'rule' element to array 'rules'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "rules": [
    {
      "name": "random",
      "type": "random",
      "targets": [
        "rr1",
        "rr2"
      ]
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.rules -w
Running wizard for resource 'rules'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

rules : [
  rule can be one of
    1: allow
    2: consistentHashing
    3: contentPopularity
    4: deny
    5: firstMatch
    6: random
    7: rawGroup
    8: rawHost
    9: split
    10: weighted
  Choose element index or name: split
  Adding a 'split' element
    rule : {
      name (default: ): split
      type (default: split): ⏎
      condition (default: ): custom_function()
      onMatch (default: ): rr2
      onMiss (default: ): rr1
    }
  Add another 'rule' element to array 'rules'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "rules": [
    {
      "name": "split",
      "type": "split",
      "condition": "custom_function()",
      "onMatch": "rr2",
      "onMiss": "rr1"
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.rules. -w
Running wizard for resource 'rules'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

rules : [
  rule can be one of
    1: allow
    2: consistentHashing
    3: contentPopularity
    4: deny
    5: firstMatch
    6: random
    7: rawGroup
    8: rawHost
    9: split
    10: weighted
  Choose element index or name: weighted
  Adding a 'weighted' element
    rule : {
      name (default: ): weight
      type (default: weighted): ⏎
      targets : [
        target : {
          target (default: ): rr1
          weight (default: 100): ⏎
          condition (default: always()): always()
        }
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: y
        target : {
          target (default: ): rr2
          weight (default: 100): si('rr2-input-weight')
          condition (default: always()): gt('rr2-bandwidth', 1000000)
        }
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: y
        target : {
          target (default: ): rr2
          weight (default: 100): custom_func()
          condition (default: always()): always()
        }
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: ⏎
      ]
    }
  Add another 'rule' element to array 'rules'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "rules": [
    {
      "name": "weight",
      "type": "weighted",
      "targets": [
        {
          "target": "rr1",
          "weight": "100",
          "condition": "always()"
        },
        {
          "target": "rr2",
          "weight": "si('rr2-input-weight')",
          "condition": "gt('rr2-bandwith', 1000000)"
        },
        {
          "target": "rr2",
          "weight": "custom_func()",
          "condition": "always()"
        }
      ]
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

>> First add a raw host block that refers to a regular host

$ confcli services.routing.rules. -w
Running wizard for resource 'rules'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

rules : [
  rule can be one of
    1: allow
    2: consistentHashing
    3: contentPopularity
    4: deny
    5: firstMatch
    6: random
    7: rawGroup
    8: rawHost
    9: split
    10: weighted
  Choose element index or name: rawHost
  Adding a 'rawHost' element
    rule : {
      name (default: ): raw-host
      type (default: rawHost): ⏎
      hostId (default: ): rr1
    }
  Add another 'rule' element to array 'rules'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "rules": [
    {
      "name": "raw-host",
      "type": "rawHost",
      "hostId": "rr1"
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

>> And then add a rule using the host node

$ confcli services.routing.rules. -w
Running wizard for resource 'rules'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

rules : [
  rule can be one of
    1: allow
    2: consistentHashing
    3: contentPopularity
    4: deny
    5: firstMatch
    6: random
    7: rawGroup
    8: rawHost
    9: split
    10: weighted
  Choose element index or name: rawGroup
  Adding a 'rawGroup' element
    rule : {
      name (default: ): raw-node
      type (default: rawGroup): ⏎
      memberOrder (default: sequential): ⏎
      members : [
        member : {
          target (default: ): raw-host
          weightFunction (default: ): return 1
        }
        Add another 'member' element to array 'members'? [y/N]: ⏎
      ]
    }
  Add another 'rule' element to array 'rules'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "rules": [
    {
      "name": "raw-node",
      "type": "rawGroup",
      "memberOrder": "sequential",
      "members": [
        {
          "target": "raw-host",
          "weightFunction": "return 1"
        }
      ]
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

Rule Language

Some blocks, such as the split and firstMatch types, have a rule field that contains a small function in a very simple programming language. This field is used to filter any incoming client requests in order to determine how to rule block should react.

In the case of a split block, the rule is evaluated and if it is true the client is sent to the onMatch part of the block, otherwise it is sent to the onMiss part for further evaluation.

In the case of a firstMatch block, the rule for each target will be evaluated top to bottom in order until either a rule evaluates to true or the list is exhausted. If a rule evaluates to true, the client will be sent to the onMatch part of the block, otherwise the next target in the list will be tried. If all targets have been exhausted, then the entire rule evaluation will fail, and the routing tree will be restarted with the firstMatch block effectively removed.

Example of Boolean Functions

Let’s say we have an ESB3024 Router set up with a session group that matches Apple devices (named “Apple”). To route all Apple devices to a specific streamer one would simply create a split block with the following rule:

in_session_group('Apple')

In order to make more complex rules it’s possible to combine several checks like this in the same rule. Let’s extend the hypothetical ESB3024 Router above with a configured subnet with all IP addresses in Europe (named “Europe”). To make a rule that accepts any clients using an Apple device and living outside of Europe, but only as long as the reported load on the streamer (as indicated by the selection input variable “europe_load_mbps”) is less than 1000 megabits per second one could make an offload block with the following rule (without linebreaks):

in_session_group('Apple')
    and not in_subnet('Europe')
    and lt('europe_load_mbps', 1000)

In this example in_session_group('Apple') will be true if the client belongs to the session group named ‘Apple’. The function call in_subnet('Europe') is true if the client’s IP belongs to the subnet named ‘Europe’, but the word not in front of it reverses the value so the entire section ends up being false if the client is in Europe. Finally lt('europe_load_mbps', 1000) is true if there is a selection input variable named “europe_load_mbps” and its value is less than 1000.

Since the three parts are conjoined with the and keyword they must all be true for the entire rule to match. If the keyword or had been used instead it would have been enough for any of the parts to be true for the rule to match.

Example of Numeric Functions

A hypothetical CDN has two streamers with different capacity; Host_1 has roughly twice the capacity of Host_2. A simple random load balancing would put undue stress on the second host since it will receive as much traffic as the more capable Host_1.

This can be solved by using a weighted random distribution rule block with suitable rules for the two hosts:

{
    "targets": [
        {
            "target": "Host_1",
            "condition": "always()",
            "weight": "100"
        }
        {
            "target": "Host_2",
            "condition": "always()",
            "weight": "50"
        },
    ]
}

resulting in Host_1 receiving twice as many requests as Host_2 as its weight function is double that of Host_2.

If the CDN is capable of reporting the free capacity of the hosts, for example by writing to a selection input variable for each host, it’s easy to write a more intelligent load balancing rule by making the weights correspond to the amount of capacity left on each host:

{
    "targets": [
        {
            "target": "Host_1",
            "condition": "always()",
            "weight": "si('free_capacity_host_1')"
        }
        {
            "target": "Host_2",
            "condition": "always()",
            "weight": "si('free_capacity_host_2')"
        },
    ]
}

It is also possible to write custom Lua functions that return suitable weights, perhaps taking the host as an argument:

{
    "targets": [
        {
            "target": "Host_1",
            "condition": "always()",
            "weight": "intelligent_weight_function('Host_1')"
        }
        {
            "target": "Host_2",
            "condition": "always()",
            "weight": "intelligent_weight_function('Host_1')"
        },
    ]
}

These different weight rules can of course be combined in the same rule block, with one target having a hard coded number, another using a dynamically updated selection input variable and yet another having a custom-built function.

Due to limitations in the random number generator used to distribute requests, it’s better to use somewhat large values, around 100–1000 or so, than to use small values near 0.

Built-In Functions

The following built-in functions are available when writing rules:

in_session_group(str name): True if session belongs to session group <name>
in_all_session_groups(str sg_name, ...): True if session belongs to all specified session groups
in_any_session_group(str sg_name, ...): True if session belongs to any specified session group
in_subnet(str subnet_name): True if client IP belongs to the named subnet
gt(str si_var, number value): True if selection_inputs[si_var] > value
gt(str si_var1, str si_var2): True if selection_inputs[si_var1] > selection_inputs[si_var2]
ge(str si_var, number value): True if selection_inputs[si_var] >= value
ge(str si_var1, str si_var2): True if selection_inputs[si_var1] >= selection_inputs[si_var2]
lt(str si_var, number value): True if selection_inputs[si_var] < value
lt(str si_var1, str si_var2): True if selection_inputs[si_var1] < selection_inputs[si_var2]
le(str si_var, number value): True if selection_inputs[si_var] <= value
le(str si_var1, str si_var2): True if selection_inputs[si_var1] <= selection_inputs[si_var2]
eq(str si_var, number value): True if selection_inputs[si_var] == value
eq(str si_var1, str si_var2): True if selection_inputs[si_var1] == selection_inputs[si_var2]
neq(str si_var, number value): True if selection_inputs[si_var] != value
neq(str si_var1, str si_var2): True if selection_inputs[si_var1] != selection_inputs[si_var2]
si(str si_var): Returns the value of selection_inputs[si_var] if it is defined and non-negative, otherwise it returns 0.
always(): Returns true, useful when creating weighted rule blocks.
never(): Returns false, opposite of always().

These functions, as well as custom functions written in Lua and uploaded to the ESB3024 Router, can be combined to make suitably precise rules.

Combining Multiple Boolean Functions

In order to make the rule language easy to work with, it is fairly restricted and simple. One restriction is that it’s only possible to chain multiple function results together using either and or or, but not a combination of both conjunctions.

Statements joined with and or or keywords are evaluated one by one, starting with the left-most statement and moving right. As soon as the end result of the entire expression is certain, the evaluation ends. This means that evaluation ends with the first false statement for and expressions since a single false component means the entire expression must also be false. It also means that evaluation ends with the first true statement for or expressions since only one component must be true for the entire statement to be true as well. This is known as short-circuit or lazy evaluation.

Custom Functions

It is possible to write extremely complex Lua functions that take many parameters or calculations into consideration when evaluating an incoming client request. By writing such functions and making sure that they return only non-negative integer values and uploading them to the router they can be used from the rule language. Simply call them like any of the built-in functions listed above, using strings and numbers as arguments if necessary, and their result will be used to determine the routing path to use.

Formal Syntax

The full syntax of the language can be described in just a few lines of BNF grammar:

<rule>               := <weight_rule> | <match_rule> | <value_rule>
<weight_rule>        := "if" <compound_predicate> "then" <weight> "else" <weight>
<match_rule>         := <compound_predicate>
<value_rule>         := <weight>
<compound_predicate> := <logical_predicate> |
                        <logical_predicate> ["and" <logical_predicate> ...] |
                        <logical_predicate> ["or" <logical_predicate> ...] |
<logical_predicate>  := ["not"] <predicate>
<predicate>          := <function_name> "(" ")" |
                        <function_name> "(" <argument> ["," <argument> ...] ")"
<function_name>      := <letter> [<function_name_tail> ...]
<function_name_tail> := empty | <letter> | <digit> | "_"
<argument>           := <string> | <number>
<weight>             := integer | <predicate>
<number>             := float | integer
<string>             := "'" [<letter> | <digit> | <symbol> ...] "'"

Building a Routing Configuration

This example sets up an entire routing configuration for a system with a ESB3008 Request Router, two streamers and the Apple devices outside of Europe example used earlier in this document. Any clients not matching the criteria will be sent to an offload CDN with two streamers in a simple uniformly randomized load balancing setup.

Set up Session Group

First make a classifier and a session group that uses it:

$ confcli services.routing.classifiers -w
Running wizard for resource 'classifiers'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

classifiers : [
  classifier can be one of
    1: anonymousIp
    2: asnIds
    3: contentUrlPath
    4: contentUrlQueryParameters
    5: geoip
    6: hostName
    7: ipranges
    8: random
    9: regexMatcher
    10: requestHeader
    11: stringMatcher
    12: subnet
    13: userAgent
  Choose element index or name: userAgent
  Adding a 'userAgent' element
    classifier : {
      name (default: ): Apple
      type (default: userAgent): ⏎
      inverted (default: False): ⏎
      patternType (default: stringMatch): ⏎
      pattern (default: ): *apple*
    }
  Add another 'classifier' element to array 'classifiers'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "classifiers": [
    {
      "name": "Apple",
      "type": "userAgent",
      "inverted": false,
      "patternType": "stringMatch",
      "pattern": "*apple*"
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.sessionGroups -w
Running wizard for resource 'sessionGroups'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

sessionGroups : [
  sessionGroup : {
    name (default: ): Apple
    classifiers : [
      classifier (default: ): Apple
      Add another 'classifier' element to array 'classifiers'? [y/N]: ⏎
    ]
  }
  Add another 'sessionGroup' element to array 'sessionGroups'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "sessionGroups": [
    {
      "name": "Apple",
      "classifiers": [
        "Apple"
      ]
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

Set up Hosts

Create two host groups and add a Request Router to the first and two streamers to the second, which will be used for offload:

$ confcli services.routing.hostGroups -w
Running wizard for resource 'hostGroups'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

hostGroups : [
  hostGroup can be one of
    1: dns
    2: host
    3: redirecting
  Choose element index or name: redirecting
  Adding a 'redirecting' element
    hostGroup : {
      name (default: ): internal
      type (default: redirecting): ⏎
      httpPort (default: 80): ⏎
      httpsPort (default: 443): ⏎
      headersToForward <A list of HTTP headers to forward to the CDN. (default: [])>: [
        headersToForward (default: ): ⏎
        Add another 'headersToForward' element to array 'headersToForward'? [y/N]: ⏎
      ]
      allowAnyRedirectType (default: False): ⏎
      hosts : [
        host : {
          name (default: ): rr1
          hostname (default: ): rr1.example.com
          ipv6_address (default: ): ⏎
        }
        Add another 'host' element to array 'hosts'? [y/N]: ⏎
      ]
    }
  Add another 'hostGroup' element to array 'hostGroups'? [y/N]: y
  hostGroup can be one of
    1: dns
    2: host
    3: redirecting
  Choose element index or name: host
  Adding a 'host' element
    hostGroup : {
      name (default: ): external
      type (default: host): ⏎
      httpPort (default: 80): ⏎
      httpsPort (default: 443): ⏎
      hosts : [
        host : {
          name (default: ): offload-streamer1
          hostname (default: ): streamer1.example.com
          ipv6_address (default: ): ⏎
        }
        Add another 'host' element to array 'hosts'? [y/N]: y
        host : {
          name (default: ): offload-streamer2
          hostname (default: ): streamer2.example.com
          ipv6_address (default: ): ⏎
        }
        Add another 'host' element to array 'hosts'? [y/N]: ⏎
      ]
    }
  Add another 'hostGroup' element to array 'hostGroups'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "hostGroups": [
    {
      "name": "internal",
      "type": "redirecting",
      "httpPort": 80,
      "httpsPort": 443,
      "headersToForward": [],
      "allowAnyRedirectType": false,
      "hosts": [
        {
          "name": "rr1",
          "hostname": "rr1.example.com",
          "ipv6_address": ""
        }
      ]
    },
    {
      "name": "external",
      "type": "host",
      "httpPort": 80,
      "httpsPort": 443,
      "hosts": [
        {
          "name": "offload-streamer1",
          "hostname": "streamer1.example.com",
          "ipv6_address": ""
        },
        {
          "name": "offload-streamer2",
          "hostname": "streamer2.example.com",
          "ipv6_address": ""
        }
      ]
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

Create Load Balancing and Offload Block

Add both offload streamers as targets in a randomgroup block:

$ confcli services.routing.rules -w
Running wizard for resource 'rules'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

rules : [
  rule can be one of
    1: allow
    2: consistentHashing
    3: contentPopularity
    4: deny
    5: firstMatch
    6: random
    7: rawGroup
    8: rawHost
    9: split
    10: weighted
  Choose element index or name: random
  Adding a 'random' element
    rule : {
      name (default: ): balancer
      type (default: random): ⏎
      targets : [
        target (default: ): offload-streamer1
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: y
        target (default: ): offload-streamer2
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: ⏎
      ]
    }
  Add another 'rule' element to array 'rules'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "rules": [
    {
      "name": "balancer",
      "type": "random",
      "targets": [
        "offload-streamer1",
        "offload-streamer2"
      ]
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

Then create a split block with the request router and the load balanced CDN as targets:

$ confcli services.routing.rules -w
Running wizard for resource 'rules'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

rules : [
  rule can be one of
    1: allow
    2: consistentHashing
    3: contentPopularity
    4: deny
    5: firstMatch
    6: random
    7: rawGroup
    8: rawHost
    9: split
    10: weighted
  Choose element index or name: split
  Adding a 'split' element
    rule : {
      name (default: ): offload
      type (default: split): ⏎
      rule (default: ): in_session_group('Apple') and not in_subnet('Europe') and lt('europe_load_mbps', 1000)
      onMatch (default: ): rr1
      onMiss (default: ): balancer
    }
  Add another 'rule' element to array 'rules'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "rules": [
    {
      "name": "offload",
      "type": "split",
      "condition": "in_session_group('Apple') and not in_subnet('Europe') and lt('europe_load_mbps', 1000)",
      "onMatch": "rr1",
      "onMiss": "balancer"
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

The last step required is to set the entrypoint of the routing tree so the router knows where to start evaluating:

$ confcli services.routing.entrypoint offload
services.routing.entrypoint = 'offload'

Evaluate

Now that all the rules have been set up properly and the router has been reconfigured. The translated configuration can be read from the router’s configuration API:

$ curl -k https://router-host:5001/v2/configuration  2> /dev/null | jq .routing
{
  "id": "offload",
  "member_order": "sequential",
  "members": [
    {
      "host_id": "rr1",
      "id": "offload.rr1",
      "weight_function": "return ((in_session_group('Apple') ~= 0) and
                          (in_subnet('Europe') == 0) and
                          (lt('europe_load_mbps', 1000) ~= 0) and 1) or 0 "
    },
    {
      "id": "offload.balancer",
      "member_order": "weighted",
      "members": [
        {
          "host_id": "offload-streamer1",
          "id": "offload.balancer.offload-streamer1",
          "weight_function": "return 100"
        },
        {
          "host_id": "offload-streamer2",
          "id": "offload.balancer.offload-streamer2",
          "weight_function": "return 100"
        }
      ],
      "weight_function": "return 1"
    }
  ],
  "weight_function": "return 100"
}

Note that the configuration language code has been translated into its Lua equivalent.

1.6.4 - Session Groups and Classification

How to classify clients into session groups and use them in routing

ESB3024 Router provides a flexible classification engine, allowing the assignment of clients into session groups that can then be used to base routing decisions on.

Session Classification

In order to perform routing it is necessary to classify incoming sessions according to the relevant parameters. This is done through session groups and their associated classifiers.

There are different ways of classifying a request:

Anonymous IP: Classifies clients using an anonymous IP database. See Geographic Databases for information about the database.
ASN IDs: Checks to see if a client’s IP belongs to any of the specified ASN IDs. See Geographic Databases for information about the ASN database.
Content URL path: Matches the given pattern against the path part of the URL requested by the client. The match can be either a case-insensitive wildcard match or a regular expression match.
Content URL query parameters: Matches the given pattern against the query parameters of the URL requested by the client. The query parameters are passed as a single string. The match can be either a case-insensitive wildcard match or a regular expression match.
GeoIP: Based on the geographic location of the client, supporting wildcard matching. See Route on GeoIP/ASN for more details. The possible values to match with are any combinations of:
- Continent
- Country
- Region
- Cities
- ASN
Host name: Matches the given pattern against the name of the host that the request was sent to. The match can be either a case-insensitive wildcard match or a regular expression match.
IP ranges: Classifies a client based on whether its IP address belongs to any of the listed IP ranges or not.
Random: Randomly classifies clients according to a given probability. The classifier is deterministic, meaning that a session will always get the same classification, even if evaluated multiple times.
Regular expression matcher: Matches the given pattern against a configurable source. The match is case-insensitive and supports regular expressions. The following sources are available:
- content_url_path: The path part of the URL requested by the client.
- content_url_query_params: The query parameters of the URL requested by the client. The query parameters are passed as a single string.
- hostname: The name of the host that the request was sent to.
- user_agent: The user agent string in the HTTP request from the client.
Request Header: Classifies clients based on the value of a specified HTTP header in the request from the client.
String matcher: Matches the given pattern against a configurable source. The match is case-insensitive and supports wildcards (’*’). The following sources are available:
- content_url_path: The path part of the URL requested by the client.
- content_url_query_params: The query parameters of the URL requested by the client. The query parameters are passed as a single string.
- hostname: The name of the host that the request was sent to.
- user_agent: The user agent string in the HTTP request from the client.
Subnet: Tests if a client’s IP belongs to a named subnet, see Subnets for more details.
User agent: Matches the given pattern against the user agent string in the HTTP request from the client. The match can be either a case-insensitive wildcard match or a regular expression match.

A session group may have more than one classifier. If it does, all the classifiers must match the incoming client request for it to belong to the session group. It is also possible for a request to belong to multiple session groups, or to none.

To send certain clients to a specific host you first need to create a suitable classifier using confcli in wizard mode. The wizard will guide you through the process of creating a new entry, asking you what value to input for each field and helping you by telling you what inputs are allowed for restricted fields such as the string comparison source mentioned above:

$ confcli services.routing.classifiers -w
Running wizard for resource 'classifiers'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

classifiers : [
  classifier can be one of
    1: anonymousIp
    2: asnIds
    3: contentUrlPath
    4: contentUrlQueryParameters
    5: geoip
    6: hostName
    7: ipranges
    8: random
    9: regexMatcher
    10: requestHeader
    11: stringMatcher
    12: subnet
    13: userAgent
  Choose element index or name: anonymousIp
  Adding a 'anonymousIp' element
    classifier : {
      name (default: ): anon_ip_matcher
      type (default: anonymousIp):
      inverted (default: False):
    }
  Add another 'classifier' element to array 'classifiers'? [y/N]: n
]
Generated config:
{
  "classifiers": [
    {
      "name": "anon_ip_matcher",
      "type": "anonymousIp",
      "inverted": false
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.classifiers -w
Running wizard for resource 'classifiers'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

classifiers : [
  classifier can be one of
    1: anonymousIp
    2: asnIds
    3: contentUrlPath
    4: contentUrlQueryParameters
    5: geoip
    6: hostName
    7: ipranges
    8: random
    9: regexMatcher
    10: requestHeader
    11: stringMatcher
    12: subnet
    13: userAgent
  Choose element index or name: asnIds
  Adding a 'asnIds' element
    classifier : {
      name (default: ): asn_matcher
      type (default: asnIds): ⏎
      inverted (default: False): ⏎
      asnIds <The list of ASN IDs to accept. (default: [])>: [
        asnId: 1
        Add another 'asnId' element to array 'asnIds'? [y/N]: y
        asnId: 2
        Add another 'asnId' element to array 'asnIds'? [y/N]: y
        asnId: 3
        Add another 'asnId' element to array 'asnIds'? [y/N]: ⏎
      ]
    }
  Add another 'classifier' element to array 'classifiers'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "classifiers": [
    {
      "name": "asn_matcher",
      "type": "asnIds",
      "inverted": false,
      "asnIds": [
        1,
        2,
        3
      ]
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.classifiers -w
Running wizard for resource 'classifiers'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

classifiers : [
  classifier can be one of
    1: anonymousIp
    2: asnIds
    3: contentUrlPath
    4: contentUrlQueryParameters
    5: geoip
    6: hostName
    7: ipranges
    8: random
    9: regexMatcher
    10: requestHeader
    11: stringMatcher
    12: subnet
    13: userAgent
  Choose element index or name: contentUrlPath
  Adding a 'contentUrlPath' element
    classifier : {
      name (default: ): vod_matcher
      type (default: contentUrlPath): ⏎
      inverted (default: False): ⏎
      patternType (default: stringMatch): ⏎
      pattern (default: ): *vod*
    }
  Add another 'classifier' element to array 'classifiers'? [y/N]: n
]
Generated config:
{
  "classifiers": [
    {
      "name": "vod_matcher",
      "type": "contentUrlPath",
      "inverted": false,
      "patternType": "stringMatch",
      "pattern": "*vod*"
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.classifiers -w
Running wizard for resource 'classifiers'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

classifiers : [
  classifier can be one of
    1: anonymousIp
    2: asnIds
    3: contentUrlPath
    4: contentUrlQueryParameters
    5: geoip
    6: hostName
    7: ipranges
    8: random
    9: regexMatcher
    10: requestHeader
    11: stringMatcher
    12: subnet
    13: userAgent
  Choose element index or name: contentUrlQueryParameters
  Adding a 'contentUrlQueryParameters' element
    classifier : {
      name (default: ): bitrate_matcher
      type (default: contentUrlQueryParameters): ⏎
      inverted (default: False): ⏎
      patternType (default: stringMatch): regex
      pattern (default: ): .*bitrate=100000.*
    }
  Add another 'classifier' element to array 'classifiers'? [y/N]: n
]
Generated config:
{
  "classifiers": [
    {
      "name": "bitrate_matcher",
      "type": "contentUrlQueryParameters",
      "inverted": false,
      "patternType": "regex",
      "pattern": ".*bitrate=100000.*"
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.classifiers -w
Running wizard for resource 'classifiers'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

classifiers : [
  classifier can be one of
    1: anonymousIp
    2: asnIds
    3: contentUrlPath
    4: contentUrlQueryParameters
    5: geoip
    6: hostName
    7: ipranges
    8: random
    9: regexMatcher
    10: requestHeader
    11: stringMatcher
    12: subnet
    13: userAgent
  Choose element index or name: geoip
  Adding a 'geoip' element
    classifier : {
      name (default: ): sweden_matcher
      type (default: geoip): ⏎
      inverted (default: False): ⏎
      continent (default: ): ⏎
      country (default: ): sweden
      cities : [
        city (default: ): ⏎
        Add another 'city' element to array 'cities'? [y/N]: ⏎
      ]
      asn (default: ): ⏎
    }
  Add another 'classifier' element to array 'classifiers'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "classifiers": [
    {
      "name": "sweden_matcher",
      "type": "geoip",
      "inverted": false,
      "continent": "",
      "country": "sweden",
      "cities": [
        ""
      ],
      "asn": ""
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.classifiers -w
Running wizard for resource 'classifiers'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

classifiers : [
  classifier can be one of
    1: anonymousIp
    2: asnIds
    3: contentUrlPath
    4: contentUrlQueryParameters
    5: geoip
    6: hostName
    7: ipranges
    8: random
    9: regexMatcher
    10: requestHeader
    11: stringMatcher
    12: subnet
    13: userAgent
  Choose element index or name: hostName
  Adding a 'hostName' element
    classifier : {
      name (default: ): host_name_classifier
      type (default: hostName): ⏎
      inverted (default: False): ⏎
      patternType (default: stringMatch): ⏎
      pattern (default: ): *live.example*
    }
  Add another 'classifier' element to array 'classifiers'? [y/N]: n
]
Generated config:
{
  "classifiers": [
    {
      "name": "host_name_classifier",
      "type": "hostName",
      "inverted": false,
      "patternType": "stringMatch",
      "pattern": "*live.example*"
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.classifiers -w
Running wizard for resource 'classifiers'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

classifiers : [
  classifier can be one of
    1: anonymousIp
    2: asnIds
    3: contentUrlPath
    4: contentUrlQueryParameters
    5: geoip
    6: hostName
    7: ipranges
    8: random
    9: regexMatcher
    10: requestHeader
    11: stringMatcher
    12: subnet
    13: userAgent
  Choose element index or name: ipranges
  Adding a 'ipranges' element
    classifier : {
      name (default: ): company_matcher
      type (default: ipranges): ⏎
      inverted (default: False): ⏎
      ipranges : [
        iprange (default: ): 90.128.0.0/12
        Add another 'iprange' element to array 'ipranges'? [y/N]: ⏎
      ]
    }
  Add another 'classifier' element to array 'classifiers'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "classifiers": [
    {
      "name": "company_matcher",
      "type": "ipranges",
      "inverted": false,
      "ipranges": [
        "90.128.0.0/12"
      ]
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.classifiers -w
Running wizard for resource 'classifiers'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

classifiers : [
  classifier can be one of
    1: anonymousIp
    2: asnIds
    3: contentUrlPath
    4: contentUrlQueryParameters
    5: geoip
    6: hostName
    7: ipranges
    8: random
    9: regexMatcher
    10: requestHeader
    11: stringMatcher
    12: subnet
    13: userAgent
  Choose element index or name: random
  Adding a 'random' element
    classifier <A classifier randomly applying to clients based on the provided probability. (default: OrderedDict())>: {
      name (default: ): random_matcher
      type (default: random):
      probability (default: 0.5): 0.7
    }
  Add another 'classifier' element to array 'classifiers'? [y/N]: n
]
Generated config:
{
  "classifiers": [
    {
      "name": "random_matcher",
      "type": "random",
      "probability": 0.7
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.classifiers -w
Running wizard for resource 'classifiers'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

classifiers : [
  classifier can be one of
    1: anonymousIp
    2: asnIds
    3: contentUrlPath
    4: contentUrlQueryParameters
    5: geoip
    6: hostName
    7: ipranges
    8: random
    9: regexMatcher
    10: requestHeader
    11: stringMatcher
    12: subnet
    13: userAgent
  Choose element index or name: regexMatcher
  Adding a 'regexMatcher' element
    classifier : {
      name (default: ): content_matcher
      type (default: regexMatcher): ⏎
      inverted (default: False): ⏎
      source (default: content_url_path): ⏎
      pattern (default: ): .*/(live|news_channel)/.*m3u8
    }
  Add another 'classifier' element to array 'classifiers'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "classifiers": [
    {
      "name": "content_matcher",
      "type": "regexMatcher",
      "inverted": false,
      "source": "content_url_path",
      "pattern": ".*/(live|news_channel)/.*m3u8"
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.classifiers -w
Running wizard for resource 'classifiers'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

classifiers : [
  classifier can be one of
    1: anonymousIp
    2: asnIds
    3: contentUrlPath
    4: contentUrlQueryParameters
    5: geoip
    6: hostName
    7: ipranges
    8: random
    9: regexMatcher
    10: requestHeader
    11: stringMatcher
    12: subnet
    13: userAgent
  Choose element index or name: requestHeader
  Adding a 'requestHeader' element
    classifier <A classifier that matches on headers in the HTTP request. (default: OrderedDict())>: {
      name (default: ): curl
      type (default: requestHeader): ⏎
      inverted (default: False): ⏎
      header (default: ): User-Agent
      patternType (default: stringMatch): ⏎
      patternSource (default: inline): ⏎
      pattern (default: ): curl*
    }
  Add another 'classifier' element to array 'classifiers'? [y/N]: n
]
Generated config:
{
  "classifiers": [
    {
      "name": "curl",
      "type": "requestHeader",
      "inverted": false,
      "header": "User-Agent",
      "patternType": "stringMatch",
      "patternSource": "inline",
      "pattern": "curl*"
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.classifiers -w
Running wizard for resource 'classifiers'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

classifiers : [
  classifier can be one of
    1: anonymousIp
    2: asnIds
    3: contentUrlPath
    4: contentUrlQueryParameters
    5: geoip
    6: hostName
    7: ipranges
    8: random
    9: regexMatcher
    10: requestHeader
    11: stringMatcher
    12: subnet
    13: userAgent
  Choose element index or name: stringMatcher
  Adding a 'stringMatcher' element
    classifier : {
      name (default: ): apple_matcher
      type (default: stringMatcher): ⏎
      inverted (default: False): ⏎
      source (default: content_url_path): user_agent
      pattern (default: ): *apple*
    }
  Add another 'classifier' element to array 'classifiers'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "classifiers": [
    {
      "name": "apple_matcher",
      "type": "stringMatcher",
      "inverted": false,
      "source": "user_agent",
      "pattern": "*apple*"
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.classifiers -w
Running wizard for resource 'classifiers'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

classifiers : [
  classifier can be one of
    1: anonymousIp
    2: asnIds
    3: contentUrlPath
    4: contentUrlQueryParameters
    5: geoip
    6: hostName
    7: ipranges
    8: random
    9: regexMatcher
    10: requestHeader
    11: stringMatcher
    12: subnet
    13: userAgent
  Choose element index or name: subnet
  Adding a 'subnet' element
    classifier : {
      name (default: ): company_matcher
      type (default: subnet): ⏎
      inverted (default: False): ⏎
      patternSource (default: inline): ⏎
      pattern (default: ): company
    }
  Add another 'classifier' element to array 'classifiers'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "classifiers": [
    {
      "name": "company_matcher",
      "type": "subnet",
      "inverted": false,
      "patternSource": "inline",
      "pattern": "company"
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.classifiers -w
Running wizard for resource 'classifiers'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

classifiers : [
  classifier can be one of
    1: anonymousIp
    2: asnIds
    3: contentUrlPath
    4: contentUrlQueryParameters
    5: geoip
    6: hostName
    7: ipranges
    8: random
    9: regexMatcher
    10: requestHeader
    11: stringMatcher
    12: subnet
    13: userAgent
  Choose element index or name: userAgent
  Adding a 'userAgent' element
    classifier : {
      name (default: ): iphone_matcher
      type (default: userAgent): ⏎
      inverted (default: False): ⏎
      patternType (default: stringMatch): regex
      pattern (default: ): i(P|p)hone
    }
  Add another 'classifier' element to array 'classifiers'? [y/N]: n
]
Generated config:
{
  "classifiers": [
    {
      "name": "iphone_matcher",
      "type": "userAgent",
      "inverted": false,
      "patternType": "regex",
      "pattern": "i(P|p)hone"
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

These classifiers can now be used to construct session groups and properly classify clients. Using the examples above, let’s create a session group classifying clients from Sweden using an Apple device:

$ confcli services.routing.sessionGroups -w
Running wizard for resource 'sessionGroups'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

sessionGroups : [
  sessionGroup : {
    name (default: ): inSwedenUsingAppleDevice
    classifiers : [
      classifier (default: ): sweden_matcher
      Add another 'classifier' element to array 'classifiers'? [y/N]: y
      classifier (default: ): apple_matcher
      Add another 'classifier' element to array 'classifiers'? [y/N]: ⏎
    ]
  }
  Add another 'sessionGroup' element to array 'sessionGroups'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "sessionGroups": [
    {
      "name": "inSwedenUsingAppleDevice",
      "classifiers": [
        "sweden_matcher",
        "apple_matcher"
      ]
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

Clients classified by the sweden_matcher and apple_matcher classifiers will now be put in the session group inSwedenUsingAppleDevice. Using session groups in routing will be demonstrated later in this document.

Pattern Source

The requestHeader and subnet classifiers have a patternSource field, which can be either inline or selectionInput. When set to inline, the pattern is taken directly from the pattern field.

If it is selectionInput, the pattern field is used as a path in the selection input that points to the pattern to use for classification. The selection input path may contain a wildcard ("*"), which matches all elements inside an object or array.

For example, if patternSource contains /blocked_user_agents/*/agent, the classifier will take its pattern from all agent fields in objects inside /blocked_user_agents.

If the selection input contains the following data:

{
  "blocked_user_agents": {
    { "agent1": { "agent": "Firefox" }},
    { "agent2": { "agent": "Chrome" }}
  }
}

then the classifier will match either Firefox or Chrome.

Advanced Classification

The above example will simply apply all classifiers in the list, and as long as they all evaluate to true for a session, that session will be tagged with the session group. For situations where this isn’t enough, classifiers can instead be combined using simple logic statements to form complex rules.

A first simple example can be a session group that accepts any viewers in either ASN 1, 2 or 3 (corresponding to the classifier asn_matcher or living in Sweden. This can be done by creating a session group, and adding the following logic statement:

'sweden_matcher' OR 'asn_matcher'

A slightly more advanced case is where a session group should only contain sessions neither in any of the three ASNs nor in Sweden. This is done by negating the previous example:

NOT ('sweden_matcher' OR 'asn_matcher')

A single classifier can also be negated, rather than the whole statement, for example to accept any Swedish viewers except those in the three ASNs:

'sweden_matcher' AND NOT 'asn_matcher'

Arbitrarily complex statements can be created using classifier names, parentheses, and the keywords AND, OR and NOT.

For example a session group accepting any Swedish viewers except those in the Stockholm region unless they are also Apple users:

'sweden_matcher' AND (NOT 'stockholm_matcher' OR 'apple_matcher')

Note that the classifier names must be enclosed in single quotes when using this syntax.

Applying this kind of complex classifier using confcli is no more difficult than adding a single classifier at a time:

$ confcli services.routing.sessionGroups. -w
Running wizard for resource 'sessionGroups'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

sessionGroups : [
  sessionGroup : {
    name (default: ): complex_group
    classifiers : [
      classifier (default: ): 'sweden_matcher' AND (NOT 'stockholm_matcher' OR 'apple_matcher')
      Add another 'classifier' element to array 'classifiers'? [y/N]: ⏎
    ]
  }
  Add another 'sessionGroup' element to array 'sessionGroups'? [y/N]: ⏎
]
Generated config:
{
  "sessionGroups": [
    {
      "name": "complex_group",
      "classifiers": [
        "'sweden_matcher' AND (NOT 'stockholm_matcher' OR 'apple_matcher')"
      ]
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

1.6.5 - Accounts

How to configure accounts

If accounts are configured, the router will tag sessions as belonging to an account. Note that if accounts are not configured or a session does not belong to an account, a session will be tagged with the default account.

Metrics will be tracked separately for each account when applicable.

Configuration

Accounts are configured using session groups, see Classification for more information. Using confcli, an account is configured by defining an account name and a list of session groups for which a session must be classified into to belong to the account. An account called account_1 can be configured by running the command

confcli services.routing.accounts -w
Running wizard for resource 'accounts'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

accounts : [
  account : {
    name (default: ): account_1
    sessionGroups <A session will be tagged as belonging to this account if it's classified into all of the listed session groups. (default: [])>: [
      sessionGroup (default: ): session_group_1
      Add another 'sessionGroup' element to array 'sessionGroups'? [y/N]: y
      sessionGroup (default: ): session_group_2
      Add another 'sessionGroup' element to array 'sessionGroups'? [y/N]: n
    ]
  }
  Add another 'account' element to array 'accounts'? [y/N]: n
]
Generated config:
{
  "accounts": [
    {
      "name": "account_1",
      "sessionGroups": [
        "session_group_1",
        "session_group_2"
      ]
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

A session will belong to the account account_1 if it has been classified into the two session groups session_group_1 and session_group_2.

Metrics

If using the configuration above, the metrics will be separated per account:

# TYPE num_requests counter
num_requests{account="account_1",selector="initial"} 3
# TYPE num_requests counter
num_requests{account="default",selector="initial"} 3

1.6.6 - Data streams

How to configure, consume and produce data to data streams.

Data streams can be used to produce and consume data to and from external data sources. This is useful for integrating with other systems, such as Kafka, to allow data synchronization between different instances of the Director or to read external selection input data.

Configuration

Currently, only Kafka data streams are supported. The addresses of the Kafka brokers to connect to are configured in integration.kafka.bootstrapServers:

confcli integration.kafka.bootstrapServers
{
    "bootstrapServers": [
        "kafka-broker-host:9096"
    ]
}

These Kafka brokers can then be interacted with by configuring data streams in the services.routing.dataStreams section of the configuration:

confcli services.routing.dataStreams
{
    "dataStreams": {
        "incoming": [],
        "outgoing": []
    }
}

Incoming data streams

incoming is a list of data streams that the Director will consume data from. An incoming data stream defines the following properties:

name: The name of the data stream. This is used to identify the data stream in the configuration and in the logs.
source: The source of the data stream. Currently, the only supported source is kafka, which means that the data will be consumed from the Kafka broker configured in integration.kafka.bootstrapServers.
target: The target of the data consumed from the stream. Currently, the only supported target is selectionInput, which means that the consumed data will be stored as selection input data.
kafkaTopics: A list of Kafka topics to consume data from.

The following configuration will make the Director consume data from the Kafka topic selection_input from the Kafka broker configured in integration.kafka.bootstrapServers and store it as selection input data.

confcli services.routing.dataStreams.incoming
{
    "incoming": [
        {
            "name": "incomingDataStream",
            "source": "kafka",
            "kafkaTopics": [
                "selection_input"
            ],
            "target": "selectionInput"
        }
    ]
}

Outgoing data streams

outgoing is a list of data streams that the Director will produce data to. An outgoing data stream defines the following properties:

name: The name of the data stream. This is used to identify the data stream in the configuration, in a Lua context and in the logs.
type: The type of the data stream. Currently, the only supported type is kafka, which means that the data will be produced to the Kafka broker configured in integration.kafka.bootstrapServers.
kafkaTopic: The Kafka topic to produce data to.

Example of an outgoing data stream that produces to the Kafka topic selection_input:

confcli services.routing.dataStreams.outgoing
{
    "outgoing": [
        {
            "name": "outgoingDataStream",
            "type": "kafka",
            "kafkaTopic": "selection_input"
        }
    ]
}

Data can be sent to outgoing data streams from a Lua function, see Data stream related functions for more information.

1.6.7 - Advanced features

Detailed descriptions and examples of advanced features within ESB3024

1.6.7.1 - Content popularity

How to tune content popularity parameters and use it in routing

ESB3024 Router can make routing decisions based on content popularity. All incoming content requests are tracked to continuously update a content popularity ranking list. The popularity ranking algorithm is designed to let popular content quickly rise to the top while unpopular content decays and sinks towards the bottom.

Routing

A content popularity based routing rule can be created by running

$ confcli services.routing.rules -w
Running wizard for resource 'rules'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

rules : [
  rule can be one of
    1: allow
    2: consistentHashing
    3: contentPopularity
    4: deny
    5: firstMatch
    6: random
    7: rawGroup
    8: rawHost
    9: split
    10: weighted
  Choose element index or name: contentPopularity
  Adding a 'contentPopularity' element
    rule : {
      name (default: ): content_popularity_rule
      type (default: contentPopularity):
      contentPopularityCutoff (default: 10): 5
      onPopular (default: ): edge-streamer
      onUnpopular (default: ): offload
    }
  Add another 'rule' element to array 'rules'? [y/N]: n
]
Generated config:
{
  "rules": [
    {
      "name": "content_popularity_rule",
      "type": "contentPopularity",
      "contentPopularityCutoff": 5.0,
      "onPopular": "edge-streamer",
      "onUnpopular": "offload"
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

This rule will route requests for the top 5 most popular content items to edge-streamer and all other requests to offload.

Some configuration settings attributed to content popularity are available:

$ confcli services.routing.settings.contentPopularity
{
    "contentPopularity": {
        "enabled": true,
        "algorithm": "score_based",
        "sessionGroupNames": [],
        "popularityListMaxSize": 100000,
        "scoreBased": {
            "popularityDecayFraction": 0.2,
            "popularityPredictionFactor": 2.5,
            "requestsBetweenPopularityDecay": 1000
        },
        "timeBased": {
            "intervalsPerHour": 10
        }
    }
}

enabled: Whether or not to track content popularity. When enabled is set to false, content popularity will not be tracked. Note that routing on content popularity is possible even if enabled is false and content popularity has been tracked previously.
algorithm: Choice of content popularity tracking algorithm. There are two possible choices: score_based or time_based (detailed below).
sessionGroupNames: Names of the session groups for which content popularity should be tracked. If left empty, content popularity will be tracked for all sessions. The content popularity is tracked globally, not per session group, but the popularity metrics is only updated for sessions belonging to these groups.
popularityListMaxSize: The maximum amount of unique content items to track for popularity.
scoreBased: Configuration parameters unique to the score based algorithm.
timeBased: Configuration parameters unique to the time based algorithm.

Size of Popularity List

The size of the popularity list is limited to prevent it growing forever. A single entry in the popularity ranking list will at most consume 180 bytes of memory. E.g. setting the maximum size to 1000 would consume at most 180⋅1,000 = 180,000 B = 0.18 MB. If the content popularity list is full, a request to a new item will replace the least popular item.

Setting a very high maximum size will not impact performance, it will only consume more memory.

Score-Based Algorithm

The requestsBetweenPopularityDecay parameter defines the number of requests between each popularity decay update, an integral component of this feature.

The popularityPredictionFactor and popularityDecayFraction settings tune the behaviour of the content popularity ranking algorithm, explained further below.

Decay Update

To allow for popular content to quickly rise in popularity and unpopular content to sink, a dynamic popularity ranking algorithm is used. The goal of the algorithm is to track content popularity in real time, allowing routing decisions based on the requested content’s popularity. The algorithm is applied every decay update.

The algorithm uses current trending content to predict content popularity. The popularityPredictionFactor setting regulates how much the algorithm should rely on predicted popularity. A high prediction factor allows rising content to quickly rise to high popularity but can also cause unpopular content with a sudden burst of requests to wrongfully rise to the top. A low prediction factor can cause stagnation in the popularity ranking, not allowing new popular content to rise to the top.

Unpopular content decays in popularity, the magnitude of which is regulated by popularityDecayFraction. A high value will aggressively decay content popularity on every decay update while a low value will bloat the ranking, causing stagnation. Once content decays to a trivially low popularity score, it is pruned from the content popularity list.

When configuring these tuning parameters, the most crucial data to consider is the size of your asset catalog, i.e. the number of unique contents you offer. The recommended values, obtained through testing, are presented in the table below. Note that the popularityPredictionFactor setting is the principal factor in controlling the algorithm’s behaviour.

Catalog size n	Popularity prediction factor	Popularity decay fraction
n < 1000	2.2	0.2
1000 < n < 5000	2.3	0.2
5000 < n < 10000	2.5	0.2
n > 10000	2.6	0.2

Time-Based Algorithm

The time based algorithm only requires the configuration parameter intervalsPerHour. As an example, setting intervalsPerHour to 10 would give 10 six minute intervals per hour. During each interval, all unique content requests has an associated counter, increasing by one for each incoming request. After an hour, all intervals have been cycled through. The counters in the first interval will be reset and all incoming content requests will increase the counters in the first interval again. This cycle continues forever.

When determining a single content’s popularity, the sum of each content’s counter in all intervals is used to determine a popularity ranking.

1.6.7.2 - Consistent Hashing

Details and configuration considerations for using consistent hashing based routing

Consistent hashing based routing is a feature that can be used to distribute requests to a set of hosts in a cache friendly manner. By using AgileTV’s consistent distributed hash algorithm, the amount of cache redistribution is minimized within a set of hosts. Requests for a content will always be routed to the same set of hosts, the amount of which is configured by the spread factor, allowing high cache usage. When adding or removing hosts, the algorithm minimizes cache redistribution.

Say you have the host group [s1, s2, s3, s4, s5] and have configured spreadFactor = 3. A request for a content asset1 would then be routed to the same three hosts with one of them being selected randomly for each request. Requests for a different content asset2 would also be routed to one of three different hosts, most likely a different combination of hosts than requests for content asset1.

Example routing results with spreadFactor = 3:

Request for asset1 → route to one of [s1, s3, s4].
Request for asset2 → route to one of [s2, s4, s5].
Request for asset3 → route to one of [s1, s2, s5].

Since consistent hashing based routing ensures that requests for a specific content always get routed to the same set of hosts, the risk of cache misses are lowered on the hosts since they will be served the same content requests over and over again.

Note that the maximum value of spreadFactor is 64. Consequently, the highest amount of hosts you can use in a consistentHashing rule block is 64.

Three different hashing algorithms are available: MD5, SDBM and Murmur. The algorithm is chosen during configuration.

Configuration

Configuring consistent hashing based routing is easily done using confcli. Let’s configure the example described above:

confcli services.routing.rules -w
Running wizard for resource 'rules'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

rules : [
  rule can be one of
    1: allow
    2: consistentHashing
    3: contentPopularity
    4: deny
    5: firstMatch
    6: random
    7: rawGroup
    8: rawHost
    9: split
    10: weighted
  Choose element index or name: consistentHashing
  Adding a 'consistentHashing' element
    rule : {
      name (default: ): consistentHashingRule 
      type (default: consistentHashing): 
      spreadFactor (default: 1): 3
      hashAlgorithm (default: MD5):
      targets : [
        target : {
          target (default: ): s1
          enabled (default: True): 
        }
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: y
        target : {
          target (default: ): s2
          enabled (default: True): 
        }
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: y
        target : {
          target (default: ): s3
          enabled (default: True): 
        }
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: y
        target : {
          target (default: ): s4
          enabled (default: True): 
        }
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: y
        target : {
          target (default: ): s5
          enabled (default: True): 
        }
        Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: n
      ]
    }
  Add another 'rule' element to array 'rules'? [y/N]: n
]
Generated config:
{
  "rules": [
    {
      "name": "consistentHashingRule",
      "type": "consistentHashing",
      "spreadFactor": 3,
      "hashAlgorithm": "MD5",
      "targets": [
        {
          "target": "s1",
          "enabled": true
        },
        {
          "target": "s2",
          "enabled": true
        },
        {
          "target": "s3",
          "enabled": true
        },
        {
          "target": "s4",
          "enabled": true
        },
        {
          "target": "s5",
          "enabled": true
        }
      ]
    }
  ]
}

Adding Hosts

Adding a host to the list will give an additional target for the consistent hashing algorithm to route requests to. This will shift content distribution onto the new host.

confcli services.routing.rules.consistentHashingRule.targets -w
Running wizard for resource 'targets'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

targets : [
  target : {
    target (default: ): s6
    enabled (default: True): 
  }
  Add another 'target' element to array 'targets'? [y/N]: n
]
Generated config:
{
  "targets": [
    {
      "target": "s6",
      "enabled": true
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

Removing Hosts

There is one very important caveat of using a consistent hashing rule block. As long as you don’t modify the list of hosts, the consistent hashing algorithm will keep routing requests to the same hosts. However, if you remove a host from the block in any position except the last, the consistent hashing algorithm’s behaviour will change and the algorithm cannot maintain a minimum amount of cache redistribution.

If you’re in a situation where you have to remove a host from the routing targets but want to keep the same consistent hashing behaviour, e.g. during very high load, you’ll have to toggle that target’s enabled field to false. E.g., disabling requests to s2 can be accomplished by:

$ confcli services.routing.rules.consistentHashingRule.targets.1.enabled false
services.routing.rules.consistentHashingRule.targets.1.enabled = False
$ confcli services.routing.rules.consistentHashingRule.targets.1
{
    "1": {
        "target": "s2",
        "enabled": false
    }
}

If you modify the list order or remove hosts, it is highly recommended to do so during moments where a higher rate of cache misses are acceptable.

1.6.7.3 - Security token verification

Only allow requests that contain a correct security token

The security token verification feature allows for ESB3024 Router to only process requests that contain a correct security token. The token is generated by the client, for example in the portal, using an algorithm that it shares with the router. The router verifies the token and rejects the request if the token is incorrect.

It is beyond the scope of this document to describe how the token is generated, that is described in the Security Tokens application note that is installed with the ESB3024 Router’s extra documentation.

Setting up a Routing Rule

The token verification is performed by calling the verify_security_token() function from a routing rule. The function returns 1 if the token is correct, otherwise it returns 0. It should typically be called from the first routing rule, to make requests with bad tokens fail as early as possible.

The confcli example assumes that the router already has rules configured, with an entry point named select_cdn. Token verification is enabled by inserting an “allow” rule first in the rule list.

confcli services.routing.rules -w
Running wizard for resource 'rules'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

rules : [
  rule can be one of
    1: allow
    2: consistentHashing
    3: contentPopularity
    4: deny
    5: firstMatch
    6: random
    7: rawGroup
    8: rawHost
    9: split
    10: weighted
  Choose element index or name: allow
  Adding a 'allow' element
    rule : {
      name (default: ): token_verification
      type (default: allow):
      condition (default: always()): verify_security_token()
      onMatch (default: ): select_cdn
    }
  Add another 'rule' element to array 'rules'? [y/N]: n
]
Generated config:
{
  "rules": [
    {
      "name": "token_verification",
      "type": "allow",
      "condition": "verify_security_token()",
      "onMatch": "select_cdn"
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

$ confcli services.routing.entrypoint token_verification
services.routing.entrypoint = 'token_verification'

"routing": {
  "id": "token_verification",
  "member_order": "sequential",
  "members": [
    {
      "id": "token_verification.0.select_cdn",
      "member_order": "weighted",
      "members": [
        ...
      ],
      "weight_function": "return verify_security_token() ~= 0"
    },
    {
      "id": "token_verification.1.rejected",
      "member_order": "sequential",
      "members": [],
      "weight_function": "return 1"
    }
  ],
  "weight_function": "return 100"
},

Configuring Security Token Options

The secret parameter is not part of the router request, but needs to be configured separately in the router. That can be done with the host-config tool that is installed with the router.

Besides configuring the secret, host-config can also configure floating sessions and a URL prefix. Floating sessions are sessions that are not tied to a specific IP address. When that is enabled, the token verification will not take the IP address into account when verifying the token.

The security token verification is configured per host, where a host is the name of the host that the request was sent to. This makes it possible for a router to support multiple customer accounts, each with their own secret. If no configuration is found for a host, a configuration with the name default is used.

host-config supports three commands: print, set and delete.

Print

The print command prints the current configuration for a host. The following parameters are supported:

host-config print [-n <host-name>]

By default it prints the configuration for all hosts, but if the optional -n flag is given it will print the configuration for a single host.

Set

The set command sets the configuration for a host. The configuration is given as command line parameters. The following parameters are supported:

host-config set
    -n <host-name>
    [-f floating]
    [-p url-prefix]
    [-r <secret-to-remove>]
    [-s <secret-to-add>]

-n <host-name> - The name of the host to configure.
-f floating - A boolean option that specifies if floating sessions are accepted. The parameter accepts the values true and false.
-p url-prefix - A URL prefix that is used for identifying requests that come from a certain account. This is not used when verifying tokens.
-r <secret-to-remove> - A secret that should be removed from the list of secrets.
-s <secret-to-add> - A secret that should be added to the list of secrets.

For example, to set the secret “secret-1” and enable floating sessions for the default host, the following command can be used:

host-config set -n default -s secret-1 -f true

The set command only touches the configuration options that are mentioned on the command line, so the following command line will add a second secret to the default host without changing the floating session setting:

host-config set -n default -s secret-2

It is possible to set multiple secrets per host. This is useful when updating a secret, then both the old and the new secret can be valid during the transition period. After the transition period the old secret can be removed by typing:

host-config set -n default -r secret-1

Delete

The delete command deletes the configuration for a host. It supports the following parameters:

host-config delete -n <host-name>

For example, to delete the configuration for example.com, the following command can be used:

host-config delete -n example.com

Global Options

host-config also has a few global options. They are:

-k <security-key> - The security key that is used when communicating with the router. This is normally retrieved automatically.
-h - Print a help message and exit.
-r <router> - The router to connect to. This default to localhost, but can be changed to connect to a remote router.
-v - Verbose output, can be given multiple times.

Debugging Security Token Verification

The security token verification only logs messages when the log level is set to 4 or higher. Then it will only log some errors. It is possible to enable more verbose logging using the security-token-config that is installed together with the router.

When verbose logging is enabled, the router will log information about the token verification, including the configured token secrets, so it needs to be used with care.

The logged lines are prefixed with verify_security_token.

The security-token-config tool supports the commands print and set.

Print

The print command prints the current configuration. If nothing is configured it will not print anything.

Set

The set command sets the configuration. The following parameters are supported:

security-token-config set
    [-d <enabled>]

-d <enabled> - A boolean option that specifies if debug logging should be enabled or not. The parameter accepts the values true and false.

1.6.7.4 - Subnets API

How to match clients into named subnets and use them in routing

ESB3024 Router provides utilities to quickly match clients into subnets. Any combination of IPv4 and IPv6 addresses can be used. To begin, a JSON file is needed, defining all subnets, e.g:

{
  "255.255.255.255/24": "area1",
  "255.255.255.255/16": "area2",
  "255.255.255.255/8": "area3",
  "90.90.1.3/16": "area4",
  "5.5.0.4/8": "area5",
  "2a02:2e02:9bc0::/48": "area6",
  "2a02:2e02:9bc0::/32": "area7",
  "2a02:2e02:9bc0::/16": "area8",
  "2a02:2e02:9de0::/44": "combined_area",
  "2a02:2e02:ada0::/44": "combined_area"
}

and PUT it to the endpoint :5001/v1/subnets or :5001/v2/subnets, the API version doesn’t matter for subnets:

curl -k -T subnets.json -H "Content-Type: application/json" https://router-host:5001/v1/subnets

Note that it is possible for several subnet CIDR strings to share the same label, effectively grouping them together.

The router provides the built-in function in_subnet(subnet_name) that can to make routing decisions based on a client’s subnet. For more details, see Built-in Lua functions. To configure a rule that only allows clients in the area1 subnet, run the command

$ confcli services.routing.rules -w
Running wizard for resource 'rules'

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

rules : [
  rule can be one of
    1: allow
    2: consistentHashing
    3: contentPopularity
    4: deny
    5: firstMatch
    6: random
    7: rawGroup
    8: rawHost
    9: split
    10: weighted
  Choose element index or name: allow
  Adding a 'allow' element
    rule : {
      name (default: ): only_allow_area1
      type (default: allow):
      condition (default: always()): in_subnet('area1')
      onMatch (default: ): example-host
    }
  Add another 'rule' element to array 'rules'? [y/N]: n
]
Generated config:
{
  "rules": [
    {
      "name": "only_allow_area1",
      "type": "allow",
      "condition": "in_subnet('area1')",
      "onMatch": "example-host"
    }
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

Invalid IP-addresses will be omitted during subnet list construction accompanied by a message in the log displaying the invalid IP address.

1.6.7.5 - Lua Features

Detailed descriptions and examples of Lua features offered by ESB3024 Router.

1.6.7.5.1 - Built-in Lua Functions

All built-in Lua functions available for routing.

This section details all built-in Lua functions provided by the router.

Logging Functions

The router provides Lua logging functionality that is convenient when creating custom Lua functions. A prefix can be added to the log message which is useful to differentiate log messages from different lua files. At the top of the Lua source file, add the line

local log = log.add_prefix("my_lua_file")

to prepend all log messages with "my_lua_file".

The logging functions support formatting and common log levels:

log.critical('A log message with number %d', 1.5)
log.error('A log message with string %s', 'a string')
log.warning('A log message with integer %i', 1)
log.info('A log message with a local number variable %d', some_local_number)
log.debug('A log message with a local string variable %s', some_local_string)
log.trace('A log message with a local integer variable %i', some_local_integer)
log.message('A log message')

Many of the router’s built-in Lua functions use the logging functions.

Predictive Load-Balancing Functions

Predictive load balancing is a tool that can be used to avoid overloading hosts with traffic. Consider the case where a popular event starts at a certain time, let’s say 12 PM. A spike in traffic will be routed to the hosts that are streaming the content at 12 PM, most of them starting at low bitrates. A host might have sufficient bandwidth left to take on more clients but when the recently connected clients start ramping up in video quality and increase their bitrate, the host can quickly become overloaded, possibly dropping incoming requests or going offline. Predictive load balancing solves this issue by considering how many times a host recently been redirected to.

Four functions for predictive load balancing are provided by the router that can be used when constructing conditions/weight functions: host_bitrate() , host_bitrate_custom(), host_has_bw() and host_has_bw_custom(). All require data to be supplied to the selection input API and apply only to leaf nodes in the routing tree. In order for predictive load balancing to work properly the data must be updated at regular intervals. The data needs to be supplied by the target system.

These functions are suitable to used as host health checks. To configure host health checks, see configuring CDNs and hosts.

Note that host_bitrate() and host_has_bw() rely on data supplied by metrics agents, detailed in Cache hardware metrics: monitoring and routing.

host_bitrate_custom() and host_has_bw_custom() rely on manually supplied selection input data, detailed in selection input API. The bitrate unit depends on the data submitted to the selection input API.

Example Metrics

The data supplied to the selection input API by the metrics agents uses the following structure:

{
  "streamer-1": {
    "hardware_metrics": {
      "/": {
        "free": 1741596278784,
        "total": 1758357934080,
        "used": 16761655296,
        "used_percent": 0.9532561585516977
      },
      "cpu_load1": 0.02,
      "cpu_load15": 0.12,
      "cpu_load5": 0.02,
      "mem_available": 4895789056,
      "mem_available_percent": 59.551760354263074,
      "mem_total": 8221065216,
      "mem_used": 2474393600,
      "n_cpus": 4
    },
    "per_interface_metrics": {
      "eths1": {
        "link": 1,
        "interface_up": true,
        "megabits_sent": 22322295739.378456,
        "megabits_sent_rate": 8085.2523952,
        "speed": 100000
      }
    }
  }
}

Note that all built-in functions interacting with selection input values support indexing into nested selection input data. Consider the selection input data in above. The nested values can be accessed by using dots between the keys:

si('streamer-1.per_interface_metrics.eths1.megabits_sent_rate')

Note that the whole selection input variable name must be within single quotes. The function si() is documented under general purpose functions.

`host_bitrate({})`

host_bitrate() returns the predicted bitrate (in megabits per second) of the host after the recently connected clients start ramping up in streaming quality. The function accepts an argument table with the following keys:

interface: The name of the interface to use for bitrate prediction.
Optional avg_bitrate: the average bitrate per client, defaults to 6 megabits per second.
Optional num_routers: the number of routers that can route to this host, defaults to 1. This is important to accurately predict the incoming load if multiple routers are used.
Optional host: The name of the host to use for bitrate prediction. Defaults to the current host if not provided.

Required Selection Input Data

This function relies on the field megabits_sent_rate, supplied by the Telegraf metrics agent, as seen in example metrics. If these fields are missing from your selection input data, this function will not work.

Examples of usage:

host_bitrate({interface='eths0'})
host_bitrate({avg_bitrate=1, interface='eths0'})
host_bitrate({num_routers=2, interface='eths0'})
host_bitrate({avg_bitrate=1, num_routers=4, interface='eths0'})
host_bitrate({avg_bitrate=1, num_routers=4, host='custom_host', interface='eths0'})

host_bitrate({}) calculates the predicted bitrate as:

predicted_host_bitrate = current_host_bitrate + (recent_connections * avg_bitrate * num_routers)

`host_bitrate_custom({})`

Same functionality as host_bitrate() but uses a custom selection input variable as bitrate input instead of accessing hardware metrics. The function accepts an argument table with the following keys:

custom_bitrate_var: The name of the selection input variable to be used for accessing current host bitrate.
Optional avg_bitrate: see host_bitrate() documentation above.
Optional num_routers: see host_bitrate() documentation above.

host_bitrate_custom({custom_bitrate_var='host1_current_bitrate'})
host_bitrate_custom({avg_bitrate=1, custom_bitrate_var='host1_current_bitrate'})
host_bitrate_custom({num_routers=4, custom_bitrate_var='host1_current_bitrate'})

`host_has_bw({})`

Instead of accessing the predicted bitrate of a host through host_bitrate(), host_has_bw() returns 1 if the host is predicted to have enough bandwidth left to take on more clients after recent connections ramp up in bitrate, otherwise it returns 0. The function accepts an argument table with the following keys:

interface: see host_bitrate() documentation above.
Optional avg_bitrate: see host_bitrate() documentation above.
Optional num_routers: see host_bitrate() documentation above.
Optional host: see host_bitrate() documentation above.
Optional margin: the bitrate (megabits per second) headroom that should be taken into account during calculation, defaults to 0.

host_has_bw({}) returns whether or not the following statement is true:

predicted_host_bitrate + margin < host_bitrate_capacity

Required Selection Input Data

host_has_bw({}) relies on the fields megabits_sent_rate and speed, supplied by the Telegraf metrics agent, as seen in example metrics. If these fields are missing from your selection input data, this function will not work.

Examples of usage:

host_has_bw({interface='eths0'})
host_has_bw({margin=10, interface='eth0'})
host_has_bw({avg_bitrate=1, interface='eth0'})
host_has_bw({num_routers=4, interface='eth0'})
host_has_bw({host='custom_host', interface='eth0'})

`host_has_bw_custom({})`

Same functionality as host_has_bw() but uses a custom selection input variable as bitrate. It also uses a number or a custom selection input variable for the capacity. The function accepts an argument table with the following keys:

custom_capacity_var: a number representing the capacity of the network interface OR the name of the selection input variable to be used for accessing host capacity.
custom_bitrate_var: see host_bitrate_custom() documentation
Optional margin: see host_has_bw() documentation above. above.
Optional avg_bitrate: see host_bitrate() documentation above.
Optional num_routers: see host_bitrate() documentation above.

Examples of usage:

host_has_bw_custom({custom_capacity_var=10000, custom_bitrate_var='streamer-1.per_interface_metrics.eths1.megabits_sent_rate'})
host_has_bw_custom({custom_capacity_var='host1_capacity', custom_bitrate_var='streamer-1.per_interface_metrics.eths1.megabits_sent_rate'})
host_has_bw_custom({margin=10, custom_capacity_var=10000, custom_bitrate_var='streamer-1.per_interface_metrics.eths1.megabits_sent_rate'})
host_has_bw_custom({avg_bitrate=1, custom_capacity_var=10000, custom_bitrate_var='streamer-1.per_interface_metrics.eths1.megabits_sent_rate'})
host_has_bw_custom({num_routers=4, custom_capacity_var=10000, custom_bitrate_var='streamer-1.per_interface_metrics.eths1.megabits_sent_rate'})

Health Check Functions

This section details built-in Lua functions that are meant to be used for host health checks. Note that these functions rely on data supplied by metric agents detailed in Cache hardware metrics: monitoring and routing. Make sure cache hardware metrics are supplied to the router before using any of these functions.

`cpu_load_ok({})`

The function accepts an optional argument table with the following keys:

Optional host: The name of the host. Defaults to the name of the selected host if not provided.
Optional cpu_load5_limit: The acceptable limit for the 5-minute CPU load. Defaults to 0.9 if not provided.

The function returns 1 if the five minute CPU load average is below their respective limits, and 0 otherwise.

Examples of usage:

cpu_load_ok()
cpu_load_ok({host = 'custom_host'})
cpu_load_ok({cpu_load5_limit = 0.8})
cpu_load_ok({host = 'custom_host', cpu_load5_limit = 0.8})

`memory_usage_ok({})`

The function accepts an optional argument table with the following keys:

Optional host: The name of the host. Defaults to the host of the selected host if not provided.
Optional memory_usage_limit: The acceptable limit for the memory usage. Defaults to 0.9 if not provided.

The function returns 1 if the memory usage is below the limit, and 0 otherwise.

Examples of usage:

memory_usage_ok()
memory_usage_ok({host = 'custom_host'})
memory_usage_ok({memory_usage_limit = 0.7})
memory_usage_ok({host = 'custom_host', memory_usage_limit = 0.7})

`interfaces_online({})`

The function accepts an argument table with the following keys:

Required interfaces: A string or a table of strings representing the network interfaces to check.
Optional host: The name of the host. Defaults to the host of the selected host if not provided.

The function returns 1 if all the specified interfaces are online, and 0 otherwise.

Required Selection Input Data

This function relies on the fields link and interface_up, supplied by the Telegraf metrics agent, as seen in example metrics. If these fields are missing from your selection input data, this function will not work.

Examples of usage:

interfaces_online({interfaces = 'eth0'})
interfaces_online({interfaces = {'eth0', 'eth1'}})
interfaces_online({host = 'custom_host', interfaces = 'eth0'})
interfaces_online({host = 'custom_host', interfaces = {'eth0', 'eth1'}})

`health_check({})`

The function accepts an optional argument table with the following keys:

Required interfaces: A string or a table of strings representing the network interfaces to check.
Optional host: The name of the host. Defaults to the host of the selected host if not provided.
Optional cpu_load5_limit: The acceptable limit for the 5-minute CPU load. Defaults to 0.9 if not provided.
Optional memory_usage_limit: The acceptable limit for the memory usage. Defaults to 0.9 if not provided.

The function calls the health check functions cpu_load_ok({}), memory_usage_ok({}) and interfaces_online({}). The functions returns 1 if all these functions returned 1, otherwise it returns 0.

Examples of usage:

health_check({interfaces = 'eths0'})
health_check({host = 'custom_host', interfaces = 'eths0'})
health_check({cpu_load5_limit = 0.7, memory_usage_limit = 0.8, interfaces = 'eth0'})
health_check({host = 'custom_host', cpu_load5_limit = 0.7, memory_usage_limit = 0.8, interfaces = {'eth0', 'eth1'}})

General Purpose Functions

The router supplies a number of general purpose Lua functions.

`always()`

Always returns 1.

`never()`

Always returns 0. Useful for temporarily disabling caches by using it as a health check.

Examples of usage:

always()
never()

`si(si_name)`

The function reads the value of the selection input variable si_name and returns it if it exists, otherwise it returns 0. The function accepts a string argument for the selection input variable name.

Examples of usage:

si('some_selection_input_variable_name')
si('streamer-1.per_interface_metrics.eths1.megabits_sent_rate')

Comparison functions

All comparison functions use the form function(si_name, value) and compares the selection input value with the name si_name with value.

`ge(si_name, value)` - greater than or equal

`gt(si_name, value)` - greater than

`le(si_name, value)` - less than or equal

`lt(si_name, value)` - less than

`eq(si_name, value)` - equal to

`neq(si_name, value)` - not equal to

Examples of usage:

ge('streamer-1.hardware_metrics.mem_available_percent', 30)
gt('streamer-1.hardware_metrics./.free', 1000000000)
le('streamer-1.hardware_metrics.cpu_load5', 0.8)
lt('streamer-1.per_interface_metrics.eths1.megabits_sent_rate', 9000)
eq('streamer-1.per_interface_metrics.eths1.link.', 1)
neq('streamer-1.hardware_metrics.n_cpus', 4)

Session Checking Functions

`in_subnet(subnet)`

Returns 1 if the current session belongs to subnet, otherwise it returns 0. See Subnets API for more details on how to use subnets in routing. The function accepts a string argument for the subnet name.

Examples of usage:

in_subnet('stockholm')
in_subnet('unserviced_region')
in_subnet('some_other_subnet')

These functions checks the current session’s session groups.

`in_session_group(session_group)`

Returns 1 if the current session has been classified into session_group, otherwise it returns 0. The function accepts a string argument for the session group name.

`in_any_session_group({})`

Returns 1 if the current session has been classified into any of session_groups, otherwise it returns 0. The function accepts a table array of strings as argument for the session group names.

`in_all_session_groups({})`

Returns 1 if the current session has been classified into all of session_groups, otherwise it returns 0. The function accepts a table array of strings as argument for the session group names.

Examples of usage:

in_session_group('safari_browser')
in_any_session_group({ 'in_europe', 'in_asia'})
in_all_session_group({ 'vod_content', 'in_america'})

Other built-in functions

`base64_encode(data)`

base64_encode(data) returns the base64 encoded string of data.

Arguments:

data: The data to encode.

Example:

print(base64_encode('Hello world!'))
SGVsbG8gd29ybGQh

`base64_decode(data)`

base64_decode(data) returns the decoded data of the base64 encoded string, as a raw binary string.

Arguments:

data: The data to decode.

Example:

print(base64_decode('SGVsbG8gd29ybGQh'))
Hello world!

`base64_url_encode(data)`

base64_url_encode(data) returns the base64 URL encoded string of data.

Arguments:

data: The data to encode.

Example:

print(base64_url_encode('ab~~'))
YWJ-fg

`base64_url_decode(data)`

base64_url_decode(data) returns the decoded data of the base64 URL encoded string, as a raw binary string.

Arguments:

data: The data to decode.

Example:

print(base64_url_decode('YWJ-fg'))
ab~~

`to_hex_string(data)`

to_hex_string(data) returns a string containing the hexadecimal representation of the string data.

Arguments:

data: The data to convert.

Example:

print(to_hex_string('Hello world!\n'))
48656c6c6f20776f726c64210a

`from_hex_string(data)`

from_hex_string(data) returns a string containing the byte representation of the hexadecimal string data.

Arguments:

data: The data to convert.

Example:

print(from_hex_string('48656c6c6f20776f726c6421'))
Hello world!

`empty(table)`

empty(table) returns true if table is empty, otherwise it returns false.

Arguments:

table: The table to check.

Examples:

print(tostring(empty({})))
true

print(tostring(empty({1, 2, 3})))
false

`md5(data)`

md5(data) returns the MD5 hash of data, as a hexstring.

Arguments:

data: The data to hash.

Example:

print(md5('Hello world!'))
86fb269d190d2c85f6e0468ceca42a20

`sha256(date)`

sha256(data) returns the SHA-256 hash of data, as a hexstring.

Arguments:

data: The data to hash.

Example:

print(sha256('Hello world!'))
c0535e4be2b79ffd93291305436bf889314e4a3faec05ecffcbb7df31ad9e51a

`hmac_sha256(key, data)`

hmac_sha256(key, data) returns the HMAC-SHA-256 hash of data using key, as a string containing raw binary data.

Arguments:

key: The key to use.
data: The data to hash.

Example:

print(to_hex_string(hmac_sha256('secret', 'Hello world!')))
a65f4cfcf5f421ff2be052e0642bccbcfeb126ee73ebc4fe3b381964302eb632

`hmac_sha384(key, data)`

hmac_sha384(key, data) returns the HMAC-SHA-384 hash of data using key, as a string containing raw binary data.

Arguments:

key: The key to use.
data: The data to hash.

Example:

print(to_hex_string(hmac_sha384('secret', 'Hello world!')))
917516d93d3509a371a129ca50933195dd659712652f07ba5792cbd5cade5e6285a841808842cfa0c3c69c8fb234468a

`hmac_sha512(key, data)`

hmac_sha512(key, data) returns the HMAC-SHA-512 hash of data using key, as a string containing raw binary data.

Arguments:

key: The key to use.
data: The data to hash.

Example:

print(to_hex_string(hmac_sha512('secret', 'Hello world!')))
dff6c00943387f9039566bfee0994de698aa2005eecdbf12d109e17aff5bbb1b022347fbf4bd94ede7c7d51571022525556b64f9d5e4386de99d0025886eaaff

`hmac_md5(key, data)`

hmac_md5(key, data) returns the HMAC-MD5 hash of data using key, as a string containing raw binary data.

Arguments:

key: The key to use.
data: The data to hash.

Example:

print(to_hex_string(hmac_md5('secret', 'Hello world!')))
444fad0d374d14369d6b595062da5d91

`regex_replace`

regex_replace(data, pattern, replacement) returns the string data with all occurrences of the regular expression pattern replaced with replacement.

Arguments:

data: The data to replace.
pattern: The regular expression pattern to match.
replacement: The replacement string.

Examples:

print(regex_replace('Hello world!', 'world', 'Lua'))
Hello Lua!

print(regex_replace('Hello world!', 'l+', 'lua'))
Heluao worluad!

If the regular expression pattern is invalid, regex_replace() returns an error message.

Examples:

print(regex_replace('Hello world!', '*', 'lua'))
regex_error caught: regex_error

`unixtime()`

unixtime() returns the current Unix timestamp, as seconds since midnight, Janury 1 1970 UTC, as an integer.

Arguments:

None

Example:

print(unixtime())
1733517373

`now()`

now() returns the current Unix timestamp, the number of seconds since midnight, Janury 1 1970 UTC, as an number with decimals.

Arguments:

None

Example:

print(now())
1733517373.5007

`time_to_epoch(time, fmt)`

time_to_epoch(time, fmt) returns the Unix timestamp, the number of seconds since midnight, Janury 1 1970 UTC, of the time string time, which is formatted according to the format string fmt.

Arguments:

time: The time string to convert.
fmt (Optional): The format string of the time string, as specified by the POSIX function strptime(). If not specified, it defaults to “%Y-%m-%dT%TZ”.

Examples:

print(time_to_epoch('1972-04-17T06:10:20Z'))
72339020

print(time_to_epoch('17/04-72 06:20:30', '%d/%m-%y %H:%M:%S'))
72339630

`epoch_to_time(time, format)`

epoch_to_time(time, format) returns the time string of the Unix timestamp time, formatted according to format.

Arguments:

time: The Unix timestamp to convert, as a number.
format (Optional): The format string of the time string, as specified by the POSIX function strftime(). If not specified, it defaults to “%Y-%m-%dT%TZ”.

Examples:

print(epoch_to_time(123456789))
1973-11-29T21:33:09Z

print(epoch_to_time(1234567890, '%d/%m-%y %H:%M:%S'))
13/02-09 23:31:30

`get_consistent_hashing_weight(contentName, nodeIdsString, spreadFactor, hashAlgoritm, nodeId)`

get_consistent_hashing_weight(contentName, nodeIdsString, spreadFactor, hashAlgoritm, nodeId) returns the priority that node nodeId has in the list of preferred nodes, determined using consistent hashing. The first spreadfactor:th nodes should have equal weights to randomize requests between them. Remaining nodes should have decrementally decreasing weights to honor node priority during failover.

Arguments:

contentName: The name of the content to hash.
nodeIdsString: A string containing the node IDs to hash, on the format ‘0,1,2,3’.
spreadFactor: The number of nodes to spread the requests between.
hashAlgorithm: Which hash algorithm to use. Supported algorithms are “MD5”, “SDBM” and “Murmur”. Default is “MD5”.
nodeId: The ID of the node to calculate the weight for.

Examples:

print(get_consistent_hashing_weight('/vod/film1', '0,1,2,3,4,5', 3, 'MD5', 3))
6

print(get_consistent_hashing_weight('/vod/film2', '0,1,2,3,4,5', 3, 'MD5', 3))
4

print(get_consistent_hashing_weight('/vod/film2', '0,1,2', 2, 'Murmur', 1))
2

See Consistent Hashing for more information about consistent hashing.

`expand_ipv6_address(address)`

expand_ipv6_address(address) returns the fully expanded form of the IPv6 address address.

Arguments:

address: The IPv6 address to expand. If the address is not a valid IPv6 address, the function returns the contents of address unmodified. This allows for the function to pass through IPv4 addresses.

Examples:

print(expand_ipv6_address('2001:db8::1'))
2001:0db8:0000:0000:0000:0000:0000:0001

print(expand_ipv6_address('198.51.100.5'))
198.51.100.5

The router provides a number of functions that are useful when working with data streams. These functions are used to write data to the data stream configured in the services.routing.dataStreams.outgoing section of the configuration. See data streams for more information.

`send_to_data_stream`

send_to_data_stream(data_stream, message) sends the string message to the outgoing data stream data_stream. Note that message is sent verbatim, without any formatting.

Arguments:

data_stream: The name of the data stream to send to.
message: The message to send.

Example:

-- Sends the message "Hello world!" to the data stream 'token_stream'
send_to_data_stream('token_stream', 'Hello world!')

`data_streams.post_selection_key_value`

data_streams.post_selection_key_value(data_stream, path, key, value, ttl_s) posts the key-value pair key=value on the path path to the data stream data_stream. The key-value is formatted as a selection input value {key: value}, will be stored in path and will persist for ttl_s seconds. This is the same format that is expected when parsing data from incoming data streams of the type "selectionInput" to read selection input data from external data streams. This means that this function can be used to post selection input data to an external data stream, which can then be read by other Director instances.

Arguments:

data_stream: The name of the data stream to post to.
path: The path to post the key-value pair to. Note that the path is automatically prefixed with "/v2/selection_input".
key: The key to post.
value: The value to post.
Optional ttl_s: The time to live of the key-value pair, in seconds. If not specified, it will persist forever.

Example:

-- Posts the selection input value {"si_var": 1337} on the path "/v2/selection_input/path"
-- to the data stream 'outgoingDataStream' with a TTL of 60 seconds
data_streams.post_selection_key_value('outgoingDataStream', '/path', 'si_var', 1337, 60)

Token blocking functions

The router provides a number of functions that are useful when working with token blocking to control CDN access.

`blocked_tokens.augment_token(token, customer_id)`

Returns an augmented token string formatted like <customer_id>__<token>. This function is useful when additional information is needed for token blocking, such as customer ID.

Arguments:

token: The token to augment.
customer_id: The customer ID to augment the token with.

Example:

-- Augments the token eyJhbG213 with the customer ID 12345
local augmented_token = blocked_tokens.augment_token('eyJhbG213', '12345')
print(augmented_token)
12345__eyJhbG213

`blocked_tokens.add(stream_name, token, ttl_s)`

blocked_tokens.add() is a specialized version of data_streams.post_selection_key_value() that is commonly used to synchronize blocked tokens between multiple Directors to deny unpermitted access into a CDN. It posts selection input data to the data stream stream_name which is consumed into selection input by all connected Director instances so that the blocked token can easily be checked during routing by calling blocked_tokens.is_blocked(token).

Arguments:

stream_name: The name of the data stream to post to.
token: The token to post.
Optional ttl_s: The time to live of the token, in seconds. Defaults to 3 hours (10800 seconds) if not specified.

Example:

-- Posts the token eyJhbG213 with a TTL of 3 hours
blocked_tokens.add('token_stream', 'eyJhbG213')
-- Posts the token R5cCI6Ik with a TTL of 60 seconds
blocked_tokens.add('token_stream', 'R5cCI6Ik', 60)

`blocked_tokens.is_blocked(token)`

blocked_tokens.is_blocked(token) checks if the token token has been blocked by checking if it is stored in selection input. It returns true if the token is blocked, otherwise it returns false.

Arguments:

token: The token to check.

Example:

-- Checks if the token eyJhbG213 is blocked
blocked_tokens.is_blocked('eyJhbG213')
-- Checks if the augmented token 12345__eyJhbG213 is blocked
blocked_tokens.is_blocked(blocked_tokens.augment_token('eyJhbG213', '12345'))
blocked_tokens.is_blocked('12345__eyJhbG213')

Custom Lua Metrics functions

The router provides functions for managing custom metrics counters that will be available in the OpenMetrics format on the router’s metrics API.

`increase_metrics_counter(counter_name, label_table, amount)`

increase_metrics_counter(counter_name, label_table, amount) increases the custom metrics counter counter_name by amount. The counter is identified by the label_table which is a table of key-value pairs.

Arguments:

counter_name: The name of the counter to increase.
label_table: A table of key-value pairs to identify the counter.
Optional amount: The amount to increase the counter by. Defaults to 1 if not defined.

Example:

-- Increases the counter 'my_counter' by 1
increase_metrics_counter('my_counter', {label='foo'})

-- Increases the counter 'another_counter' by 5
increase_metrics_counter('another_counter', {label1='value1', label2='value2'}, 5)

These examples will create the following metrics:

# TYPE my_counter counter
my_counter{label="foo"} 1
# TYPE another_counter counter
another_counter{label1="value1", label2="value2"} 5

`reset_metrics_counter(counter_name, label_table)`

reset_metrics_counter(counter_name, label_table) removes the custom metrics counter counter_name with the labels defined in label_table.

Arguments:

counter_name: The name of the counter to remove.
label_table: A table of key-value pairs to identify the counter.

Example:

-- Removes the counter 'my_counter'
reset_metrics_counter('my_counter', {label='foo'})
-- Removes the counter 'another_counter'
reset_metrics_counter('another_counter', {label1='value1', label2='value2'})

Configuration examples

Many of the functions documented are suitable to use in host health checks. To configure host health checks, see configuring CDNs and hosts. Here are some configuration examples of using the built-in Lua functions, utilizing the example metrics:

"healthChecks": [
    "gt('streamer-1.hardware_metrics.mem_available_percent', 20)", // More than 20% memory is left
    "lt('streamer-1.per_interface_metrics.eths1.megabits_sent_rate', 9000)" // Current bitrate is lower than 9000 Mbps
    "host_has_bw({host='streamer-1', interface='eths1', margin=1000})", // host_has_bw() uses 'streamer-1.per_interface_metrics.eths1.speed' to determine if there is enough bandwidth left with a 1000 Mbps margin
    "interfaces_online({host='streamer-1', interfaces='eths1'})",
    "memory_usage_ok({host='streamer-1'})",
    "cpu_load_ok({host='streamer-1'})",
    "health_check({host='streamer-1', interfaces='eths1'})" // Combines interfaces_online(), memory_usage_ok(), cpu_load_ok()
]

1.6.7.5.2 - Global Lua Tables

Details on all global Lua tables and the data they contain.

There are multiple global tables containing important data available while writing Lua code for the router.

`selection_input`

Contains arbitrary, custom fields fed into the router by clients, see API overview for details on how to inject data into this table.

Note that the selection_input table is iterable.

Usage examples:

print(selection_input['some_value'])

-- Iterate over table
if selection_input then
    for k, v in pairs(selection_input) do
        print('here is '..'selection_input!')
        print(k..'='..v)
    end
else
    print('selection_input is nil')
end

`session_groups`

Defines a mapping from session group name to boolean, indicating whether the session belongs to the session group or not.

Usage examples:

if session_groups.vod then print('vod') else print('not vod') end
if session_groups['vod'] then print('vod') else print('not vod') end

`session_count`

Provides counters of number of session types per session group. The table uses the structure qoe_score.<session_type>.<session_group>.

Usage examples:

print(session_count.instream.vod)
print(session_count.initial.vod)

`qoe_score`

Provides the quality of experience score per host per session group. The table uses the structure qoe_score.<host>.<session_group>.

Usage examples:

print(qoe_score.host1.vod)
print(qoe_score.host1.live)

`request`

Contains data related to the HTTP request between the client and the router.

request.method
- Description: HTTP request method.
- Type: string
- Example: 'GET', 'POST'
request.body
- Description: HTTP request body string.
- Type: string or nil
- Example: '{"foo": "bar"}'
request.major_version
- Description: Major HTTP version such as x in HTTP/x.1.
- Type: integer
- Example: 1
request.minor_version
- Description: Minor HTTP version such as x in HTTP/1.x.
- Type: integer
- Example: 1
request.protocol
- Description: Transfer protocol variant.
- Type: string
- Example: 'HTTP', 'HTTPS'
request.client_ip
- Description: IP address of the client issuing the request.
- Type: string
- Example: '172.16.238.128'
request.path_with_query_params
- Description: Full request path including query parameters.
- Type: string
- Example: '/mycontent/superman.m3u8?b=y&c=z&a=x'
request.path
- Description: Request path without query parameters.
- Type: string
- Example: '/mycontent/superman.m3u8'
request.query_params
- Description: The query parameter string.
- Type: string
- Example: 'b=y&c=z&a=x'
request.filename
- Description: The part of the path following the final slash, if any.
- Type: string
- Example: 'superman.m3u8'
request.subnet
- Description: Subnet of client_ip.
- Type: string or nil
- Example: 'all'

`session`

Contains data related to the current session.

session.client_ip
- Description: Alias for request.client_ip. See documentation for table request above.
session.path_with_query_params
- Description: Alias for request.path_with_query_params. See documentation for table request above.
session.path
- Description: Alias for request.path. See documentation for table request above.
session.query_params
- Description: Alias for request.query_params. See documentation for table request above.
session.filename
- Description: Alias for request.filename. See documentation for table request above.
session.subnet
- Description: Alias for request.subnet. See documentation for table request above.
session.host
- Description: ID of the currently selected host for the session.
- Type: string or nil
- Example: 'host1'
session.id
- Description: ID of the session.
- Type: string
- Example: '8eb2c1bdc106-17d2ff-00000000'
session.session_type
- Description: Type of the session.
- Type: string
- Example: 'initial' or 'instream'. Identical to the value of the Type argument of the session translation function.
session.is_managed
- Description: Identifies managed sessions.
- Type: boolean
- Example: true if Type/session.session_type is 'instream'

`request_headers`

Contains the headers from the request between the client and the router, keyed by name.

Usage example:

print(request_headers['User-Agent'])

`request_query_params`

Contains the query parameters from the request between the client and the router, keyed by name.

Usage example:

print(request_query_params.a)

`session_query_params`

Alias for metatable request_query_params.

`response`

Contains data related to the outgoing response apart from the headers.

response.body
- Description: HTTP response body string.
- Type: string or nil
- Example: '{"foo": "bar"}'
response.code
- Description: HTTP response status code.
- Type: integer
- Example: 200, 404
response.text
- Description: HTTP response status text.
- Type: string
- Example: 'OK', 'Not found'
response.major_version
- Description: Major HTTP version such as x in HTTP/x.1.
- Type: integer
- Example: 1
response.minor_version
- Description: Minor HTTP version such as x in HTTP/1.x.
- Type: integer
- Example: 1
response.protocol
- Description: Transfer protocol variant.
- Type: string
- Example: 'HTTP', 'HTTPS'

`response_headers`

Contains the response headers keyed by name.

Usage example:

print(response_headers['User-Agent'])

1.6.7.5.3 - Request Translation Function

Instructions for how to write a function to modify incoming requests before routing decisions are being made.

Specifies the body of a Lua function that inspects every incoming HTTP request and overwrites individual fields before further processing by the router.

Returns nil when nothing is to be changed, or HTTPRequest(t) where t is a table with any of the following optional fields:

Method
- Description: Replaces the HTTP request method in the request being processed.
- Type: string
- Example: 'GET', 'POST'
Path
- Description: Replaces the request path in the request being processed.
- Type: string
- Example: '/mycontent/superman.m3u8'
ClientIp
- Description: Replaces client IP address in the request being processed.
- Type: string
- Example: '172.16.238.128'
Body
- Description: Replaces body in the request being processed.
- Type: string or nil
- Example: '{"foo": "bar"}'
QueryParameters
- Description: Adds, removes or replaces individual query parameters in the request being processed.
- Type: nested table (indexed by number) representing an array of query parameters as {[1]='Name',[2]='Value'} pairs that are added to the request being processed, or overwriting existing query parameters with colliding names. To remove a query parameter from the request, specify nil as value, i.e. QueryParameters={..., {[1]='foo',[2]=nil} ...}. Returning a query parameter with a name but no value, such as a in the request '/index.m3u8?a&b=22' is currently not supported.
Headers
- Description: Adds, removes or replaces individual headers in the request being processed.
- Type: nested table (indexed by number) representing an array of request headers as {[1]='Name',[2]='Value'} pairs that are added to the request being processed, or overwriting existing request headers with colliding names. To remove a header from the request, specify nil as value, i.e. Headers={..., {[1]='foo',[2]=nil} ...}. Duplicate names are supported. A multi-value header such as Foo: bar1,bar2 is defined by specifying Headers={..., {[1]='foo',[2]='bar1'}, {[1]='foo',[2]='bar2'}, ...}.
OutgoingRequest: See Sending HTTP requests from translation functions for more information.

Example of a request_translation_function body that sets the request path to a hardcoded value and adds the hardcoded query parameter a=b:

-- Statements go here
print('Setting hardcoded Path and QueryParameters')
return HTTPRequest({
  Path = '/content.mpd',
  QueryParameters = {
    {'a','b'}
  }
})

Arguments

The following (iterable) arguments will be known by the function:

`QueryParameters`

Type: nested table (indexed by number).
Description: Array of query parameters as {[1]='Name',[2]='Value'} pairs that were present in the query string of the request. Format identical to the HTTPRequest.QueryParameters-field specified for the return value above.

Example usage:

for _, queryParam in pairs(QueryParameters) do
  print(queryParam[1]..'='..queryParam[2])
end

`Headers`

Type: nested table (indexed by number).
Description: Array of request headers as {[1]='Name',[2]='Value'} pairs that were present in the request. Format identical to the HTTPRequest.Headers-field specified for the return value above. A multi-value header such as Foo: bar1,bar2 is seen in request_translation_function as Headers={..., {[1]='foo',[2]='bar1'}, {[1]='foo',[2]='bar1'}, ...}.

Example usage:

for _, header in pairs(Headers) do
  print(header[1]..'='..header[2])
end

Additional Data

In addition to the arguments above, the following Lua tables, documented in Global Lua Tables, provide additional data that is available when executing the request translation function:

If the request translation function modifies the request, the request, request_query_params and request_headers tables will be updated with the modified request and made available to the routing rules.

1.6.7.5.4 - Session Translation Function

Instructions for how to write a function to modify a client session to affect how it is handled by the router.

Specifies the body of a Lua function that inspects a newly created session and may override its suggested type from “initial” to “instream” or vice versa. A number of helper functions are provided to simplify changing the session type.

Returns nil when the session type is to remain unchanged, or Session(t) where t is a table with a single field:

Type
- Description: New type of the session.
- Type: string
- Example: 'instream', 'initial'
OutgoingRequest: See Sending HTTP requests from translation functions for more information.

Basic Configuration

It is possible to configure the maximum number of simultaneous managed sessions on the router. If the maximum number is reached, no more managed sessions can be created. Using confcli, it can be configured by running

$ confcli services.routing.tuning.general.maxActiveManagedSessions
{
    "maxActiveManagedSessions": 1000
}
$ confcli services.routing.tuning.general.maxActiveManagedSessions 900
services.routing.tuning.general.maxActiveManagedSessions = 900

Common Arguments

While executing the session translation function, the following arguments are available:

Type: The current type of the session ('instream' or 'initial').

Usage examples:

-- Flip session type
local newType = 'initial'
if Type == 'initial' then
    newType = 'instream'
end
print('Changing session type from ' .. Type .. ' to ' .. newType)
return Session({['Type'] = newType})

Session Translation Helper Functions

The standard Lua library prodives four helper functions to simplify the configuration of the session translation function:

`set_session_type(session_type)`

This function will set the session type to the supplied session_type and the maximum number of sessions of that type has not been reached.

Parameters

session_type: The type of session to create, possible values are ‘initial’ or ‘instream’.

Usage Examples

return set_session_type('instream')
return set_session_type('initial')

`set_session_type_if_in_group(session_type, session_group)`

This function will set the session type to the supplied session_type if the session is part of session_group and the maximum number of sessions of that type has not been reached.

Parameters

session_type: The type of session to create, possible values are ‘initial’ or ‘instream’.
session_group: The name of the session group.

Usage Examples

return set_session_type_if_in_group('instream', 'sg1')

`set_session_type_if_in_all_groups(session_type, session_groups)`

This function will set the session type to the supplied session_type if the session is part of all session groups given by session_groups and the maximum number of sessions of that type has not been reached.

Parameters

session_type: The type of session to create, possible values are ‘initial’ or ‘instream’.
session_groups: A list of session group names.

Usage Examples

return set_session_type_if_in_all_groups('instream', {'sg1', 'sg2'})

`set_session_type_if_in_any_group(session_type)`

This function will set the session type to the supplied session_type if the session is part of one or more of the session groups given by session_groups and the maximum number of sessions of that type has not been reached.

Parameters

session_type: The type of session to create, possible values are ‘initial’ or ‘instream’.
session_groups: A list of session group names.

Usage Examples

return set_session_type_if_in_any_group('instream', {'sg1', 'sg2'})

Configuration

Using confcli, example of how the functions above can be used in the session translation function can be configured by running any of

$ confcli services.routing.translationFunctions.session "return set_session_type('instream')"
services.routing.translationFunctions.session = "return set_session_type('instream')"

$ confcli services.routing.translationFunctions.session "return set_session_type_if_in_group('instream', 'sg1')"
services.routing.translationFunctions.session = "return set_session_type_if_in_group('instream', 'sg1')"

$ confcli services.routing.translationFunctions.session "return set_session_type_if_in_all_groups('instream', {'sg1', 'sg2'})"
services.routing.translationFunctions.session = "return set_session_type_if_in_all_groups('instream', {'sg1', 'sg2'})"

$ confcli services.routing.translationFunctions.session "return set_session_type_if_in_any_group('instream', {'sg1', 'sg2'})"
services.routing.translationFunctions.session = "return set_session_type_if_in_any_group('instream', {'sg1', 'sg2'})"

Additional Data

In addition to the arguments above, the following Lua tables, documented in Global Lua Tables, provide additional data that is available when executing the response translation function:

The selection_input table will not change while a routing request is handled. A request_translation_function and the corresponding response_translation_function will see the same selection_input table, even if the selection data is updated while the request is being handled.

1.6.7.5.5 - Host Request Translation Function

Instructions on how to write a function to modify requests that are sent to hosts.

The host request translation function defines a Lua function that modifies HTTP requests sent to a host. These hosts are configured in services.routing.hostGroups.

Hosts can receive requests for a manifest. A regular host will respond with the manifest itself, while a redirecting host and a DNS host will respond with a redirection to a streamer. This function can modify all these types of requests.

The function returns nil when nothing is to be changed, or HTTPRequest(t) where t is a table with any of the following optional fields:

Method
- Description: Replaces the HTTP request method in the request being processed.
- Type: string
- Example: 'GET', 'POST'
Path
- Description: Replaces the request path in the request being processed.
- Type: string
- Example: '/mycontent/superman.m3u8'
Body
- Description: Replaces body in the request being processed.
- Type: string or nil
- Example: '{"foo": "bar"}'
QueryParameters
- Description: Adds, removes or replaces individual query parameters in the request being processed.
- Type: nested table (indexed by number) representing an array of query parameters as {[1]='Name',[2]='Value'} pairs that are added to the request being processed, or overwriting existing query parameters with colliding names. To remove a query parameter from the request, specify nil as value, i.e. QueryParameters={..., {[1]='foo',[2]=nil} ...}. Returning a query parameter with a name but no value, such as a in the request '/index.m3u8?a&b=22' is currently not supported.
Headers
- Description: Adds, removes or replaces individual headers in the request being processed.
- Type: nested table (indexed by number) representing an array of request headers as {[1]='Name',[2]='Value'} pairs that are added to the request being processed, or overwriting existing request headers with colliding names. To remove a header from the request, specify nil as value, i.e. Headers={..., {[1]='foo',[2]=nil} ...}. Duplicate names are supported. A multi-value header such as Foo: bar1,bar2 is defined by specifying Headers={..., {[1]='foo',[2]='bar1'}, {[1]='foo',[2]='bar2'}, ...}.
Host
- Description: Replaces the host that the request is sent to.
- Type: string
- Example: 'new-host.example.com', '192.0.2.7'
Port
- Description: Replaces the TCP port that the request is sent to.
- Type: number
- Example: 8081
Protocol
- Description: Decides which protocol that will be used for sending the request. Valid protocols are 'HTTP' and 'HTTPS'.
- Type: string
- Example: 'HTTP', 'HTTPS'
OutgoingRequest: See Sending HTTP requests from translation functions for more information.

Example of a host_request_translation_function body that sets the request path to a hardcoded value and adds the hardcoded query parameter a=b:

-- Statements go here
print('Setting hardcoded Path and QueryParameters')
return HTTPRequest({
  Path = '/content.mpd',
  QueryParameters = {
    {'a','b'}
  }
})

Arguments

The following (iterable) arguments will be known by the function:

`QueryParameters`

Type: nested table (indexed by number).
Description: Array of query parameters as {[1]='Name',[2]='Value'} pairs that are present in the query string of the request from the client to the router. Format identical to the HTTPRequest.QueryParameters-field specified for the return value above.

Example usage:

for _, queryParam in pairs(QueryParameters) do
  print(queryParam[1]..'='..queryParam[2])
end

`Headers`

Type: nested table (indexed by number).
Description: Array of request headers as {[1]='Name',[2]='Value'} pairs that are present in the request from the client to the router. Format identical to the HTTPRequest.Headers-field specified for the return value above. A multi-value header such as Foo: bar1,bar2 is seen in host_request_translation_function as Headers={..., {[1]='foo',[2]='bar1'}, {[1]='foo',[2]='bar1'}, ...}.

Example usage:

for _, header in pairs(Headers) do
  print(header[1]..'='..header[2])
end

Global Tables

The following non-iterable global tables are available for use by the host_request_translation_function.

Table `outgoing_request`

The outgoing_request table contains the request that is to be sent to the host.

outgoing_request.method
- Description: HTTP request method.
- Type: string
- Example: 'GET', 'POST'
outgoing_request.body
- Description: HTTP request body string.
- Type: string or nil
- Example: '{"foo": "bar"}'
outgoing_request.major_version
- Description: Major HTTP version such as x in HTTP/x.1.
- Type: integer
- Example: 1
outgoing_request.minor_version
- Description: Minor HTTP version such as x in HTTP/1.x.
- Type: integer
- Example: 1
outgoing_request.protocol
- Description: Transfer protocol variant.
- Type: string
- Example: 'HTTP', 'HTTPS'

Table `outgoing_request_headers`

Contains the request headers from the request that is to be sent to the host, keyed by name.

Example:

print(outgoing_request_headers['X-Forwarded-For'])

Multiple values are separated with a comma.

Additional Data

In addition to the arguments above, the following Lua tables, documented in Global Lua Tables, provide additional data that is available when executing the request translation function:

1.6.7.5.6 - Response Translation Function

Instructions for how to write a function to modify outgoing responses after a routing decision has been made.

Specifies the body of a Lua function that inspects every outgoing HTTP response and overwrites individual fields before being sent to the client.

Returns nil when nothing is to be changed, or HTTPResponse(t) where t is a table with any of the following optional fields:

Code
- Description: Replaces status code in the response being sent.
- Type: integer
- Example: 200, 404
Text
- Description: Replaces status text in the response being sent.
- Type: string
- Example: 'OK', 'Not found'
MajorVersion
- Description: Replaces major HTTP version such as x in HTTP/x.1 in the response being sent.
- Type: integer
- Example: 1
MinorVersion
- Description: Replaces minor HTTP version such as x in HTTP/1.x in the response being sent.
- Type: integer
- Example: 1
Protocol
- Description: Replaces protocol in the response being sent.
- Type: string
- Example: 'HTTP', 'HTTPS'
Body
- Description: Replaces body in the response being sent.
- Type: string or nil
- Example: '{"foo": "bar"}'
Headers
- Description: Adds, removes or replaces individual headers in the response being sent.
- Type: nested table (indexed by number) representing an array of response headers as {[1]='Name',[2]='Value'} pairs that are added to the response being sent, or overwriting existing request headers with colliding names. To remove a header from the response, specify nil as value, i.e. Headers={..., {[1]='foo',[2]=nil} ...}. Duplicate names are supported. A multi-value header such as Foo: bar1,bar2 is defined by specifying Headers={..., {[1]='foo',[2]='bar1'}, {[1]='foo',[2]='bar2'}, ...}.
OutgoingRequest: See Sending HTTP requests from translation functions for more information.

Example of a response_translation_function body that sets the Location header to a hardcoded value:

-- Statements go here
print('Setting hardcoded Location')
return HTTPResponse({
  Headers = {
    {'Location', 'cdn1.com/content.mpd?a=b'}
  }
})

Arguments

The following (iterable) arguments will be known by the function:

`Headers`

Type: nested table (indexed by number).
Description: Array of response headers as {[1]='Name',[2]='Value'} pairs that are present in the response being sent. Format identical to the HTTPResponse.Headers-field specified for the return value above. A multi-value header such as Foo: bar1,bar2 is seen in response_translation_function as Headers={..., {[1]='foo',[2]='bar1'}, {[1]='foo',[2]='bar1'}, ...}.

Example usage:

for _, header in pairs(Headers) do
  print(header[1]..'='..header[2])
end

Additional Data

In addition to the arguments above, the following Lua tables, documented in Global Lua Tables, provide additional data that is available when executing the response translation function:

1.6.7.5.7 - Sending HTTP requests from translation functions

How to configure the Director to send HTTP requests from translation functions in Lua.

It is possible to configure all translation functions to send HTTP requests. If an outgoing request is sent in a translation function, the Director will delay the response to the incoming request until the outgoing request has been completed. Note that the response to the outgoing request is not handled by the Director, it only waits for the outgoing request to complete.

Requests can be sent from any translation function by defining the table OutgoingRequest in the translation function return value:

{
    OutgoingRequest = {
        Method = "HEAD",
        Protocol = "HTTP",
        Host = "example.com",
        Port = 8080,
        Path = "/example/path",
        EncodeURL = true,
        QueryParameters = {{"param1", "value1"}, {"param2", "value2"}},
        Headers = {{"x-header", "header-value"}, {"Authorization", "Basic dXNlcjpwYXNz"}}
    }
}

The following fields for OutgoingRequest are supported:

Method: The HTTP method to use. Defaults to HEAD.
Protocol: The protocol to use. Defaults to the protocol of the incoming request.
Host: The host to send the request to.
Port: The port to send the request to. Defaults to 80 if Protocol is HTTP and 443 if Protocol is HTTPS.
Path: The path to send the request to. Defaults to /.
EncodeURL: A boolean value that determines if the URL should be percent-encoded. Defaults to true. WARNING: Not encoding the URL is not HTTP compliant and might cause issues with some servers. Use with caution. See RFC 1738 for more information.
QueryParameters: A list of query parameters to include in the request. Note that the query parameters are defined as two-element lists in Lua.
Headers: A Lua table of headers to include in the request. Note that if the header name contains a dash -, it must be defined as a two-element list as seen in the example above.
Body: A string containing the body of the request. If this field is not defined, no body will be included in the request. If it is defined, the Content-Length header, with the length of the body, will be added to the request.

All fields except Host are optional.

Using the example above, the following response translation function will make the Director can send a GET request to http://example.com:8080/example/path?param1=value1&param2=value2 with the headers x-header: x-value and Authorization: Basic dXNlcjpwYXNz:

return HTTPResponse({
    OutgoingRequest = {
        Method = "HEAD",
        Protocol = "HTTP",
        Host = "example.com",
        Port = 8080,
        Path = "/example/path",
        QueryParameters = {{"param1", "value1"}, {"param2", "value2"}},
        Headers = {{"x-header", "x-value"}, {"Authorization", "Basic dXNlcjpwYXNz"}}
    }
})

Using log level 4, the outgoing request can be seen in the Director logs:

DEBUG orc-re-work-0 AsyncRequestSender: Sending request: url=http://example.com/example/path?param1=value1&param2=value2
DEBUG orc-re-work-0 CDNManager: OutboundContentConn: example.com:8080: Connecting to target CDN example.com:8080
DEBUG orc-re-work-0 ClientConn: 192.168.103.16/28:60201/https: Sent a Lua request: outstanding-requests=1
DEBUG orc-re-work-0 CDNManager: OutboundContentConn: example.com:8080: Target CDN connection established.
DEBUG orc-re-work-0 CDNManager: OutboundContentConn: example.com:8080: Sending request to target CDN:
GET /example/path?param1=value1&param2=value2 HTTP/1.0
Authorization: Basic dXNlcjpwYXNz
Host: example.com:8080
x-header: x-value

1.6.8 - Trusted proxies

How to configure trusted proxies to control proxied connections

When a request with the header X-Forwarded-For is sent to the router, the router will check if the client is in the list of trusted proxies. If the client is not a trusted proxy, the router will drop the connection, returning an empty reply to the client. If the client is a trusted proxy, the IP address defined in the X-Forwarded-For will be regarded as the client’s IP address.

The list of trusted proxies can be configured by modifying the configuration field services.routing.settings.trustedProxies with the IP addresses of trusted proxies:

$ confcli services.routing.settings.trustedProxies -w
Running wizard for resource 'trustedProxies'
<A list of IP addresses from which the proxy IP address of requests with the X-Forwarded-For header defined are checked. If the IP isn't in this list, the connection is dropped. (default: [])>

Hint: Hitting return will set a value to its default.
Enter '?' to receive the help string

trustedProxies <A list of IP addresses from which the proxy IP address of requests with the X-Forwarded-For header defined are checked. If the IP isn't in this list, the connection is dropped. (default: [])>: [
  trustedProxy (default: ): 1.2.3.4
  Add another 'trustedProxy' element to array 'trustedProxies'? [y/N]: n
]
Generated config:
{
  "trustedProxies": [
    "1.2.3.4"
  ]
}
Merge and apply the config? [y/n]: y

Note that by configuring 0.0.0.0/0 as a trusted proxy, all proxied requests will be trusted.

1.6.9 - Confd Auto Upgrade Tool

Applying automatic configuration migrations

The confd-auto-upgrade tool is a simple utility to automatically migrate the confd configuration schema between different versions of the Director. Starting with version 1.12.0, it is possible to automatically apply the necessary configuration changes in a controlled and predictable manner. While this tool is intended to help transition the configuration format between the different versions, it is not a substitute for proper backups, and while downgrading to an earlier version, it may not be possible to recover previously modified or deleted configuration values.

When using the tool, both the “from” and “to” versions must be specified. Internally, the tool will calculate a list of migrations which must be applied to transition between the given versions, and apply them, outputting the final configuration to standard output. The current configuration can either be piped in to the tool via standard input, or supplied as a static file. Providing a “from” version which is later than the “to” version will result in the downgrade migrations being applied in reverse order, effectively downgrading the configuration to the lower version.

For convenience, the tool is deployed to the ACD Nodes automatically at install time as a standard Podman container, however since it is not intended to run as a service, only the image will be present, not a running container.

Performing the Upgrade

In the following example scenario, a system with version 1.10.1 has been upgraded to 1.14.0. Before upgrading a backup of the configuration was taken and saved to current_config.json.

Using the image and tag as determined in the above section. Issue the following command:

cat current_config.json | \
  podman run -i --rm images.edgeware.tv/acd-confd-migration:1.14.0 \
  --in - --from 1.10.1 --to 1.14.0 \
  | tee upgraded_config.json

In the above example, the updated configuration is saved to upgraded_config.json. It is recommended to manually verify the generated configuration, and after which apply the config to confd by using cat upgraded_config.json | confcli -i.

It is also possible to combine the two commands, by piping the output of the auto-upgrade tool directly to confcli -i. E.g.

cat current_config.json | podman run ... | tee upgraded_config.json | confcli -i

This will save a backup of the upgraded configuration to upgraded_config.json and at the same time apply the changes to confd immediately.

Downgrading the Configuration

The steps for downgrading the configuration are exactly the same as for upgrade except for the --from and --to versions should be swapped. E.g. --from 1.14.0 --to 1.10.1. Keep in mind however, that during an upgrade some configuration properties may have been deleted or modified, and while downgrading over those steps, some data loss may occur. In those cases, it may be easier and safer to simply restore from backup. In most cases where configuration properties are removed during upgrade, the corresponding downgrade will simply restore the default values of those properties.

1.7 - Operations

Operators Guide

This guide describes how to perform day-to-day operations of the ACD Router and its associated services, collectively known as the Director.

Component Overview

To effectively operate the Director software, it is important to understand the composition of the various software components and how they are deployed.

Each Director instance functions as an independent system, comprising multiple containerized services. These containers are managed by a standard container runtime and are seamlessly integrated with the host’s operating system to enhance the overall operator experience.

The containers are managed by the Podman container runtime, which operates without additional daemon services running on the host. Unlike Docker, Podman manages each container as a separate process, eliminating the reliance on a shared daemon and mitigating the risk of a single-point-of-failure scenario.

Although several distinct services make up the Director, the primary component is the router. The router is responsible for listening for incoming requests, processing the request, and redirecting the client to the appropriate host, or CDN to deliver the requested content.

Two additional containers are responsible for configuration management. Those are confd and confd-transformer. The former manages a local database of configuration metadata and provides a REST API for managing the configuration. The confd-transformer simply listens for configuration changes from confd and adapts that configuration to a format suitable for the router to ingest. For additional information about setting up and using confd see here..

The next two components, the edns-proxy and the convoy-bridge allow the router to communicate with an EDNS server for EDNS-based routing, and with synchronization with Convoy respectively. Additional information about the EDNS-Proxy is available here.. For the Convoy Bridge service see here..

The remaining containers are useful for metrics, monitoring, and alerting. These include prometheus and grafana for monitoring and analytics, and alertmanager for monitoring and alarms.

1.7.1 - Services

Starting / Stopping / Monitoring Services

Each container shipped with the Director is fully-integrated with the systemd service on the host, enabling easy management using standard systemd commands. The logs for each container are also full-integrated with journald to simplify troubleshooting.

In order to integrate the Podman containers with systemd, a common prefix of acd- has been applied to each service name. For example the router container is managed by the service acd-router, and the confd container is managed by the service acd-confd. These same prefixed names apply while fetching logs via journald. This common prefix aids in grouping the related services as well as provides simpler filtering for tab-completion.

Starting / Stopping Services

Standard systemd commands should be used to start and stop the services.

systemctl start acd-router - Starts the router container.
systemctl stop acd-router - Stops the router container.
systemctl status acd-router - Displays the status of the router container.

Due to the limitation of needing the acd- prefix, it provides the ability to work with all ACD services in a group. For example:

systemctl status 'acd-*' - Display the status of all installed ACD components.
systemctl start 'acd-*' - Start all ACD components.

Logging

Each ACD component corresponds to a journal entry with the same unit name, with the acd- prefix. Standard journald commands can be used to view and manage the logging.

journalctl -u acd-router - Display the logs for the router container

Access Log

Refer to Access Logging.

Troubleshooting

Some additional logging may be available in the filesystem, the paths of which can be determined by executing the ew-sysinfo command. See Diagnostics. for additional details.

1.7.2 - Geographic Databases

Managing Geographic Databases

To do geographic based routing, the Director uses geographic location databases. The databases need to be on the format provided by MaxMind.

When first installed, the Director comes with example databases. These are only suitable for testing and evaluation, if geographic routing is to be used in production, proper databases need to be obtained from MaxMind.

For the Director to find them, each database needs to have a specific filename. Three databases are supported:

Type	Filename
City and Country	/opt/edgeware/acd/geoip2/GeoIP2-City.mmdb
ASN	/opt/edgeware/acd/geoip2/GeoLite2-ASN.mmdb
Anonymous IP	/opt/edgeware/acd/geoip2/GeoIP2-Anonymous-IP.mmdb

When updating the database files, the new file is copied over the old file. After that the Director has to be told to reload it. This is done by typing the following:

podman kill --signal HUP router

1.8 - Convoy Bridge

Convoy Bridge Integration

The convoy-bridge is an optional integration service, pre-installed alongside the router which provides two-way communication between the router and a separate Convoy installation.

The convoy-bridge is designed to allow the Convoy account metadata to be available from within the router for such use-cases as inserting the account specific prefixes in the redirect URL and validating per-account internal security tokens. The service works by periodically polling the Convoy server for changes to the configuration, and when detected, the relevant configuration information is pushed to the router.

In addition, the convoy-bridge has the ability to integrate the router with the Convoy analytics service, such that client sessions started by the router are properly collected by Convoy, and are available in the dashboards.

Configuration

The convoy-bridge service is configured using confcli on the router host. All configuration for the convoy-bridge exists under the path integration.convoy.bridge.

{
  "logLevel": "info",
  "accounts": {
    "enabled": true,
    "dbUrl": "mysql://convoy:eith7jee@convoy:3306",
    "dbPollInterval": 60
  },
  "analytics": {
    "enabled": true,
    "brokers": ["broker1:9092", "broker2:9092"],
    "batchInterval": 10,
    "maxBatchSize": 500
  },
  "otherRouters": [
    {
      "url": "https://router2:5001",
      "apiKey": "key1",
      "validateCerts": true
    }
  ]
}

In the above configuration block, there are three main sections. The accounts section enables fetching account metadata from Convoy towards the router. The analytics section controls the integration between the router and the Convoy analytics service. The otherRouters section is used to synchronize additional router instances. The local router instance will always be implicitly included. Additional routers listed in this section will be handled by this instance of the convoy-bridge service.

Logging

The logs are available in the system journal and can be viewed using:

journalctl -u acd-convoy-bridge

1.9 - Monitoring

Monitoring

1.9.1 - Access logging

Where to find access logs and how to configure acccess log rotation

Access logging is activated by default and can be enabled/disabled by running

$ confcli services.routing.tuning.general.accessLog true
$ confcli services.routing.tuning.general.accessLog false

Requests are logged in the combined log format and can be found at /var/log/acd-router/access.log. Additionally, the symbolic link /opt/edgeware/acd/router/log points to /var/log/acd-router, allowing the access logs to also be found at /opt/edgeware/acd/router/log/access.log.

Example Output

$ cat /var/log/acd-router/access.log
May 29 07:20:00 router[52236]: ::1 - - [29/May/2023:07:20:00 +0000] "GET /vod/batman.m3u8 HTTP/1.1" 302 0 "-" "curl/7.61.1"

Access Log Rotation

Access logs are rotated and compressed once the access log file reaches a size of 100 MB. By default, 10 rotated logs are stored before being rotated out. These rotation parameters can be reconfigured by editing the lines

size 100M
rotate 10

in /etc/logrotate.d/acd-router-access-log. For more log rotation configuration possibilites, refer to the Logrotate documentation.

1.9.2 - System troubleshooting

Using ew-sysinfo to monitor and troubleshoot ESB3024

ESB3024 contains the tool ew-sysinfo that gives an overview of how the system is doing. Simply use the command and the tool will output information about the system and the installed ESB3024 services.

The output format can be changed using the --format flag, possible values are human (default) and json, e.g.:

$ ew-sysinfo
system:
   os: ['5.4.17-2136.321.4.el8uek.x86_64', 'Oracle Linux Server 8.8']
   cpu_cores: 2
   cpu_load_average: [0.03, 0.03, 0.0]
   memory_usage: 478 MB
   memory_load_average: [0.03, 0.03, 0.0]
   boot_time: 2023-09-08T08:30:57Z
   uptime: 6 days, 3:43:44.640665
   processes: 122
   open_sockets:
      ipv4: 12
      ipv6: 18
      ip_total: 30
      tcp_over_ipv4: 9
      tcp_over_ipv6: 16
      tcp_total: 25
      udp_over_ipv4: 3
      udp_over_ipv6: 2
      udp_total: 5
      total: 145
system_disk (/):
   total: 33271 MB
   used: 7978 MB (24.00%)
   free: 25293 MB
journal_disk (/run/log/journal):
   total: 1954 MB
   used: 217 MB (11.10%)
   free: 1736 MB
vulnerabilities:
   meltdown: Mitigation: PTI
   spectre_v1: Mitigation: usercopy/swapgs barriers and __user pointer sanitization
   spectre_v2: Mitigation: Retpolines, STIBP: disabled, RSB filling, PBRSB-eIBRS: Not affected
processes:
   orc-re:
      pid: 177199
      status: sleeping
      cpu_usage_percent: 1.0%
      cpu_load_average: 131.11%
      memory_usage: 14 MB (0.38%)
      num_threads: 10
hints:
   get_raw_router_config: cat /opt/edgeware/acd/router/cache/config.json
   get_confd_config: cat /opt/edgeware/acd/confd/store/__active
   get_router_logs: journalctl -u acd-router
   get_edns_proxy_logs: journalctl -u acd-edns-proxy
   check_firewall_status: systemctl status firewalld
   check_firewall_config: iptables -nvL

# For --format=json, it's recommended to pipe the output to a JSON interpreter
# such as jq

$ ew-sysinfo --format=json | jq
{
  "system": {
    "os": [
      "5.4.17-2136.321.4.el8uek.x86_64",
      "Oracle Linux Server 8.8"
    ],
    "cpu_cores": 2,
    "cpu_load_average": [
      0.01,
      0.0,
      0.0
    ],
    "memory_usage": "479 MB",
    "memory_load_average": [
      0.01,
      0.0,
      0.0
    ],
    "boot_time": "2023-09-08 08:30:57",
    "uptime": "6 days, 5:12:24.617114",
    "processes": 123,
    "open_sockets": {
      "ipv4": 13,
      "ipv6": 18,
      "ip_total": 31,
      "tcp_over_ipv4": 10,
      "tcp_over_ipv6": 16,
      "tcp_total": 26,
      "udp_over_ipv4": 3,
      "udp_over_ipv6": 2,
      "udp_total": 5,
      "total": 146
    }
  },
  "system_disk (/)": {
    "total": "33271 MB",
    "used": "7977 MB (24.00%)",
    "free": "25293 MB"
  },
  "journal_disk (/run/log/journal)": {
    "total": "1954 MB",
    "used": "225 MB (11.50%)",
    "free": "1728 MB"
  },
  "vulnerabilities": {
    "meltdown": "Mitigation: PTI",
    "spectre_v1": "Mitigation: usercopy/swapgs barriers and __user pointer sanitization",
    "spectre_v2": "Mitigation: Retpolines, STIBP: disabled, RSB filling, PBRSB-eIBRS: Not affected"
  },
  "processes": {
    "orc-re": {
      "pid": 177199,
      "status": "sleeping",
      "cpu_usage_percent": "0.0%",
      "cpu_load_average": "137.63%",
      "memory_usage": "14 MB (0.38%)",
      "num_threads": 10
    }
  }
}

Note that your system might have different monitored processes and field names.

The field hints is different from the rest. It lists common commands that can be used to further monitor system performance, useful for quickly troubleshooting a faulty system.

1.9.3 - Scraping data with Prometheus

Prometheus is a third-party data scraper which is installed as a containerized service in the default installation of ESB3024 Router. It periodically reads metrics data from different services, such as acd-router, aggregates it and makes it available to other services that visualize the data. Those services include Grafana and Alertmanager.

The Prometheus configuration file can be found on the host at /opt/edgeware/acd/prometheus/prometheus.yaml.

Accessing Prometheus

Prometheus has a web interface that is listening for HTTP connections on port 9090. There is no authentication, so anyone who has access to the host that is running Prometheus can access the interface.

Starting / Stopping Prometheus

After the service is configured, it can be managed via systemd, under the service unit acd-prometheus.

systemctl start acd-prometheus

Logging

The container logs are automatically published to the system journal, under the same unit descriptor, and can be viewed using journalctl

journalctl -u acd-prometheus

1.9.4 - Visualizing data with Grafana

1.9.4.1 - Managing Grafana

Grafana displays graphs based on data from Prometheus. A default deployment of Grafana is running in a container alongside ESB3024 Router.

Grafana’s configuration and runtime files are stored under /opt/edgeware/acd/grafana. It comes with default dashboards that are documented at Grafana dashboards.

Accessing Grafana

Grafana’s web interface is listening for HTTP connections on port 3000. It has two default accounts, edgeware and admin.

The edgeware account can only view graphs, while the admin account can also edit graphs. The accounts with default passwords are shown in the table below.

Account	Default password
`edgeware`	`edgeware`
`admin`	`edgeware`

Starting / Stopping Grafana

Grafana can be managed via systemd, under the service unit acd-grafana.

systemctl start acd-grafana

Logging

The container logs are automatically published to the system journal, under the same unit descriptor, and can be viewed using journalctl

journalctl -u acd-grafana

1.9.4.2 - Grafana Dashboards

Dashboards in default Grafana installation

Grafana will be populated with pre-configured graphs which present some metrics on a time scale. Below is a comprehensive list of those dashboards, along with short descriptions.

Router Monitoring dashboard

This dashboard is by default set as home directory - it’s what user will see after logging in.

Number Of Initial Routing Decisions

HTTP Status Codes

Total number of responses sent back to incoming requests, shown by their status codes. Metric: client-response-status

Incoming HTTP and HTTPS Requests

Total number of incoming requests that were deemed valid, divided into SSL and Unencrypted categories. Metric: num_valid_http_requests

Debugging Information dashboard

Number of Lua Exceptions

Number of exceptions encountered so far while evaluating Lua rules. Metric: lua_num_errors

Number of Lua Contexts

Number of active Lua interpreters, both running and idle. Metric: lua_num_evaluators

Time Spent In Lua

Number of microseconds the Lua interpreters were running. Metric: lua_time_spent

Router Latencies

Histogram-like graph showing how many responses were sent within the given latency interval. Metric: orc_latency_bucket

Internal debugging

A folder that contains dashboards intended for internal use.

ACD: Incoming Internet Connections dashboard

SSL Warnings

Rate of warnings logged during TLS connections Metric: num_ssl_warnings_total

SSL Errors

Rate of errors logged during TLS connections Metric: num_ssl_errors_total

Valid Internet HTTPS Requests

Rate of incoming requests that were deemed valid, HTTPS only. Metric: num_valid_http_requests

Invalid Internet HTTPS Requests

Rate of incoming requests that were deemed invalid, HTTPS only. Metric: num_invalid_http_requests

Valid Internet HTTP Requests

Rate of incoming requests that were deemed valid, HTTP only. Metric: num_valid_http_requests

Invalid Internet HTTP Requests

Rate of incoming requests that were deemed invalid, HTTP only. Metric: num_invalid_http_requests

Prometheus: ACD dashboard

Logged Warnings

Rate of logged warnings since the router has started, divided into CDN-related and CDN-unrelated. Metric: num_log_warnings_total

Logged Errors

Rate of logged errors since the router has started. Metric: num_log_errors_total

HTTP Requests

Rate of responses sent to incoming connections. Metric: orc_latency_count

Number Of Active Sessions

Number of sessions opened on router that are still active. Metric: num_sessions

Total Number Of Sessions

Total number of sessions opened on router. Metric: num_sessions

Session Type Counts (Non-Stacked)

Number of active sessions divided by type; see metric documentation linked below for up-to-date list of types. Metric: num_sessions

Prometheus/ACD: Subrunners

Client Connections

Number of currently open client connections per subrunner. Metric: subrunner_client_conns

Asynchronous Queues (Current)

Number of queued events per subrunner, roughly corresponding to load. Metric: subrunner_async_queue

Used <Send/receive> Data Blocks

Number of send or receive data blocks currently in use per subrunner, as decided by the “Send/receive” drop down box. Metric: subrunner_used_send_data_blocks and subrunner_used_receive_data_blocks

Asynchronous Queues (Max)

Maximum number of events waiting in queue. Metric: subrunner_max_async_queue

Total <Send/receive> Data Blocks

Number of send or receive data blocks allocated per subrunner, as decided by the “Send/receive” drop down box. Metric: subrunner_total_send_data_blocks and subrunner_total_receive_data_blocks

Low Queue (Current)

Number of low priority events queued per subrunner. Metric: subrunner_low_queue

Medium Queue (Current)

Number of medium priority events queued per subrunner. Metric: subrunner_medium_queue

High Queue (Current)

Number of high priority events queued per subrunner. Metric: subrunner_high_queue

Low Queue (Max)

Maximum number of events waiting in low priority queue. Metric: subrunner_max_low_queue

Medium Queue (Max)

Maximum number of events waiting in medium priority queue. Metric: subrunner_max_medium_queue

High Queue (Max)

Maximum number of events waiting in high priority queue. Metric: subrunner_max_high_queue

Wakeups

The number of times a subrunner has been waken up from sleep. Metric: subrunner_io_wakeups

Overloaded

The number of times the number of queued events for a subrunner exceeded its maximum. Metric: subrunner_times_worker_overloaded

Autopause

Number of sockets that have been automatically paused. This happens when the work manager is under heavy load. Metric: subrunner_io_autopause_sockets

1.9.5 - Alarms and Alerting

Configuring alarms and alerting

Alerts are generated by the third-party service Prometheus, which sends them to the Alertmanager service. A default containerized instance of Alertmanager is deployed alongside ESB3024 Router. Out of the box, Alertmanager ships with only a sample configuration file, and will require manual configuration prior to enabling the alerting functionality. Due to the many different possible configurations for how alerts are both detected and where they are pushed, the official Alertmanager documentation should be followed for how to configure the service.

The router ships with Alertmanager 0.25, the documentation for which can be found at prometheus.io. The Alertmanager configuration file can be found on the host at /opt/edgeware/acd/alertmanager/alertmanager.yml.

Accessing Alertmanager

Alertmanager has a web interface that is listening for HTTP connections on port 9093. There is no authentication, so anyone who has access to the host that is running Alertmanager can access the interface.

Starting / Stopping Alertmanager

After the service is configured, it can be managed via systemd, under the service unit acd-alertmanager.

systemctl start acd-alertmanager

Logging

The container logs are automatically published to the system journal, under the same unit descriptor, and can be viewed using journalctl

journalctl -u acd-alertmanager

1.9.6 - Monitoring multiple routers

By default an instance of Prometheus only monitors the ESB3024 Router that is installed on the same host as where Prometheus is installed. It is possible to make it monitor other router instances and visualize all instances on one Grafana instance.

Configuring of Prometheus

This is configured in the scraping configuration of Prometheus, which is found in the file /opt/edgeware/acd/prometheus/prometheus.yaml, which typically looks like this:

global:
  scrape_interval:     15s

rule_files:
  - recording-rules.yaml

# A scrape configuration for router metrics
scrape_configs:
  - job_name: 'router-scraper'
    scheme: https
    tls_config:
      insecure_skip_verify: true
    static_configs:
    - targets:
      - acd-router-1:5001
    metrics_path: /m1/v1/metrics
    honor_timestamps: true
  - job_name: 'edns-proxy-scraper'
    scheme: http
    static_configs:
    - targets:
      - acd-router-1:8888
    metrics_path: /metrics
    honor_timestamps: true

More routers can be added to the scrape configuration by simply adding more routers under targets in the scraper jobs.

For instance, to monitor acd-router-2 and acd-router-3 along acd-router-1, the configuration file needs to be modified like this:

global:
  scrape_interval:     15s

rule_files:
  - recording-rules.yaml

# A scrape configuration for router metrics
scrape_configs:
  - job_name: 'router-scraper'
    scheme: https
    tls_config:
      insecure_skip_verify: true
    static_configs:
    - targets:
      - acd-router-1:5001
      - acd-router-2:5001
      - acd-router-3:5001
    metrics_path: /m1/v1/metrics
    honor_timestamps: true
  - job_name: 'edns-proxy-scraper'
    scheme: http
    static_configs:
    - targets:
      - acd-router-1:8888
      - acd-router-2:8888
      - acd-router-3:8888
    metrics_path: /metrics
    honor_timestamps: true

After the file has been modified, Prometheus needs to be restarted by typing

systemctl restart acd-prometheus

It is possible to use the same configuration on multiple routers, so that all routers in a deployment can monitor each other.

Selecting Router in Grafana

In the top left corner the Grafana dashboards have a drop-down menu labeled “ACD Router”, which allows to choose which router to monitor.

1.9.7 - Routing Rule Evaluation Metrics

Node Visit counters

ESB3024 Router counts the number of times a node and any of its children is selected in the routing table.

The visit counters can be retrieved with the following end points:

`/v1/node_visits`

Returns visit counters for each node as a flat list of host:counter pairs in JSON.

Example output:

{
  "node1": "1",
  "node2": "1",
  "node3": "1",
  "top": "3"
}

`/v1/node_visits_graph`

Returns a full graph of nodes with their respective visit counters in GraphML.

Example output:

<?xml version="1.0"?>
<graphml xmlns="http://graphml.graphdrawing.org/xmlns"
xmlns:xsi="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema-instance"
xsi:schemaLocation="http://graphml.graphdrawing.org/xmlns
http://graphml.graphdrawing.org/xmlns/1.0/graphml.xsd">
  <key id="visits" for="node" attr.name="visits" attr.type="string" />
  <graph id="G" edgedefault="directed">
    <node id="routing_table">
      <data key="visits">5</data>
    </node>
    <node id="cdn1">
      <data key="visits">1</data>
    </node>
    <node id="node1">
      <data key="visits">1</data>
    </node>
    <node id="cdn2">
      <data key="visits">2</data>
    </node>
    <node id="node2">
      <data key="visits">2</data>
    </node>
    <node id="cdn3">
      <data key="visits">2</data>
    </node>
    <node id="node3">
      <data key="visits">2</data>
    </node>
    <edge id="e0" source="cdn1" target="node1" />
    <edge id="e1" source="routing_table" target="cdn1" />
    <edge id="e2" source="cdn2" target="node2" />
    <edge id="e3" source="routing_table" target="cdn2" />
    <edge id="e4" source="cdn3" target="node3" />
    <edge id="e5" source="routing_table" target="cdn3" />
  </graph>
</graphml>

To receive the graph as JSON, specify Accept:application/json in the request headers.

Example output:

{
  "edges": [
    {
      "source": "cdn1",
      "target": "node1"
    },
    {
      "source": "routing_table",
      "target": "cdn1"
    },
    {
      "source": "cdn2",
      "target": "node2"
    },
    {
      "source": "routing_table",
      "target": "cdn2"
    },
    {
      "source": "cdn3",
      "target": "node3"
    },
    {
      "source": "routing_table",
      "target": "cdn3"
    }
  ],
  "nodes": [
    {
      "id": "routing_table",
      "visits": "5"
    },
    {
      "id": "cdn1",
      "visits": "1"
    },
    {
      "id": "node1",
      "visits": "1"
    },
    {
      "id": "cdn2",
      "visits": "2"
    },
    {
      "id": "node2",
      "visits": "2"
    },
    {
      "id": "cdn3",
      "visits": "2"
    },
    {
      "id": "node3",
      "visits": "2"
    }
  ]
}

Resetting Visit Counters

A node visit counter with an id not matching any node id of a newly applied routing table is destroyed.

Reset all counters to zero by momentarily applying a configuration with a placeholder routing root node, that has unique id and an empty members list, e.g:

"routing": {
  "id": "empty_routing_table",
  "members": []
}

… and immediately reapply the desired configuration.

1.9.8 - Metrics

Metrics endpoint

ESB3024 Router collects a large number of metrics that can give insight into it’s condition at runtime. Those metrics are available in Prometheus’ text-based exposition format at endpoint :5001/m1/v1/metrics.

Below is the description of these metrics along with their labels.

`client_response_status`

Number of responses sent back to incoming requests.

Type: counter

`lua_num_errors`

Number of errors encountered when evaluating Lua rules.

Type: counter

`lua_num_evaluators`

Number of Lua rules evaluators (active interpreters).

Type: gauge

`lua_time_spent`

Time spent by running Lua evaluators, in microseconds.

Type: counter

`num_configuration_changes`

Number of times configuration has been changed since the router has started.

Type: counter

`num_endpoint_requests`

Number of requests redirected per CDN endpoint.

Type: counter
Labels:
- endpoint - CDN endpoint address.
- selector - whether the request was counted during initial or instream selection.

`num_invalid_http_requests`

Number of client requests that either use wrong method or wrong URL path. Also number of all requests that cannot be parsed as HTTP.

Type: counter
Labels:
- source - name of internal filter function that classified request as invalid. Probably not of much use outside debugging.
- type - whether the request was HTTP (Unencrypted) or HTTPS (SSL).

`num_log_errors_total`

Number of logged errors since the router has started.

Type: counter

`num_log_warnings_total`

Number of logged warnings since the router has started.

Type: counter

`num_managed_redirects`

Number of redirects to the router itself, which allows session management.

Type: counter

`num_manifests`

Number of cached manifests.

Type: gauge
Labels:
- count - state of manifest in cache, can be either lru, evicted or total.

`num_qoe_losses`

Number of “lost” QoE decisions per CDN.

Type: counter
Labels:
- cdn_id - ID of CDN that loose QoE battle.
- cdn_name - name of CDN that loose QoE battle.
- selector - whether the decision was taken during initial or instream selection.

`num_qoe_wins`

Number of “won” QoE decisions per CDN.

Type: counter
Labels:
- cdn_id - ID of CDN that won QoE battle.
- cdn_name - name of CDN that won QoE battle.
- selector - whether the decision was taken during initial or instream selection.

`num_rejected_requests`

Deprecated, should always be at 0.

Type: counter
Labels:
- selector - whether the request was counted during initial or instream selection.

`num_requests`

Total number of requests received by the router.

Type: counter
Labels:
- selector - whether the request was counted during initial or instream selection.

`num_sessions`

Number of sessions opened on router.

Type: gauge
Labels:
- state - either active or inactive.
- type - one of: initial, instream, qoe_on, qoe_off, qoe_agent or sp_agent.

`num_ssl_errors_total`

Number of all errors logged during TLS connections, both incoming and outgoing.

Type: counter

`num_ssl_warnings_total`

Number of all warnings logged during TLS connections, both incoming and outgoing.

Type: counter
Labels:
- category - which kind of TLS connection triggered the warning. Can be one of: cdn, content, generic, repeated_session or empty.

`num_unhandled_requests`

Number of requests for which no CDN could be found.

Type: counter
Labels:
- selector - whether the request was counted during initial or instream selection.

`num_unmanaged_redirects`

Number of redirects to “outside” the router - usually to CDN.

Type: counter
Labels:
- cdn_id - ID of CDN picked for redirection.
- cdn_name - name of CDN picked for redirection.
- selector - whether the redirect was result of initial or instream selection.

`num_valid_http_requests`

Number of received requests that were not deemed invalid, see num_invalid_http_requests.

Type: counter
Labels:
- source - name of internal filter function that classified request as invalid. Probably not of much use outside debugging.
- type - whether the request was HTTP (Unencrypted) or HTTPS (SSL).

`orc_latency_bucket`

Total number of responses sorted into “latency buckets” - labels denoting latency interval.

Type: counter
Labels:
- le - latency bucket that given response falls into.
- orc_status_code - HTTP status code of given response.

`orc_latency_count`

Total number of responses.

Type: counter
Labels:
- tls - whether the response was sent via SSL/TLS connection or not.
- orc_status_code - HTTP status code of given response.

`ssl_certificate_days_remaining`

Number of days until a SSL certificate expires.

Type: gauge
Labels:
- domain - the common name of the domain that the certificate authenticates.
- not_valid_after - the expiry time of the certificate.
- not_valid_before - when the certificate starts being valid.
- usable - if the certificate is usable to the router, see the ssl_certificate_usable_count metric for an explanation.

`ssl_certificate_usable_count`

Number of usable SSL certificates. A certificate is usable if it is valid and authenticates a domain name that points to the router.

Type: gauge

1.9.8.1 - Internal Metrics

Internal Metrics

A subrunner is an internal module of ESB3024 Router which handles routing requests. The subrunner metrics are technical and mainly of interest for AgileTV. These metrics will be briefly described here.

`subrunner_async_queue`

Number of queued events per subrunner, roughly corresponding to load.

Type: gauge
Labels:
- subrunner_id - ID of given subrunner.

`subrunner_client_conns`

Number of currently open client connections per subrunner.

Type: gauge
Labels:
- subrunner_id - ID of given subrunner.

`subrunner_high_queue`

Number of high priority events queued per subrunner.

Type: gauge
Labels:
- subrunner_id - ID of given subrunner.

`subrunner_io_autopause_sockets`

Number of sockets that have been automatically paused. This happens when the work manager is under heavy load.

Type: counter
Labels:
- subrunner_id - ID of given subrunner.

`subrunner_io_send_data_fast_attempts`

A fast data path was added that in many cases increases the performance of the router. This metric was added to verify that the fast data path is taken.

Type: counter
Labels:
- subrunner_id - ID of given subrunner.

`subrunner_io_wakeups`

The number of times a subrunner has been waken up from sleep.

Type: counter
Labels:
- subrunner_id - ID of given subrunner.

`subrunner_low_queue`

Number of low priority events queued per subrunner.

Type: gauge
Labels:
- subrunner_id - ID of given subrunner.

`subrunner_max_async_queue`

Maximum number of events waiting in queue.

Type: gauge
Labels:
- subrunner_id - ID of given subrunner.

`subrunner_max_high_queue`

Maximum number of events waiting in high priority queue.

Type: gauge
Labels:
- subrunner_id - ID of given subrunner.

`subrunner_max_low_queue`

Maximum number of events waiting in low priority queue.

Type: gauge
Labels:
- subrunner_id - ID of given subrunner.

`subrunner_max_medium_queue`

Maximum number of events waiting in medium priority queue.

Type: gauge
Labels:
- subrunner_id - ID of given subrunner.

`subrunner_medium_queue`

Number of medium priority events queued per subrunner.

Type: gauge
Labels:
- subrunner_id - ID of given subrunner.

`subrunner_times_worker_overloaded`

Number of times when queued events for given subrunner exceeded the tuning.overload_threshold value (defaults to 32).

Type: counter
Labels:
- subrunner_id - ID of given subrunner.

`subrunner_total_receive_data_blocks`

Number of receive data blocks allocated per subrunner.

Type: gauge
Labels:
- subrunner_id - ID of given subrunner.

`subrunner_total_send_data_blocks`

Number of send data blocks allocated per subrunner.

Type: gauge
Labels:
- subrunner_id - ID of given subrunner.

`subrunner_used_receive_data_blocks`

Number of receive data blocks currently in use per subrunner. Same as subrunner_total_receive_data_blocks.

Type: gauge
Labels:
- subrunner_id - ID of given subrunner.

`subrunner_used_send_data_blocks`

Number of send data blocks currently in use per subrunner. Same as subrunner_total_send_data_blocks.

Type: gauge
Labels:
- subrunner_id - ID of given subrunner.

1.10 - Releases

ESB3024 Router releases

1.10.1 - Release esb3024-1.22.0

Build date

2025-10-23

Release status

Type: production

Compatibility

This release has been tested with the following product versions:

AgileTV CDN Manager, ESB3027-1.4.0
Orbit, ESB2001-4.2.0 (see Known limitations below)
SW-Streamer, ESB3004-2.6.0
Convoy, ESB3006-3.6.1
Request Router, ESB3008-3.8.0

Breaking changes from previous release

Requires CDN Manager ESB3027-1.4.0
Does not work with older GUI versions (3.2.8 or older)
Lua hmac_sha256 function now returns a binary string [ESB3024-1245]

Change log

NEW: Add support for UTF-8 to configuration [ESB3024-489]
NEW: Add classifier type for HTTP headers [ESB3024-1177]
NEW: Make Lua hmac_sha256 function return a binary string [ESB3024-1245]
NEW: Limit which headers are forwarded to a host [ESB3024-1387]
NEW: Reload GeoIP databases without restarting the router service [ESB3024-1429]
NEW: [ANSSI-BP-028] System Settings - Network Configuration and Firewalls [ESB3024-1450]
NEW: [ANSSI-BP-028] System Settings - SELinux [ESB3024-1452]
NEW: [ANSSI-BP-028] Services - SSH Server [ESB3024-1456]
NEW: Improved classifiers [ESB3024-1492]
NEW: Improved Selection Input Rest API [ESB3024-1511]
FIXED: trustedProxies does not support CIDR [ESB3024-1136]
FIXED: Some valid configurations are rejected [ESB3024-1191]
FIXED: Lua print() does not behave according to the documentation [ESB3024-1248]
FIXED: Session translation function only applies to initial sessions [ESB3024-1379]
FIXED: It is not possible to change the configuration port [ESB3024-1381]
FIXED: Invalid metrics endpoint response [ESB3024-1388]
FIXED: Slow CDN response can prevent manifest from being downloaded [ESB3024-1424]
FIXED: CORS error in select input handler response [ESB3024-1426]
FIXED: Expired selection input entries are not always deleted [ESB3024-1485]
FIXED: The Director blocks when loading messages from Kafka [ESB3024-1490]

Deprecated functionality

Deprecated since ESB3024-1.18.0:

Lua function epochToTime has been deprecated in favor of epoch_to_time.
Lua function timeToEpoch has been deprecated in favor of time_to_epoch.
The session proxy has been deprecated. Its functionality is replaced by the new “Send HTTP requests from Lua code” function.

System requirements

See the current system requirements in Getting Started.

Known limitations

When configured to use TLS, acd-telegraf-metrics-database might log the following error message: http: TLS handshake error from <client ip>: client sent an HTTP request to an HTTPS server when receiving metrics from caches even though the Telegraf agents are configured to use TLS. The Telegraf logs on the caches do not show any errors related to this. However, the data is still received over TLS and stored correctly by acd-telegraf-metrics-database. The issue seemingly resolved itself during investigation and is not reproducible. Current hypothesis is a logging bug in Telegraf.
The Telegraf metrics agent might not be able to read all relevant network interface data on ESB2001 releases older than 3.6.2. The predictive load balancing function host_has_bw() and the health check function interfaces_online() might therefore not work as expected.
- The recommended workaround for host_has_bw() is to use host_has_bw_custom(), documented in Built-in Lua functions. host_has_bw_custom() accepts a numeric argument for the host’s network interface capacity which can be used if the data supplied by the Telegraf metrics agents do not contain this information.
- It is not recommended to use interfaces_online() for ESB2001 instances until they are updated to 3.6.2 or later.

1.10.2 - Release esb3024-1.20.1

Build date

2025-05-14

Release status

Type: production

Compatibility

This release has been tested with the following product versions:

AgileTV CDN Manager, ESB3027-1.2.0
Orbit, ESB2001-3.6.3 (see Known limitations below)
SW-Streamer, ESB3004-1.36.2
Convoy, ESB3006-3.4.0
Request Router, ESB3008-3.2.1

Breaking changes from previous release

There are no breaking changes in this release.

Change log

NEW: Support any 3xx response from redirecting CDNs [ESB3024-1271]
NEW: Support blocking of previously used tokens [ESB3024-1277]
NEW: Set and get selection input over Kafka. The new configuration field dataStreams introduces support to interface with Kafka. [ESB3024-1278]
NEW: Support TTL in selection input over Kafka [ESB3024-1286]
NEW: Add option to disable URL encoding on outgoing requests from Lua [ESB3024-1306]
NEW: Add Lua function for populating metrics [ESB3024-1334]
FIXED: Improve selection input performance [ESB3024-1290]
FIXED: Wildcard certificates wrongly documented as being unsupported [ESB3024-1324]
FIXED: Selection input items with empty keys are not rejected [ESB3024-1328]
FIXED: IP addresses wrongly classified as anonymous [ESB3024-1331]
FIXED: Some selection input payloads are erroneously rejected [ESB3024-1344]

Deprecated functionality

Lua function epochToTime has been deprecated in favor of epoch_to_time.
Lua function timeToEpoch has been deprecated in favor of time_to_epoch.
The session proxy has been deprecated. Its functionality is replaced by the new “Send HTTP requests from Lua code” function.

System requirements

The ACD Router requires a minimum CPU architecture level of x86-64-v2 due to inclusion of Oracle Linux 9 inside the container. While all modern CPUs support this archetecture level, virtual hypervisors may default to a CPU type that has more compatibility with older processors. If this minimum CPU architecture level is not attained the containers may refuse to start. See Operating System Compatibility and Building Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9 for the x86-64-v2 Microarchitecture Level for more information.

Known limitations

When configured to use TLS, acd-telegraf-metrics-database might log the following error message: http: TLS handshake error from <client ip>: client sent an HTTP request to an HTTPS server when receiving metrics from caches even though the Telegraf agents are configured to use TLS. The Telegraf logs on the caches do not show any errors related to this. However, the data is still received over TLS and stored correctly by acd-telegraf-metrics-database. The issue seemingly resolved itself during investigation and is not reproducible. Current hypothesis is a logging bug in Telegraf.
The Telegraf metrics agent might not be able to read all relevant network interface data on ESB2001 releases older than 3.6.2. The predictive load balancing function host_has_bw() and the health check function interfaces_online() might therefore not work as expected.
- The recommended workaround for host_has_bw() is to use host_has_bw_custom(), documented in Built-in Lua functions. host_has_bw_custom() accepts a numeric argument for the host’s network interface capacity which can be used if the data supplied by the Telegraf metrics agents do not contain this information.
- It is not recommended to use interfaces_online() for ESB2001 instances until they are updated to 3.6.2 or later.

1.10.3 - Release esb3024-1.18.0

Build date

2025-02-13

Release status

Type: production

Compatibility

This release is compatible with the following product versions:

Orbit, ESB2001-3.6.2 (see Known limitations below)
SW-Streamer, ESB3004-1.36.2
Convoy, ESB3006-3.4.0
Request Router, ESB3008-3.2.1

Breaking changes from previous release

Configurations with an invalid entrypoint will be rejected.

Change log

NEW: Support configuration feedback. concli provides very basic feedback [ESB3024-1165]
NEW: Send HTTP requests from Lua code [ESB3024-1172]
NEW: Add acd-metrics-aggregator service [ESB3024-1221]
NEW: Add acd-telegraf-metrics-database service [ESB3024-1224]
NEW: Make all Lua functions snake_case. timeToEpoch and epochToTime have been deprecated. [ESB3024-1246]
FIXED: Content popularity parameters can’t be configured [ESB3024-1187]
FIXED: acd-edns-proxy returns CNAME records in brackets. Hostnames were erroneously interpreted as IPv6 addresses. [ESB3024-1276]

Deprecations from previous release

Lua function epochToTime has been deprecated in favor of epoch_to_time.
Lua function timeToEpoch has been deprecated in favor of time_to_epoch.
The session proxy has been deprecated. Its functionality is replaced by the new “Send HTTP requests from Lua code” function.

System requirements

The ACD Router requires a minimum CPU architecture level of x86-64-v2 due to inclusion of Oracle Linux 9 inside the container. While all modern CPUs support this archetecture level, virtual hypervisors may default to a CPU type that has more compatibility with older processors. If this minimum CPU architecture level is not attained the containers may refuse to start. See Operating System Compatibility and Building Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9 for the x86-64-v2 Microarchitecture Level for more information.

Known limitations

GUI version 3.0.2 or earlier will not work with this release.
When configured to use TLS, acd-telegraf-metrics-database might log the following error message: http: TLS handshake error from <client ip>: client sent an HTTP request to an HTTPS server when receiving metrics from caches even though the Telegraf agents are configured to use TLS. The Telegraf logs on the caches do not show any errors related to this. However, the data is still received over TLS and stored correctly by acd-telegraf-metrics-database. The issue seemingly resolved itself during investigation and is not reproducible. Current hypothesis is a logging bug in Telegraf.
The Telegraf metrics agent might not be able to read all relevant network interface data on ESB2001 releases older than 3.6.2. The predictive load balancing function host_has_bw() and the health check function interfaces_online() might therefore not work as expected.
- The recommended workaround for host_has_bw() is to use host_has_bw_custom(), documented in Built-in Lua functions. host_has_bw_custom() accepts a numeric argument for the host’s network interface capacity which can be used if the data supplied by the Telegraf metrics agents do not contain this information.
- It is not recommended to use interfaces_online() for ESB2001 instances until they are updated to 3.6.2 or later.

1.10.4 - Release esb3024-1.16.0

Build date

2024-12-04

Release status

Type: production

Compatibility

This release is compatible with the following product versions:

Orbit, ESB2001-3.6.0 (see Known limitations below)
SW-Streamer, ESB3004-1.36.0
Convoy, ESB3006-3.4.0
Request Router, ESB3008-3.2.1

Breaking changes from previous release

Access logs are now saved to disk at /var/log/acd-router/access.log instead of being handled by journald.

Change log

NEW: Collect metrics per account [ESB3024-911]
NEW: Strip whitespace from beginning and end of names in configuration [ESB3024-954]
NEW: Improved reselection logging [ESB3024-1089]
NEW: Access log to file instead of journald. Access logs can now be found in /var/log/acd-router/access.log [ESB3024-1164]
NEW: Additional Lua checksum functions [ESB3024-1229]
NEW: Symlink logging directory /var/log/acd-router to /opt/edgeware/acd/router/log [ESB3024-1232]
FIXED: Convoy Bridge retries errors too fast [ESB3024-1120]
FIXED: Memory safety issue. Certain circumstances could cause the director to crash [ESB3024-1123]
FIXED: Too high severity on some log messages [ESB3024-1171]
FIXED: Session Proxy sends lowercase header names, which are not supported by Agile Cache [ESB3024-1183]
FIXED: Translation functions hostRequest and request fail when used together [ESB3024-1184]
FIXED: Lua hashing functions do not accept binary data [ESB3024-1196]
FIXED: Session Proxy has poor throughput [ESB3024-1197]
FIXED: Configuration doesn’t handle nested Lua tables as argument to conditions [ESB3024-1218]

Deprecations from previous release

None

System requirements

The ACD Router requires a minimum CPU architecture level of x86-64-v2 due to inclusion of Oracle Linux 9 inside the container. While all modern CPUs support this archetecture level, virtual hypervisors may default to a CPU type that has more compatibility with older processors. If this minimum CPU architecture level is not attained the containers may refuse to start. See Operating System Compatibility and Building Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9 for the x86-64-v2 Microarchitecture Level for more information.

Known limitations

The Telegraf metrics agent might not be able to read all relevant network interface data on ESB2001 releases older than 3.6.0. The predictive load balancing function host_has_bw() and the health check function interfaces_online() might therefore not work as expected.
- The recommended workaround for host_has_bw() is to use host_has_bw_custom(), documented in Built-in Lua functions. host_has_bw_custom() accepts a numeric argument for the host’s network interface capacity which can be used if the data supplied by the Telegraf metrics agents do not contain this information.
- It is not recommended to use interfaces_online() until the issue is resolved on ESB2001.

1.10.5 - Release esb3024-1.14.2

Build date

2024-10-01

Release status

Type: production

Breaking changes

If upgrading from a release prior to 1.10.0, the Director needs to be upgraded to 1.10.0, 1.10.1 or 1.10.2 before installing 1.14.2. See Installing a 1.14 release for more information.
In esb3024-1.14.0, the configuration setting services.routing.settings.allowedProxies has been renamed to services.routing.settings.trustedProxies and has changed default behavior. If empty, proxy connections are now denied by default. See Trusted proxies for more information.
Starting with esb3024-1.14.0, a minimum CPU architecture level of x86-64-v2 is required. See system requirements below for more information.

Change log

NEW: Define custom_capacity_var as a number in host_has_bw_custom(). Using a selection input variable for custom_capacity_var is no longer necessary. [ESB3024-1119]
FIXED: Predictive load balancing functions do not handle missing interface [ESB3024-1100]
FIXED: Client closing socket can cause proxy IP to resolve to “?” [ESB3024-1139]
FIXED: ACD crashes when attempting to read corrupt cached data. The cached data can become corrupt if the filesystem is manipulated by a user or the system runs out of storage. [ESB3024-1147]
FIXED: Subnets are not being persisted to disk [ESB3024-1149]
FIXED: ACD overwrites custom GeoIP MMDB files with the default shipped MMDB files when upgrading [ESB3024-1150]

Deprecations

From esb3024-1.14.0, the grafana-loki and fluentbit containers have been deprecated and are no longer installed with the system. Previously installed containers may be manually stopped and removed if not used, but they will not be uninstalled automatically.

System Requirements

Starting with esb3024-1.14.0 the ACD Router now requires a minimum CPU architecture level of x86-64-v2 due to inclusion of Oracle Linux 9 inside the container. While all modern CPUs support this archetecture level, virtual hypervisors may default to a CPU type that has more compatibility with older processors. If this minimum CPU architecture level is not attained the containers may refuse to start. See Operating System Compatibility and Building Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9 for the x86-64-v2 Microarchitecture Level for more information.

Known Limitations

The GUI is not working for this release.
The Telegraf metrics agent might not be able to read all relevant network interface data on some releases of ESB2001. The predictive load balancing function host_has_bw() and the health check function interfaces_online() might therefore not work as expected.
- The recommended workaround for host_has_bw() is to use host_has_bw_custom(), documented in Built-in Lua functions. host_has_bw_custom() accepts a numeric argument for the host’s network interface capacity which can be used if the data supplied by the Telegraf metrics agents do not contain this information.
- It is not recommended to use interfaces_online() until the issue is resolved on ESB2001.

1.10.6 - Release esb3024-1.14.0

Build date

2024-09-03

Release status

Type: production

Breaking changes

If upgrading from a release prior to 1.10.0, the Director needs to be upgraded to 1.10.0, 1.10.1 or 1.10.2 before installing 1.14.0. See Installing an 1.14 release for more information.
In esb3024-1.14.0, the configuration setting services.routing.settings.allowedProxies has been renamed to services.routing.settings.trustedProxies and has changed default behavior. If empty, proxy connections are now denied by default. See Trusted proxies for more information.
Starting with esb3024-1.14.0, a minimum CPU architecture level of x86-64-v2 is required. See system requirements below for more information.

Change log

NEW: Remove grafana-loki and fluentbit containers [ESB3024-774]
NEW: Extend num_endpoint_requests metric with host ID [ESB3024-975]
NEW: Improved subnets endpoint. See API overview documentation for details. [ESB3024-1018]
NEW: Support RHEL-9 / OL9 [ESB3024-1022]
NEW: Support OpenSSL 3 [ESB3024-1025]
NEW: Changed the router base image to oracle linux 9. See breaking changes [ESB3024-1034]
NEW: Rename allowedProxies to trustedProxies [ESB3024-1085]
NEW: Deny proxy connections by default if trustedProxies is empty [ESB3024-1088]
FIXED: Too long classifier name crashes confd-transformer [ESB3024-949]
FIXED: Lua condition si() doesn’t handle boolean values [ESB3024-1017]
FIXED: Classifiers of type stringMatcher and regexMatcher can’t use content query params as source [ESB3024-1032]
FIXED: ConsistentHashing algorithm is not content aware [ESB3024-1053]
FIXED: Large configurations fail to apply. The REST API max body size is now configurable. [ESB3024-1056]
FIXED: Convoy-bridge DB connection failure spams logs [ESB3024-1080]
FIXED: Convoy-bridge does not send correctly formatted session-id [ESB3024-1081]
FIXED: Response translation removes message body [ESB3024-1082]

Deprecations

From esb3024-1.14.0, the grafana-loki and fluentbit containers have been deprecated and are no longer installed with the system. During upgrade these containers may manually be stopped and removed if not used.

System Requirements

Starting with esb3024-1.14.0 the ACD-Router now requires a minimum CPU architecture level of x86-64-v2 due to inclusion of Oracle Linux 9 inside the container. While all modern CPUs support this archetecture level, virtual hypervisors may default to a CPU type that has more compatibility with older processors. If this minimum CPU architecture level is not attained the containers may refuse to start. See Operating System Compatibility and Building Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9 for the x86-64-v2 Microarchitecture Level for more information.

Known Limitations

The GUI is not working for this release.
The Telegraf metrics agent might not be able to read all relevant network interface data on some releases of ESB2001. The predictive load balancing function host_has_bw() and the health check function interfaces_online() might therefore not work as expected.
- The recommended workaround for host_has_bw() is to use host_has_bw_custom(), documented in Built-in Lua functions. A manual integration of setting a custom selection input variable representing the network interface capacity and using this in host_has_bw_custom() is necessary. See API Overview for details on using the selection input API. to use host_has_bw_custom()
- The recommended workaround for interfaces_online() is to not use the function until the issue is resolved.

1.10.7 - Release esb3024-1.12.1

Build date

2024-07-03

Release status

Type: production

Breaking changes

If upgrading from a release prior to 1.10.0, the Director needs to be upgraded to 1.10.0, 1.10.1 or 1.10.2 before installing 1.12.1. See Installing an 1.12 release for more information.

Change log

NEW: Remove support for EL7 [ESB3024-1046]
FIXED: Large configuration causes crash [ESB3024-1043]

Known Limitations

The GUI is not working for this release.

1.10.8 - Release esb3024-1.12.0

Build date

2024-06-19

Release status

Type: production

Breaking changes

If upgrading from a release prior to 1.10.0, the Director needs to be upgraded to 1.10.0, 1.10.1 or 1.10.2 before installing 1.12.0. See Installing release 1.12.0 for more information.

Change log

NEW: Move managed session creation to Lua. Creating managed sessions is now handled by using the session translation function. [ESB3024-454]
NEW: Grafana dashboards to monitor Quality [ESB3024-511]
NEW: Measure and expose quality scores. A quality score per host and session group is now available when making routing decisions. [ESB3024-512]
NEW: Add default session classifiers. When resetting the list of classifiers in confd, it is now populated with commonly used classifers. [ESB3024-769]
NEW: Add configuration migration tool [ESB3024-824]
NEW: Add new Random classifier [ESB3024-899]
NEW: Add URL parsing code to Lua library. An URL parser based on https://github.com/golgote/neturl/ with extensions for path splitting and joining [ESB3024-936]
NEW: Standard library Lua functions now use the same log mechanism as the Director [ESB3024-966]
NEW: Extend ’num_sessions’ metric to include a label with the selected host [ESB3024-973]
NEW: Add quality level metrics [ESB3024-974]
NEW: Add host request translation function [ESB3024-996]
FIXED: ConsistentHashing Algorithm only supports MD5. MD5, SDBM and Murmur are now supported. [ESB3024-929]
FIXED: Confd IPv4 validation rejects IPs with /29 netmask [ESB3024-1010]
FIXED: Stale timestamped selection input not being pruned. Added configurable timestamped selection input timeout limit. [ESB3024-1016]

Known Limitations

The GUI is not working for this release.

1.10.9 - Release esb3024-1.10.2

Build date

2024-06-03

Release status

Type: production

Breaking changes

If upgrading from a release prior to 1.10.0, the configuration needs to be manually updated after upgrading to 1.10.2. See Installing release 1.10.x for more information.

Change log

FIXED: ConsistentHashing rule broken [ESB3024-969]
FIXED: Increase configuration size limit [ESB3024-983]

Known Limitations

None

1.10.10 - Release esb3024-1.10.1

Build date

2024-04-18

Release status

Type: production

Breaking changes

If upgrading from a release prior to 1.10.0, the configuration needs to be manually updated after upgrading to 1.10.1. See Installing release 1.10.x for more information.

Change log

NEW: Change predictive load balancing functions to use megabits/s [ESB3024-932]
FIXED: Logic classifier statements can consume all memory [ESB3024-937]

Known Limitations

None

1.10.11 - Release esb3024-1.10.0

Build date

2024-04-02

Release status

Type: production

Breaking changes

The configuration needs to be manually updated after upgrading to 1.10.0. See Installing release 1.10.0 for more information.

Change log

NEW: Use metrics from streamers in routing decisions. Added standard library Lua support to use hardware metrics in routing decisions. Added host health checks in the configuration. [ESB3024-154]
NEW: Remove unused field “apiKey” from configuration [ESB3024-426]
NEW: Support integration with Convoy Analytics [ESB3024-694]
NEW: Support combining classifiers using AND/OR in session groups [ESB3024-776]
NEW: Enable access logging by default [ESB3024-816]
NEW: Improved Lua translation function error handling [ESB3024-874]
NEW: Updated predictive load balancing functions to support hardware metrics [ESB3024-887]
NEW: Remove apiKey from documentation [ESB3024-927]
FIXED: Condition with ‘or’ statement sometimes generate faulty Lua [ESB3024-863]

Known Limitations

None

1.10.12 - Release esb3024-1.8.0

Build date

2024-02-07

Release status

Type: production

Breaking changes

The configuration needs to be manually updated after upgrading to 1.8.0. See Installing release 1.8.0 for more information.

Change log

NEW: Remove ESB3026 Account Monitor from installer. [ESB3024-354]
NEW: Improve selection input endpoint flexibility and security. See API overview documentation for details. [ESB3024-423]
NEW: Support anonymous geoip rules [ESB3024-699]
NEW: Add ASN IDs list classifiers to confd [ESB3024-778]
NEW: Enable content popularity tracking by default. Added option to enable/disable in confd/confcli. [ESB3024-781]
NEW: Remove dependency on session from security token verification [ESB3024-809]
FIXED: A lot of JSON output on failed routing. HTTP response no longer contains internal routing information. [ESB3024-523]
FIXED: Returning Lua table from Lua debug endpoint can crash router. Selection Input values now support floating point values in a Lua context [ESB3024-691]
FIXED: Floating point selection inputs are truncated to ints when passed to Lua context [ESB3024-710]
FIXED: Race condition between RestApi and Session [ESB3024-753]
FIXED: confd/concli doesn’t support “forward_host_header” on hostGroups [ESB3024-761]
FIXED: Support Lua vector keys in reverse order [ESB3024-780]

Known Limitations

None

1.10.13 - Release esb3024-1.6.0

Build date

2023-12-20

Release status

Type: production

Breaking changes

The configuration needs to be manually updated after upgrading to 1.6.0. See configuration changes between 1.4.0 and 1.6.0 for more information.

Change log

NEW: Remove the lua_paths array from the config . Lua scripts are now added using a REST API on the /v1/lua/ endpoint. [ESB3024-204]
NEW: Separate “account-monitor” from installer [ESB3024-238]
NEW: Consistent hashing based routing . Added support for content distribution control for load balancing and cache partitioning [ESB3024-274]
NEW: Predictive load balancing . Account for in-transit traffic to prevent cache overload when there is a sudden burst of new sessions. [ESB3024-275]
NEW: Support Convoy security tokens [ESB3024-386]
NEW: Expose quality, host and session ID in the session object in Lua context [ESB3024-429]
NEW: Support upgrade of system python in installer [ESB3024-442]
NEW: Do not configure selinux and firewalld in installer [ESB3024-493]
NEW: Convoy Distribution/Account integration [ESB3024-503]
NEW: Make eDNS server port configurable . The router configuration hosts.proxy_address has been renamed to hosts.proxy_url and now accepts a port that is used when connecting to the proxy. The cdns.http_port and cdns.https_port configurations now configure the port that is used for connecting to the EDNS server, before they configured the port that was used for connecting to the proxy. [ESB3024-509]
NEW: Expand node table in Lua context . New fields are: node.id, node.visits, host.id, host.recent_selections [ESB3024-630]
FIXED: DNS lookup can fail . DNS lookup can fail when same content requested from both IPv4 and IPv6 clients [ESB3024-427]
FIXED: Failed DNS requests are not retried . Fixed bug where failed eDNS requests were not retried [ESB3024-504]
FIXED: Lua functions are not updated when uploaded [ESB3024-544]
FIXED: Undefined metatable fields evaluate to false rather than nil [ESB3024-642]
FIXED: Evaluator::evaluate() doesn’t support different types of its variadic arguments [ESB3024-687]
FIXED: Segfault when accessing REST api with empty path [ESB3024-752]
FIXED: Container UID/GID may change between versions [ESB3024-755]

1.10.14 - Release esb3024-1.4.0

Build date

2023-09-29

Release status

Type: production

Breaking changes

All configuration is now stored under /opt/edgeware/acd, see [ESB3024-425]. Any configuration that is to be kept needs to be manually migrated.
Typically /opt/edgeware/etc/confd/store/store.json needs to be copied to /opt/edgeware/acd/confd/store/store.json, /opt/edgeware/var/lib/acd-router/cached-acd-router-config.json needs to be copied to /opt/edgeware/acd/router/cache/config.json and /opt/edgeware/var/lib/acd-router/cached-router-rest-api-key.json needs to be copied to /opt/edgeware/acd/router/cache/rest-api-key.json. Custom Lua functions need to be migrated from /opt/edgeware/acd/var/lib/custom_lua to /opt/edgeware/acd/router/lib/custom_lua. The Prometheus and Grafana configurations also need to be copied if they have been modified.

The following changes were made to the confcli configuration [ESB3024-455].
The rule fields inside the routing rule items were renamed to condition to avoid confusion with the rules list. This applies to the blocks allow, deny, split and weighted.
The popularityThreshold in the contentPopularity routing rule was renamed to contentPopularityCutoff.

Change log

NEW: 1-Page Status Report . Added command ew-sysinfo that can be used on any machine with an ESB3024 installation. The command outputs various information about the system and installed services which can be used for monitoring and diagnostics. [ESB3024-391]
NEW: Update routing rule property names . Routing rule property names updated for consistency and clarity [ESB3024-455]
FIXED: Deleting confd API array element inside oneOf object fails [ESB3024-355]
FIXED: Container logging not captured by systemd until services are restarted [ESB3024-359]
FIXED: Alertmanager restricts the configuration to a single file [ESB3024-381]
FIXED: Split rules in routing configuration should terminate on error [ESB3024-420]
FIXED: Improve alert configuration in Prometheus [ESB3024-422]
FIXED: Inconsistent storage paths of service configuration and data [ESB3024-425]
FIXED: confd-transformer is not working in el7 [ESB3024-430]

1.10.15 - Release acd-router-1.2.3

Build date

2023-08-16

Release status

Type: production

Breaking changes

None

Change log

NEW: Add more classifiers . New classifiers are hostName, contentUrlPath, userAgent, contentUrlQueryParameters [ESB3024-298]
NEW: Add allow- and denylist rule blocks [ESB3024-380]
NEW: Add enhanced validation of scriptable field in routing rules [ESB3024-393]
NEW: Add services to the config tree [ESB3024-410]
NEW: Prohibit unknown configuration properties [ESB3024-416]
FIXED: Duplicate session group IDs are allowed [ESB3024-49]
FIXED: Invalid URL returned for IPv4 requests when using a DNS backend [ESB3024-374]
FIXED: Not possible to set log level in eDNS proxy [ESB3024-378]
FIXED: Instream selection fails when DASH manifest has template paths using “../” [ESB3024-384]

1.10.16 - Release acd-router-1.2.0

Build date

2023-06-27

Release status

Type: production

Breaking changes

None

Change log

NEW: Add meta fields to the configuration . The API now allows the meta data fields “created_at”, “source” and “source_checksum” that can be used for the API consumer to track who did what change when.
NEW: Control routing behavior based on backend response code . This gives control over when to return backend response codes to the end user and when to trigger a failover to another CDN or host.
NEW: Manage Lua scripts via API
NEW: Support popularity-based routing . Content can be ordered in multiple groups with descending popularity. Popularity can also be tracked per session group.
NEW: Improved support for IPv6 routing . It is now possible to select backend depending on the IP protocol version.
NEW: Add DNS backend support . This allows delegating routing decisions to an EDNS0 server.
NEW: Support HMAC with SHA256 in Lua scripts
NEW: Add alarm support . The alarms are handled by Prometheus and Alertmanager.
NEW: Support saving Grafana Dashboards
NEW: Add simplified configuration API and CLI tool . A new configuration API with an easier to use model has been added. The “confcli” tool present in many other Edgeware products is now supported.
NEW: Add authentication to the REST API
FIXED: Host headers not forwarded to Request Router when ‘redirecting: true’ is enabled
FIXED: IP range classifier 0.0.0.0/0 does not work in session groups

1.10.17 - Release acd-router-1.0.0

First production

Build date

2022-11-22

Release status

Type: First production release

Known Limitations

The setting “allowed_clients” should not be used since the functionality does not work as expected.

Change log

Flexible routing rule engine with support for Lua plugins. Support many use cases, including CDN Offload and CDN Selection.
Advanced client classification mechanisms for routing based on group memberships (device type, content type, etc).
Geobased routing including dedicated high-performing API for subnet matching, associating an incoming request with a region.
Integration API to feed the service with arbitrary variables to use for routing decisions. Can be used to get streaming bitrate in public CDNs, status from network probes, etc.
Flexible request/response translation manipulation on the client facing interface. Can be used for URL manipulation, encoding/decoding tokens or adapting the interface to e.g. the PowerDNS backend protocol.
Metrics API that can be monitored with standard monitoring software. Out-of-the-box integration with Prometheus and Grafana.
Robust deployment with each service instance running independently, and allowing the service to stay in operational state even when backends become temporarily unavailable.
RHEL 7/8 support.
Online documentation at https://docs.agilecontent.com/

1.11 - Glossary

ESB3024 Router definitions of commonly used terms

ACD: Agile CDN Director. See “Director”.
Confd: A backend service that hosts the service configuration. Comes with an API, a CLI and a GUI.
Classifier: A filter that associate a request with a tag that can be used to define session groups.
Director: The Agile Delivery OTT router and related services.
ESB: A software bundle that can be separately installed and upgraded, and is released as one entity with one change log. Each ESB is identified with a number. Over time, features and functions within an ESB can change.
Lua: A widely available scripting language that is often used to extend the capabilities of a piece of software.
Router: Unless otherwise specified, an HTTP router that manages an OTT session using HTTP redirect. There are also ways to use DNS instead of HTTP.
Selection Input API: Data posted to this API can be accessed by the routing rules and hence influence the routing decisions.
Subnet API: An API to define mappings between subnets and names (typically regions) for those subnets. Routing rules can then refer to the names rather than the subnets.
Session Group: A handle on a group of requests, defined via classifiers.

2 - AgileTV Account Aggregator (esb3032)

Aggregates CDN statistics

2.1 - Getting Started

Getting started with the Account Aggregator

The account aggregator is a service responsible for monitoring various input streams, compiling and aggregating statistics, and selectively reporting to one or more output streams. It acts primarily as a centralized collector of metrics which may have various aggregations applied before being published to one or more endpoints.

Modes of Operation

There are two primary modes of operation, a live-monitoring mode, as well as a reporting mode. The live-monitoring mode measures the account records in real-time, filters, and aggregates the data to the various outputs in real-time. In this mode, only the most recent data will be considered, and any historical context upon startup may be skipped. In the reporting mode, the account record data will be consumed and processed in the order in which they were published to Kafka, and the service will guarantee that all records, still available within the Kafka topic will be processed and reported upon.

Activating the various modes of operation is performed by way of the set of input and output blocks within the configuration file. The file may contain one or more input blocks which specify where the data is sourced, e.g. account records from Kafka, and one or more output blocks which determine how and where the aggregated statistics are published.

While it is possible to specify multiple input and output blocks within a single configuration file, it is highly recommended to separate each pairing of input and output blocks into separate instances running on different nodes. This will yield the best performance and provide for better load balancing, since each instance will be responsible for a single mode of operation.

Real-Time Account Monitoring

In the real-time account monitoring mode, account records, which are sent from each streaming server through the Kafka message broker, are processed by the account aggregator, and current real-time throughput metrics are updated in a Redis database. These metrics, which are constantly being updated, reflect the most current state of the CDN, and can be used by the Convoy Request Router to make real-time routing decisions.

PCX Reporting

In the PCX collector mode, account records are consumed in such a way that past throughput and session statistics can be aggregated to produce billing related reports. These reports are not considered real-time metrics, but represent usage statistics over fixed time intervals. This mode of operation requires a PCX API compatible reporting endpoint. See Appendix B for additional information regarding the PCX reporting format.

Installation

Prerequisites

The account aggregator is shipped as a compressed OCI formatted container image and as such, it requires a supported container runtime such as one of the following:

Docker
Podman
Kubernetes

Any runtime capable of running a Linux container should work the same. For simplicity, the following installation instructions assume that Docker is being used, and that Docker is already configured and running on the target system.

To test that Docker is setup and running, and that the current user has the required privileges to create a container, you may execute the following command.

$ docker run hello-world

Hello from Docker!
This message shows that your installation appears to be working correctly.

To generate this message, Docker took the following steps:
 1. The Docker client contacted the Docker daemon.
 2. The Docker daemon pulled the "hello-world" image from the Docker Hub.
    (amd64)
 3. The Docker daemon created a new container from that image which runs the
    executable that produces the output you are currently reading.
 4. The Docker daemon streamed that output to the Docker client, which sent it
    to your terminal.

To try something more ambitious, you can run an Ubuntu container with:
 $ docker run -it ubuntu bash

Share images, automate workflows, and more with a free Docker ID:
 https://hub.docker.com/

For more examples and ideas, visit:
 https://docs.docker.com/get-started/

If you get a permission denied error, ensure that the current user is a member of the docker group or execute all Docker commands under sudo.

Loading the Container Image

The container image is delivered as a compressed OCI formatted image, which can be loaded directly via the docker load command. The following assumes that the image is in /tmp/esb3032-acd-aggregator-0.0.0.gz

docker load --input /tmp/esb3032-acd-aggregator-0.0.0.gz

You will now be able to verify that the image was loaded successfully by executing the following and looking for the image name in the output.

$ docker images | grep acd-aggregator

images.edgeware.tv/esb3032-acd-aggregator latest   4bbe28b444d3 1 day ago  2.08GB

Creating the Configuration File

The configuration file may be located anywhere on the filesystem, however it is recommended to keep everything under the /opt/edgeware/acd/aggregator folder to be consistent with other products under the ACD product family. If that folder doesn’t already exist, you may create the folder with the following command.

mkdir -p /opt/edgeware/acd/aggregator

If using a different location, you will need to map the folder to the container while creating the Docker container. Additional information describing how to map the volume is available in the section “Creating and starting the container” below.

The configuration file for the account aggregator is divided into several sections, input, output and tuning. One or more input blocks may be specified to configure from where the data should be sourced. One or more output blocks may be configured which determine to where the resulting aggregated data is published. Finally the tuning block configures various global settings for how the account aggregator operates, such as the global log_level.

Configuring the Input Source

As of the current version of the account aggregator, there is only a single type of input source supported, and that is account_records. This input source connects to a Kafka message broker, and consumes account records. Depending on which output types are configured, the Kafka consumer may either start by processing the oldest or most recent records first.

The following configuration block sample will be used as an example in the description below.

Note that the key input is surrounded by double-square-brackets. This is a syntax element to indicate that there may be multiple input sections in the configuration.

[[input]]
type = "account_records"
servers = [
    "kafka://192.0.2.1:9092",
    "kafka://192.0.2.2:9092",
]
group_name = "acd-aggregator"
kafka_max_poll_interval_ms = 30000
kafka_session_timeout_ms = 3000
log_level = "off"

The type property is used to determine the type of input, and the only valid value is account_records.

The servers list must contain at least 1 Kafka URL, prefixed with the URL scheme kafka://. If not specified, the default Kafka port of 9092 will be used. It is recommended but not required to specify all servers here, as the Kafka client library will obtain the full list of endpoints from the server on startup, however, the initial connection will be made to one or more of the provided URLs.

The group_name property identifies to which consumer group the aggregator should belong. Due to the type of data which account records represent, each instance of the aggregator connecting to the same Kafka message broker MUST have a unique group name. If two instances belong to the same group, the data will be partitioned among both instances, and the resulting aggregations may not be correct. If only a single instance of the account aggregator is used, this property is optional and defaults to “acd-aggregator”.

The kafka_* properties, for max_poll_interval and session_timeout are used to tune the connection parameters for the internal Kafka consumer. More details for these properties can be found in the documentation for the rdkafka library. See Kafka documentation for more details.

The log_level property configures the logging level for the Kafka library and supports the values “off”, “trace”, “debug”, “info”, “warn”, and “error”. By default, logging from this library is disabled. This should only be enabled for troubleshooting purposes, as it is extremely verbose, and any warnings or error messages will be repeated in the account aggregator’s log. The logging level for the Kafka library must be higher then the general logging level for the aggregator, as defined in the “tuning” section or the lower-level messages from the Kafka library will be skipped.

Configuring Output

The account aggregator currently supports two types of output blocks, depending on the desired mode of operation. For reference purposes, both types will be described within this section, but it is recommended to only use a single type per instance of the account aggregator.

Note that the key output is surrounded by double-square-brackets. This is a syntax element to indicate that there may be multiple output sections in the configuration.

[[output]]
type = "account_monitor"
redis_servers = [
    "redis://192.0.2.7:6379/0",
    "redis://:password@192.0.2.8:6379/1",
]
stale_threshold_s = 12
throughput_correction_mbps = 0
minimum_check_interval_ms = 1000

[[output]]
type = "pcx_collector"
report_url = "https://192.0.2.5:8000/v1/collector"
client_id = "edgeware"
secret = "abc123"
report_timeout_ms = 2000
report_interval_s = 30
report_delay_s = 30

Real-Time Account Monitor Output

The first output block has the type account_monitor and represents the live account monitoring functionality, which publishes per-account bandwidth metrics to one or more Redis servers. When this type of output block is configured, the account records will be consumed starting with the most recent messages first, and offsets will not be committed. Stopping or restarting the service may cause account records to be skipped. This type of output is suitable for making real-time routing decisions, but should not be relied upon for critical billing or reporting metrics.

The redis_servers list consists of URLs to Redis instances which shall be updated with the current real-time bandwidth metrics. If the Redis instance requires authentication, the global instance password can be specified as part of the URL as in the second entry in the list. Since Redis does not support usernames, anything before the : in the credentials part of the URL will be ignored. At least 1 Redis URL must be provided.

The stale_threshold_s property determines the maximum timeout in seconds, after which, if no account records have been received for a given host, the host will be considered stale and removed.

The throughput_correction_mbps property can be used to add or subtract a fixed correction factor to the bandwidth reported in Redis. This is specified in megabits per second, and this may be either positive or negative. If the value is negative, and the calculated bandwidth is less than the correction factor, a minimum bandwidth of 0 will be reported.

The minimum_check_interval_ms property is used to throttle how frequently the statistics will be processed. By default, the account aggregator will not recalculate the statistics more than once per second. Setting this value too low will result in potentially higher CPU usage, while setting it too high may result in some account records being missed. The default of 1 second should be adequate for most situations.

PCX Collector Output

The pcx_collector type configures the account aggregator as a reporting

agent for the PCX API. Whenever this configuration is present, the account record consumer will be configured to always start at the oldest records retained within the Kafka topic. It then processes the records one at a time, committing the Kafka offset each time a report is successfully received. This mode does not make any guarantees as to how recent the data is on which the reports are made, but does guarantee that every record will be counted in the aggregated report. Stopping or restarting the service will result in the account record consumer resuming processing from the last successful report. This type of reporting is suitable for billing purposes assuming that there are multiple replicated Kafka nodes, and that the service is not stopped for longer than the maximum retention period configured within Kafka. Stopping the service for longer than the retention period will result in messages being unavailable. Because this type of output requires that the Kafka consumer is processed in a specific order, and will not proceed with reading additional messages until all reports have been successfully received, it is not recommended to have both pcx_collector and the account_monitor type output blocks configured within the same instance.

The report_url property is a single HTTP endpoint URL where the PCX API can be reached. This property is required and may be either an HTTP or HTTPS URL. For HTTPS, the validity of the TLS certificate will be enforced, meaning that self-signed certificates will not be considered valid.

The client_id and secret fields are used to authenticate the client with the PCX API via token-based authentication. These fields are both required, however if not used by the specific PCX API instance, the empty string "" may be provided.

The report_timeout_ms field is an optional maximum timeout for the HTTP connection to the PCX API before the connection will fail. Failed reports will be retried indefinitely.

The report_interval_s property represents the interval bucket size for reporting metrics. The timing for this type of output is based solely on the embedded timestamp value of the account records, meaning that this property is not an absolute period on which the reports will be sent, but instead represents the duration between the start and ending timestamps of the report. Especially upon startup, reports may be sent much more frequently than this interval, but will always cover this duration of time.

The report_delay_s property is an optional offset used to account for both clock synchronization between servers as well as propagation delay of the account records through the message broker. The default delay is 30 seconds. This means that the ending timestamp of a given report will be no more recent than this many seconds in the past. It is important to include this delay, as any account records received with a timestamp that would be within period which has already been reported upon, will be dropped.

Tuning the Account Aggregator

The tuning configuration block represents the global properties for tuning how the account aggregator functions. Currently only one tuning property can be configured, and that is the log_level. The default log_level is “info”, which should be used in normal operation of the account aggregator, however, other possible values in order of verbosity include “trace”, “debug”, “info”, “warn”, “error”, and “off”.

Note that the tuning key is surrounded by single square-brackets. This is TOML syntax meaning that only one instance of tuning is allowed.

[tuning]
log_level = "info"

Example Configurations

This section describes some example configuration files which can be used as a starting template depending on which mode of operation is desired.

Real-Time Account Monitoring Example

This configuration will consume account records from a Kafka server running on 3 hosts, kafka-1, kafka-2, and kafka-3. The account records will be consumed starting with the most recent records. The resulting aggregations will be published to two Redis instances, running on redis-1 and redis-2. The reported bandwidth will have a 2Gb/s correction factor applied.

[[input]]
type = "account_records"
servers = [
    "kafka://kafka-1:9092",
    "kafka://kafka-2:9092",
    "kafka://kafka-3:9092"
]
group_name = "acd-aggregator-live"
# kafka_max_poll_interval_ms = 30000
# kafka_session_timeout_ms = 3000
# log_level = "off"

[[output]]
type = "account_monitor"
redis_servers = [
    "redis://redis-1:6379/0",
    "redis://redis-2:6379/0",
]
# stale_threshold_s = 12
throughput_correction_mbps = 2000
# minimum_check_interval_ms = 1000

[tuning]
log_level = "info"

The keys prefixed by # are commented out, since the default values will be used. They are included in the example for completeness.

PCX Collector

This configuration will consume account records starting from the earliest record, calculate aggregated statistics for every 30 seconds, offset with a delay of 30 seconds, and publish the results to https://pcx.example.com/v1/collector.

[[input]]
type = "account_records"
servers = [
    "kafka://kafka-1:9092",
    "kafka://kafka-2:9092",
    "kafka://kafka-3:9092"
]
group_name = "acd-aggregator-pcx"
# kafka_max_poll_interval_ms = 30000
# kafka_session_timeout_ms = 3000
# log_level = "off"

[[output]]
type = "pcx_collector"
report_url = "https://pcx.example.com/v1/collector"
client_id = "edgeware"
secret = "abc123"
# report_timeout_ms = 2000
# report_interval_s = 30
# report_delay_s = 30

[tuning]
log_level = "info"

The keys prefixed by # are commented out, since the default values will be used. They are included in the example for completeness.

Combined PCX Collector with Real-Time Account Monitoring

While this configuration is possible, it is not recommended, since the pcx_collector output type will force all records to be consumed starting at the earliest record. This will cause the live statistics to be delayed until ALL earlier records have been consumed, and reports have been successfully accepted by the PCX API. This combined role configuration can be used to minimize the number of servers or services running if the above limitations are acceptable.

Note: This is simply the combination of the above two output blocks in the same configuration file.

[[input]]
type = "account_records"
servers = [
    "kafka://kafka-1:9092",
    "kafka://kafka-2:9092",
    "kafka://kafka-3:9092"
]
group_name = "acd-aggregator-combined"
# kafka_max_poll_interval_ms = 30000
# kafka_session_timeout_ms = 3000
# log_level = "off"

[[output]]
type = "account_monitor"
redis_servers = [
    "redis://redis-1:6379/0",
    "redis://redis-2:6379/0",
]
# stale_threshold_s = 12
throughput_correction_mbps = 2000
# minimum_check_interval_ms = 1000

[[output]]
type = "pcx_collector"
report_url = "https://pcx.example.com/v1/collector"
client_id = "edgeware"
secret = "abc123"
# report_timeout_ms = 2000
# report_interval_s = 30
# report_delay_s = 30

[tuning]
log_level = "info"

Upgrading

The upgrade procedure for the aggregator consists of simply stopping the existing container with docker stop acd-aggregator, removing the existing container with docker rm acd-aggregator, and following the steps in “Creating and starting the container” below with the upgraded Docker image.

To roll back to a previous version, simply perform the same steps with the previous image. It is recommended to keep at least one previous image around until such time that you are satisfied with the new version. After which, you may remove the previous image with docker rmi images.edgeware.tv/esb3032-acd-aggregator:1.2.3 where “1.2.3” represents the previous version number.

Creating and Starting the Container

Now that the configuration file has been created, and the image has been loaded, we will need to create and start the container instance. The following docker run command will create a new container called “acd-aggregator”, start the process, and automatically resume the container once the Docker daemon is loaded at startup.

docker run \
  --name "acd-aggregator" \
  --detach \
  --restart=always \
  -v <PATH_TO_CONFIG_FOLDER>:/opt/edgeware/acd/aggregator:ro \
  <IMAGE NAME>:<VERSION> \
  --config /opt/edgeware/acd/aggregator/aggregator.toml

As an example using version 1.4.0:

docker run \
  --name "acd-aggregator" \
  --detach \
  --restart=always \
  -v /opt/edgeware/acd/aggregator:/opt/edgeware/acd/aggregator:ro \
  images.edgeware.tv/esb3032-acd-aggregator:1.4.0 \
  --config /opt/edgeware/acd/aggregator/aggregator.toml

Note: The image tag in the example is “1.4.0”, you will need to replace that tag with the image tag loaded from the compressed OCI formatted image file, which can be obtained by running docker images and searching for the account aggregator image as described in the step “Loading the container image” above.

If the configuration file saved in the previous step was at a different location from /opt/edgeware/acd/aggregator/aggregator.toml you will need to change both the -v option and the --config option in the above command to represent that location. The -v option mounts the containing folder from the host system on the left to the corresponding path inside the container on the right, and the :ro tells Docker that the volume is mounted read-only. The --config should be the absolute path to the configuration file from INSIDE the container. For example, if you saved the configuration file as /host/path/config.toml on the host, and you need to map that to /container/path/config.toml within the container, the lines should be -v /host/path:/container/path:ro and --config /container/path/config.toml respectively.

The --restart=always line tells Docker to automatically restart the container when the Docker runtime is loaded, and is the equivalent in systemd to “enabling” the service.

Starting and Stopping the Container

To view the status of the running container, use the docker ps command. This will give a line of output for the acd-aggregator container if it is currently running. Appending the -a flag, will list the aggregator container if is not running as well.

Execute the following:

docker ps -a

You should see a line for the container with the container name “acd-aggregator” along with the current state of the container. If all is OK, you should see the container process running at this point, but it may show as “exited” if there was a problem.

To start and stop the container the docker start acd-aggregator and docker stop acd-aggregator commands can be used.

Viewing the Logs

By default, Docker will maintain the logs of the individual containers within its own internal logging subsystem, which requires the user to use the command

docker logs

to view them. It is possible however to configure the Docker daemon to send logs to the system journal, however configuring that is beyond the scope of this document. Additional details describing how to do that are described here

[https://docs.docker.com/config/containers/logging/journald/].

To view the complete log for the aggregator the following command can be used.

docker logs acd-aggregator

Supplying the -f flag, can be used to “follow” the log until either the process terminates or CTRL+C is pressed.

docker logs -f acd-aggregator

Appendix A: Real-time Account Monitoring

Redis Key-Value Pairs

Each account will have a single key-value stored in Redis with the current throughput with any correction factor applied, which will be updated in real-time every time all hosts for the given account have received a new account record. This should be approximately every 10 seconds, but may vary slightly due to processing time.

The keys are structured in the following format:

bandwidth:<account>:value

and the value is reported in bits-per-second.

For example for accounts foo, bar and baz we may see the following:

bandwidth:foo:value = 123456789
bandwidth:bar:value = 234567890
bandwidth:baz:value = 102400

These values represent the most current throughput for each account, and will be updated periodically. A TTL of 48 hours is added to the keys, such that they will be pruned automatically after 48 hours since the last update. This is to prevent stale keys from remaining in Redis indefinitely. This TTL is not configurable by the end user.

Appendix B: PCX Collector Reporting

PCX Reporting Format

The following is an example of the report sent to the PCX HTTP endpoint.

{
    timestamp_begin: 1674165540,
    timestamp_end: 1674165570,
    writer_id: "writer-1",
    traffic: [
        Traffic {
            account_id: "unknown",
            num_ongoing_sessions: 0,
            bytes_transmitted: 0,
            edges: [
                Edge {
                    server: "orbit-1632",
                    num_ongoing_sessions: 0,
                    bytes_transmitted: 0,
                },
            ],
        },
        Traffic {
            account_id: "default",
            num_ongoing_sessions: 747,
            bytes_transmitted: 75326,
            edges: [
                Edge {
                    server: "orbit-1632",
                    num_ongoing_sessions: 747,
                    bytes_transmitted: 75326,
                },
            ],
        },
    ],
}

The report can be broken down into 3 parts. The outer root section includes the starting and stopping timestamps, as well as a writer_id field which is currently unused. For each account a Traffic section contains the aggregated statistics for that account, as well as a detailed breakdown of each Edge. An Edge is the portion of traffic for the account streamed by each server. Within an Edge the num_ongoing_sessions represents the peak ongoing sessions during the reporting interval, while the bytes_transmitted represents the total egress bandwidth in bytes over the entire period. For each outer Traffic section, the num_ongoing_sessions and bytes_transmitted represent the sum of the corresponding entries in all Edges.

Data Protection and Consistency

The ACD aggregator works by consuming messages from Kafka. Once a report has successfully been submitted, as determined by a 200 OK HTTP status from the reporting endpoint, the position in the Kafka topic will be committed. This means that if the aggregator process stops and is restarted, reporting will resume from the last successful report, and no data will be lost. There is a limitation to this, however, and that has to do with the data retention time of the messages in Kafka and the TTL value specified in the aggregator configuration. Both default to the same value of 24 hours. This means that if the aggregator process is stopped for more than 24 hours, data loss will result since the source account records will have expired from Kafka before they can be reported on by the aggregator.

Upon startup of the aggregator, all records stored in Kafka will be reported on in the order they are read, starting from either the last successful report or the oldest record currently in Kafka. Reports will be sent each time the timestamp in the current record read from Kafka exceeds the reporting interval meaning a large burst of reports will be sent at startup to cover each interval. Once the aggregator has caught up with the backlog of account records, it will send a single report roughly every 30 seconds (configurable).

It is not recommended to have more than a single account aggregator instance reading from Kafka at a time, as this will result in partial reports being sent to the HTTP endpoint which will require the endpoint to reconstruct the data upon receipt. All redundancy in the account aggregator is handled by the redundancy within Kafka itself. With this in mind, it is important to ensure that there are multiple Kafka instances running and that the aggregator is configured to read from all of them.

2.2 - Releases

ESB3032 Account Aggregator releases

2.2.1 - Release esb3032-0.2.0

Build date

2022-12-21

Release status

Type: devdrop

Change log

NEW: Use config file instead of command line switches
NEW: Reports are now aligned with wall-clock time
NEW: Reporting time no longer contains gaps in coverage
FIX: Per-account number of sessions only shows largest host

2.2.2 - Release esb3032-1.0.0

First official release

Build date

2023-02-14

Release status

Type: production

Change log

NEW: Create user documentation for ACD Aggregator
NEW: Simplify configuration . Changed from YAML to TOML format.
NEW: Handle account records arriving late
FIXED: Aggregator hangs if committing to Kafka delays more than 5 minutes

2.2.3 - Release esb3032-1.2.1

Production release

Build date

2023-04-24

Release status

Type: production

Breaking changes

No breaking changes

Change log

NEW: Port Account Monitor functionality for Convoy Request Router
NEW: Aggregator Performance Improvements
FIXED: Reports lost when restarting acd-aggregator

2.2.4 - Release esb3032-1.4.0

Build date

2023-09-28

Release status

Type: production

Breaking changes

None

Change log

NEW: Extend aggregator with additional metrics. Per streamer bandwidth and total bandwidth are now updated in Redis. [ESB3032-98]
FIXED: Not all Redis instances are updated after a failure [ESB3032-99]
FIXED: Kafka consumer restarts on Partition EOF [ESB3032-100]

3 - AgileTV CDN Manager (esb3027)

Centralized Management of AgileTV CDN Director

3.1 - Getting Started

Getting Started Guide

Introduction

The ESB3027 AgileTV CDN Manager is a suite of services responsible for coordinating the Content Delivery Network (CDN) operations. It provides essential APIs and features supporting the ESB3024 AgileTV CDN Director. Key capabilities include:

Centralized user management for authentication and authorization Configuration services, APIs, and user interfaces CDN usage monitoring and metrics reporting License-based tracking, monitoring, and billing Core API services Event coordination and synchronization The software can be deployed as either a self-managed cluster or in a public cloud environment such as AWS. Designed as a cloud-native application following CNCF best practices, its deployment varies slightly depending on the environment:

Self-hosted: A lightweight Kubernetes cluster runs on bare-metal or virtual machines within the customer’s network. The application is deployed within this cluster.

Public cloud: The cloud provider manages the cluster infrastructure, with the application deploying into it. The differences are primarily operational; the software’s functionality remains consistent across environments, with distinctions clearly noted in this guide.

Since deployment relies on Kubernetes, familiarity with key tools is essential:

helm: The package manager for Kubernetes, used for installing, upgrading, rolling back, and removing application charts. Helm charts are collections of templates and default values that generate Kubernetes manifests for deployment.

kubectl: The primary command-line tool for managing Kubernetes resources and applications. In a self-hosted setup, it’s typically used from the control plane nodes; in cloud environments, it may be run locally, often from your laptop or desktop.

Cloud provider tools: In cloud environments, familiarity with CLI tools like awscli and the WebUI is also required for managing infrastructure.

Architectural Overview

See the Architecture Guide.

Installation Overview

The installation process for the manager varies depending on the environment.

Self-hosted: Begin by deploying a lightweight Kubernetes cluster. The installation ISO includes an installer for a simple K3s cluster, a Rancher Labs Kubernetes distribution.

Public cloud: Use your cloud provider’s tooling to deploy the cluster. Specific instructions are beyond this document’s scope, as they vary by provider.

Once the cluster is operational, the remaining steps are the same: deploy the manager software using Helm.

The following sections provide an overview based on your environment. For detailed instructions, refer to the Installation Guide.

Hardware Requirements

In a Kubernetes cluster, each node has a fixed amount of resources—such as CPU, memory, and free disk space. Pods are assigned to nodes based on resource availability. The control plane uses a best-effort approach to schedule pods on nodes with the lowest overall utilization.

Kubernetes manifests for each deployment specify both resource requests and limits for each pod. A node must have at least the requested resources available to schedule a pod there. Since each replica of a deployment requires the same resource requests, the total resource consumption depends on the number of replicas, which is configurable.

Additionally, a Horizontal Pod Autoscaler can automatically adjust the number of replicas based on resource utilization, within defined minimum and maximum bounds.

Because of this, the hardware requirements for deploying the software depend heavily on expected load, configuration, and cluster size. Nonetheless, there are some general recommendations for hardware selection.

See the System Requirements Guide for details about the recommended hardware, supported operating systems, and networking requirements.

Installation Guide

The installation instructions can be found in the Installation Guide.

Configuration Reference

A detailed look at the configuration can be found in the Configuration Reference Guide.

3.2 - System Requirements Guide

Cluster Sizing, Hardware, Operating System, and Networking Requirements

Cluster Sizing

The ESB3027 AgileTV CDN Manager requires a minimum of three machines for production deployment. While it’s possible to run the software on a single node in a lab environment, such an setup will not offer optimal performance or high availability.

A typical cluster comprises nodes assigned to either a Server or Agent role. Server nodes are responsible for running the control plane software, which manages the cluster, and they can also host application workloads if configured accordingly. Agent nodes, on the other hand, execute the application containers (workloads) but do not participate in the control plane or quorum. They serve to scale capacity as needed. See the Installation Guide for more information about the role types and responsibilities.

For high availability, it is essential to have an odd number of Server nodes. The minimum recommended is three, which allows the cluster to tolerate the loss of one server node. Increasing the Server nodes to five enhances resilience, enabling the cluster to withstand the loss of two server nodes. The critical factor is that more than half of the Server nodes are available; this quorum ensures the cluster remains operational. The loss of Agent nodes does not impact quorum, though workloads on failed nodes are automatically migrated if there is sufficient capacity.

Hardware Requirements

Single-Node Lab Cluster (Acceptance Testing)

For customer acceptance testing in a single-node lab environment, the following hardware is required. These requirements match the Lab Install Guide and are intended for non-production, single-node clusters only:

	CPU	Memory	Disk
Minimum	8 Cores	16GB	128GB
Recommended	12 Cores	24GB	128GB

Disk space should be available in the /var partition

Note: These requirements are for lab/acceptance testing only. For production workloads, see below.

Production Cluster (3 or More Nodes)

The following tables outline the minimum and recommended hardware specifications for different node roles within a production cluster. All disk space values refer to the available space on the /var/lib/longhorn partition. Additional capacity may be needed in other locations not specified here; it is advisable to follow the operating system vendor’s recommendations for those areas. For optimal performance, it is recommended to use SSDs or similar high-speed disks for Longhorn storage. Both virtual machines and bare-metal hardware are supported; however, hosting multiple nodes under a single hypervisor can impact performance.

Server Role - Control Plane only

	CPU	Memory	Disk
Minimum	4 Cores	8GB	64GB
Recommended	8 Cores	16GB	128GB

Disk space should be available in the /var partition

Agent Role

	CPU	Memory	Disk
Minimum	8 Cores	16GB	128GB
Recommended	16 Cores	32GB	256GB

Disk space should be available in the /var partition

Server Role - Control Plane + Workloads

	CPU	Memory	Disk
Minimum	12 Cores	24GB	128GB
Recommended	24 Cores	48GB	256GB

Disk space should be available in the /var partition

Operating System Requirements

Operating System	Supported
RedHat 7	No
RedHat 8	Yes
RedHat 9	Yes
RedHat 10	Untested

We currently support RedHat Enterprise Linux or any compatible clone such as Oracle Linux, Alma Linux, etc., as long as the major version is listed as supported in the above table.

SELinux support will be installed if SELinux is “Enforcing” when installing the ESB3027 AgileTV CDN Manager cluster.

Networking Requirements

A minimum of 1 Network Interface Card must be present and configured as the default gateway on the node when the cluster is installed. If the node does not have an interface with the default route, a default route must be configured. See the Installation Guide for details.

3.3 - Architecture Guide

General Architectural Overview

Kubernetes Architecture

Kubernetes is an open-source container orchestration platform that simplifies the deployment, management, and scaling of containerized applications. It provides a robust framework to run applications reliably across a cluster of machines by abstracting the complexities of the underlying infrastructure. At its core, Kubernetes manages resources through various objects that define how applications are deployed and maintained.

Nodes are the physical or virtual machines that make up the Kubernetes cluster. Each node runs a container runtime, the kubelet agent, and other necessary components to host and manage containers. The smallest deployable units in Kubernetes are Pods, which typically consist of one or more containers sharing storage, network, and a specified way to run the containers. Containers within Pods are the actual runtime instances of the applications.

To manage the lifecycle of applications, Kubernetes offers different controllers such as Deployments and StatefulSets. Deployments are used for stateless applications, enabling easy rolling updates and scaling. StatefulSets, on the other hand, are designed for stateful applications that require persistent storage and stable network identities, like databases. Kubernetes also uses Services to provide a stable network endpoint that abstracts Pods, facilitating reliable communication within the application or from outside the cluster, often distributing traffic load across multiple Pods.

graph TD
    subgraph Cluster
        direction TB
        Node1["Node"]
        Node2["Node"]
    end

    subgraph "Workloads"
        Deployment["Deployment (stateless)"]
        StatefulSet["StatefulSet (stateful)"]
        Pod1["Pod"]
        Pod2["Pod"]
        Container1["Container"]
        Container2["Container"]
    end

    subgraph "Networking"
        Service["Service"]
    end

    Node1 -->|Hosts| Pod1
    Node2 -->|Hosts| Pod2
    Deployment -->|Manages| Pod1
    StatefulSet -->|Manages| Pod2
    Pod1 -->|Contains| Container1
    Pod2 -->|Contains| Container2
    Service -->|Provides endpoint to| Pod1
    Service -->|Provides endpoint to| Pod2

Additional Concepts

Both Deployments and StatefulSets can be scaled by adjusting the number of Pod replicas. In a Deployment, replicas are considered identical clones of the Pod, and a Service typically performs load balancing across them. Each replica in a ReplicaSet is assigned a fixed name, usually following a pattern like <name>-<index>, for example, postgresql-0, postgresql-1, and so on.

Many applications use a fixed number of replicas set through Helm, which remains constant regardless of system load. Alternatively, for more dynamic scaling, a Horizontal Pod Autoscaler (HPA) can be used to automatically adjust the number of replicas between a defined minimum and maximum based on real-time load metrics. In public cloud environments, a Vertical Pod Autoscaler (VPA) may also be employed to dynamically scale the number of nodes, but since this feature is not supported in self-hosted setups and depends on the specific cloud provider’s implementation, it is less commonly used in on-premises environments.

Architectural Diagram

graph TD
    subgraph Cluster
        direction TB
        PostgreSQL[PostgreSQL Database]
        Kafka[kafka-controller Pods]
        Redis[Redis Master & Replicas]
        VictoriaMetrics[VictoriaMetrics]
        Prometheus[Prometheus Server]
        Grafana[Grafana Dashboard]
        Gateway[Nginx Gateway]
        Confd[Confd]
        Manager[ACD-Manager]
        Frontend[MIB Frontend]
        ZITADEL[Zitadel]
        Telegraf[Telegraf]
        AlertManager[Alertmanager]
    end

    PostgreSQL -->|Stores data| Manager
    Kafka -->|Streams data| Manager
    Redis -->|Cache / Message Broker| Manager
    VictoriaMetrics -->|Billing data| Grafana
    Prometheus -->|Billing data| VictoriaMetrics
    Prometheus -->|Monitoring data| Grafana
    Manager -->|Metrics & Monitoring| Prometheus
    Manager -->|Alerting| AlertManager
    Manager -->|User Interface| Frontend
    Manager -->|Authentication| ZITADEL
    Frontend -->|Authentication| Manager
    Confd -->|Config Updates| Manager
    Telegraf -->|System Metrics| Prometheus
    Gateway -->|Proxies| Director[Director APIs]

    style PostgreSQL fill:#f9f,stroke:#333,stroke-width:1px
    style Kafka fill:#ccf,stroke:#333,stroke-width:1px
    style Redis fill:#cfc,stroke:#333,stroke-width:1px
    style VictoriaMetrics fill:#ffc,stroke:#333,stroke-width:1px
    style Prometheus fill:#ccf,stroke:#333,stroke-width:1px
    style Grafana fill:#f99,stroke:#333,stroke-width:1px
    style Gateway fill:#eef,stroke:#333,stroke-width:1px
    style Confd fill:#eef,stroke:#333,stroke-width:1px
    style Manager fill:#eef,stroke:#333,stroke-width:1px
    style Frontend fill:#eef,stroke:#333,stroke-width:1px
    style ZITADEL fill:#eef,stroke:#333,stroke-width:1px
    style Telegraf fill:#eef,stroke:#333,stroke-width:1px
    style AlertManager fill:#eef,stroke:#333,stroke-width:1px

Cluster Scaling

Most components, of the cluster can be horizontally scaled, as long as sufficient resources exist in the cluster to support the additional pods. There are a few exceptions however. The Selection Input service, currently does not support scaling as the order in which Kafka records would no longer be maintained among different consumer group members. Services such as PostgreSQL, Prometheus and VictoriaMetrics also do not support scaling at the present time due to the additional configuration requirements. Most if not all of the other services may be scaled, either by explicitly setting the number of replicas in the configuration or in some cases by enabling and configuring the horizontal pod autoscaler.

The Horizontal Pod Autoscaler, monitors the resource utilization of the Pods in a deployment, and based on some configurable metrics, will manage the scaling between a preset minimum and maximum number of replicas. See the Configuration Guide for more information.

Kubernetes automatically selects which node will run the pods based on several factors including, the resource utilization of the nodes, any pod and node affinity rules, selector labels, among other considerations. By default, all nodes with the ability to run workloads of both Server and Agent roles are considered unless specific configuration for node and pod affinity rules have been defined.

Summary

The acd-manager interacts with core components like PostgreSQL, Kafka, and Redis for data storage, messaging, and caching.
It exposes APIs via the API Gateway and integrates with Zitadel for authentication.
Monitoring and alerting are handled through Prometheus, VictoriaMetrics, Grafana, and Alertmanager.
Supporting services like Confd facilitate configuration management, while Telegraf collects system metrics.

3.4 - Quick Start Guide

Quick start guide for deploying the cluster

Lab Install Guide

This section describes a simplified installation process for customer acceptance testing in a single-node lab environment. Unlike the production Quick Start Guide (which assumes 3 or more nodes), the Lab Install Guide is intended for customers to perform acceptance testing prior to installing a production environment.

System Requirements:

RHEL 8 or 9 (or equivalent) with at least a minimal installation
8-core CPU
16 GB RAM
128 GB available disk space in the /var partition

Step 1: Mount the ISO

mkdir -p /mnt/esb3027
mount -o loop,ro esb3027-acd-manager-X.Y.Z.iso /mnt/esb3027

Step 2: Install the Base Cluster Software

/mnt/esb3027/install

Step 3: (Air-gapped only) Mount the Extras ISO and Load Images

mkdir -p /mnt/esb3027-extras
mount -o loop,ro esb3027-acd-manager-extras-X.Y.Z.iso /mnt/esb3027-extras
/mnt/esb3027-extras/load-images

Step 4: Deploy the Cluster Helm Chart

helm install --wait --timeout 10m acd-cluster /mnt/esb3027/helm/charts/acd-cluster

Step 5: Deploy the Manager Helm Chart

helm install acd-manager /mnt/esb3027/helm/charts/acd-manager --values ~/values.yaml --timeout 10m

Step 6: Next Steps

See the Post Install Guide for post-installation steps and recommendations.

You can now access the manager and begin acceptance testing. For full configuration details, see the full Installation Guide.

Quick Start Guide

This section provides a concise, step-by-step summary for installing the ESB3027 AgileTV CDN Manager cluster in a production environment. The Quick Start Guide is intended for production deployments with three or more nodes, providing high availability and scalability. For full details, see the full Installation Guide.

Step 1: Mount the ISO

mkdir -p /mnt/esb3027
mount -o loop,ro esb3027-acd-manager-X.Y.Z.iso /mnt/esb3027

Step 2: Install the Base Cluster Software

/mnt/esb3027/install

Step 3: (Air-gapped only) Mount the Extras ISO and Load Images

mkdir -p /mnt/esb3027-extras
mount -o loop,ro esb3027-acd-manager-extras-X.Y.Z.iso /mnt/esb3027-extras
/mnt/esb3027-extras/load-images

Step 4: Fetch the Node Token

cat /var/lib/rancher/k3s/server/node-token

Step 5: Join Additional Nodes

On each additional node, repeat Step 1, then run:

/mnt/esb3027/join-server https://<primary-server-ip>:6443 <node-token>
# or for agent nodes:
/mnt/esb3027/join-agent https://<primary-server-ip>:6443 <node-token>

Step 6: Deploy the Cluster Helm Chart

helm install --wait --timeout 10m acd-cluster /mnt/esb3027/helm/charts/acd-cluster

Step 7: Deploy the Manager Helm Chart

helm install acd-manager /mnt/esb3027/helm/charts/acd-manager --values ~/values.yaml --timeout 10m

Step 8: Next Steps

See the Post Install Guide for post-installation steps and recommendations.

For configuration details and troubleshooting, see the full Installation Guide.

3.5 - Installation Guide

How to install ESB3027 AgileTV CDN Manager

SELinux Requirements

SELinux is fully supported provided it is enabled and set to “Enforcing” mode at the time of the initial cluster installation on all Nodes. This is the default configuration for Red Hat Enterprise Linux and its derivatives, such as Oracle Linux and AlmaLinux. If the mode is set to “Enforcing” prior to install time, the necessary SELinux packages will be installed, and the cluster will be started with support for SELinux. For these reasons, enabling SELinux after the initial cluster installation is not supported.

Firewalld Requirements

Please see the Networking Guide for the current firewall recommendations.

Hardware Requirements

Refer to the System Requirements Guide for the current Hardware, Operating System, and Network Requirements.

Networking Requirements

A minimum of one Network Interface Card must be present and configured as the default gateway on the node when the cluster is installed. If the node does not have an interface with the default route, a default route must be configured. Even a black-hole route via a dummy interface will suffice. The K3s software requires a default route in order to auto-detect the node’s primary IP, and for cluster routing to function properly. To add a dummy route do the following:

ip link add dummy0 type dummy
ip link set dummy0 up
ip addr add 203.0.113.254/31 dev dummy0
ip route add default via 203.0.113.255 dev dummy0 metric 1000

Special Considerations when using Multiple Network Interfaces

If there are special network considerations, such as using a non-default interface for cluster communication, that must be configured using the INSTALL_K3S_EXEC environment variable as below before installing the cluster or joining nodes.

As an example, consider the case where the node contains two interfaces, bond0 and bond1, where the default route exists through bond0, but where bond1 should be used for cluster communication. In that case, ensure that the INSTALL_K3S_EXEC environment variable is set as follows in the environment prior to installing or joining the cluster. Assuming that bond1 has the local IP address 10.0.0.10:

export INSTALL_K3S_EXEC="<MODE> --node-ip 10.0.0.10 --flannel-iface=bond1"

Where MODE should be one of server or agent depending on the role of the node. The initial node used to create the cluster MUST be server, and additional nodes vary depending on the role.

Air-Gapped Environments

In air-gapped environments—those without direct Internet access—additional considerations are required. First, on each node, the Operating System’s ISO must be mounted so that dnf can be used to install essential packages included with the OS. Second, the “Extras” ISO from the ESB3027 AgileTV CDN Manager must be mounted to provide access to container images for third-party software that would otherwise be downloaded from public repositories. Details on mounting this ISO and loading the included images are provided below.

Introduction

details about node roles and sizing can be found in the System Requirements Guide. Installing the ESB3027 AgileTV CDN Manager for production requires a minimum of three nodes. More details about node roles and sizing can be found in the System Requirements Guide. Before beginning the installation, select one node as the primary “Server” node. This node will serve as the main installation point. Once additional Server nodes join the cluster, all Server nodes are considered equivalent, and cluster operations can be managed from any of them. The typical process involves installing the primary node as a Server, then adding more Server nodes to expand the cluster, followed by joining Agent nodes as needed to increase capacity.

Roles

All nodes in the cluster have one of two roles. Server nodes run the control-plane software necessary to manage the cluster and provide redundancy. Agent nodes do not run the control-plane software; instead, they are responsible for running the Pods that make up the applications. Jobs are distributed among agent nodes to enable horizontal scalability of workloads. However, agent nodes do not contribute to the cluster’s high availability. If an agent node fails, the Pods assigned to that node are automatically moved to another node, provided sufficient resources are available.

Control-plane only Server nodes

Both server nodes and agent nodes run workloads within the cluster. However, a special attribute called the “CriticalAddonsOnly” taint can be applied to server nodes. This taint prevents the node from scheduling workloads that are not part of the control plane. If the hardware allows, it is recommended to apply this taint to server nodes to separate their responsibilities. Doing so helps prevent misbehaving applications from negatively impacting the overall health of the cluster.

graph TD
    subgraph Cluster
        direction TB
        ServerNodes[Server Nodes]
        AgentNodes[Agent Nodes]
    end

    ServerNodes -->|Manage cluster and control plane| ControlPlane
    ServerNodes -->|Provide redundancy| Redundancy

    AgentNodes -->|Run application Pods| Pods
    Pods -->|Handle workload distribution| Workloads
    AgentNodes -->|Failover: Pods move if node fails| Pods

    ServerNodes -->|Can run Pods unless tainted with CriticalAddonsOnly| PodExecution
    Taint[CriticalAddonsOnly Taint] -->|Applied to server nodes to restrict workload| ServerNodes

For high availability, at least three nodes running the control plane are required, along with at least three nodes running workloads. These can be a combination of server and agent roles, provided that the control-plane nodes are sufficient. If a server node has the “CriticalAddonsOnly” taint applied, an additional agent node must be deployed to ensure workloads can run. For example, the cluster could consist of three untainted server nodes, or two untainted servers, one tainted server, and one agent, or three tainted servers and three agents—all while maintaining at least three control-plane nodes and three workload nodes.

The “CriticalAddonsOnly” taint can be applied to server nodes at any time after cluster installation. However, it only affects Pods scheduled in the future. Existing Pods that have already been assigned to a server node will remain there until they are recreated or rescheduled due to an external event.

kubectl taint nodes <node-name> CriticalAddonsOnly=true:NoSchedule

Where node-name is the hostname of the node for which to apply the taint. Multiple node names may be specified in the same command. This command should only be run from one of the server nodes.

Installing the Primary Server Node

Mount the ESB3027 ISO

Start by mounting the core ESB3027 ISO on the system. There are no limitations on the exact mountpoint used, but for this document, we will assume /mnt/esb3027.

mkdir -p /mnt/esb3027
mount -o loop,ro esb3027-acd-manager-X.Y.Z.iso /mnt/esb3027

Run the installer

Run the install command to install the base cluster software.

/mnt/esb3027/install

(Air-gapped only) Mount the “Extras” ISO and Load Container Images

In an air-gapped environment, after running the installer, the “extras” image must be mounted. This image contains publicly available container images that otherwise would be simply downloaded from the source repositories.

mkdir -p /mnt/esb3027-extras
mount -o loop,ro esb3027-acd-manager-extras-X.Y.Z.iso /mnt/esb3027-extras

The public container images for third-party products such as Kafka, Redis, Zitadel, etc., need to be loaded into the container runtime. An embedded registry mirror is used to distribute these images to other nodes within the cluster, so this only needs to be performed on one machine.

/mnt/esb3027-extras/load-images

Fetch the primary node token

In order to join additional nodes into the cluster, a unique node token must be provided. This token is automatically generated on the primary node during the installation process. Retrieve this now, and take note of it for later use.

cat /var/lib/rancher/k3s/server/node-token

Join Additional Server Nodes

From each additional server node, mount the core ISO and join the cluster using the following commands.

mkdir -p /mnt/esb3027
mount esb3027-acd-manager-X.Y.Z.iso /mnt/esb3027

Obtain the node token from the primary server as you will need to include it in the following command. You will also need the URL to the primary server for which to connect.

/mnt/esb3027/join-server https://primary-server-ip:6443 abcdefg0123456...987654321

Where primary-server-ip is replaced with the IP address to which this node should connect to the primary server, and abcdef...321 is the contents of the node-token retrieved from the primary server.

Repeat the above steps on each additional Server node in the cluster.

Join Agent Nodes

From each additional agent node, mount the core ISO and join the cluster using the following commands.

mkdir -p /mnt/esb3027
mount esb3027-acd-manager-X.Y.Z.iso /mnt/esb3027

Obtain the node token from the primary server as you will need to include it in the following command. You will also need the URL to the primary server for which to connect.

/mnt/esb3027/join-agent https://primary-server-ip:6443 abcdefg0123456...987654321

Repeat the above steps on each additional Agent node in the cluster.

Verify the state of the cluster

At this point, a generic Kubernetes cluster should have multiple nodes connected and be marked Ready. Verify this is the case by running the following from any one of the Server nodes.

kubectl get nodes

Each node in the cluster should be listed in the output with the status “Ready”, and the Server nodes should have “control-plane” in the listed Roles. If this is not the case, see the Troubleshooting Guide to help diagnose the problem.

Deploy the cluster helm chart

The acd-cluster helm chart, which is included on the core ISO, contains the clustering software which is required for self-hosted clusters, but may be optional in Cloud deployments. Currently this consists of a PostgreSQL database server, but additional components may be added in later releases.

helm install --wait --timeout 10m acd-cluster /mnt/esb3027/helm/charts/acd-cluster

Deploying the Manager chart

The acd-manager helm chart is used to deploy the acd-manager application as well as any of the third-party services on which the chart depends. Installing this chart requires at least a minimal configuration to be applied. To get started, either copy the default values.yaml file from the chart directory /mnt/esb3027/helm/charts/acd-manager/values.yaml or copy the following minimal template to a writable location such as the user’s home directory.

global:
  hosts:
    manager:
      - host: manager.local
    routers:
      - name: director-1
        address: 192.0.2.1
      - name: director-2
        address: 192.0.2.2
zitadel:
  zitadel:
    configmapConfig:
      ExternalDomain: manager.local

Where:

manager.local is either the external IP or resolvable DNS name used to access the manager’s cluster.
All director instances should be listed in the global.hosts.routers section. The name field is used in URLs, and must consist of only alpha-numeric characters or ‘.’, ‘-’, or ‘_’.

Further details on the available configuration options in the default values.yaml file can be found in the Configuration Guide.

You must set at a minimum the following properties:

Property	Type	Description
global.hosts.manager	Array	List of external IP addresses or DNS hostnames for each node in the cluster
global.hosts.router	Array	List of `name` and `address` for each instance of ESB3024 AgileTV CDN Director
zitadel.zitadel.configmapConfig.ExternalDomain	String	External DNS domain name or IP address of one manager node. This must match the first entry from `global.hosts.manager`

Note! The Zitadel ExternalDomain must match the hostname or IP address given in the first global.hosts.manager entry, and MUST match the Origin used when accessing Zitadel. This is enforced by CORS.

Hint: For non-air-gapped environments, where no DNS servers are present, a third-party service sslip.io may be used to provide a resolvable DNS name which can be used for both the global.hosts.manager and Zitadel ExternalDomain entries. Any IP address passed as W.X.Y.Z.sslip.io will resolve to the IP W.X.Y.Z

Only the value used for Zitadel’s ExternalDomain may be used to access Zitadel due to CORS restrictions. E.g. if that is set to “10.10.10.10.sslip.io”, then Zitadel must be accessed via the URL https://10.10.10.10.sslip.io/ui/console. This must match the first entry in global.hosts.manager as that entry will be used by internal services that need to interact with Zitadel, such as the frontend GUI and the manager API services.

Importing TLS Certificates

By default, the manager will generate a self-signed TLS certificate for use with the cluster ingress.

In production environments, it is recommended to use a valid TLS certificate issued by a trusted Certificate Authority (CA).

To install the TLS certificate pair into the ingress controller, the certificate and key must be saved in a Kubernetes secret. The simplest way of doing this is to let Helm generate the secret by including the PEM formatted certificate and private key directly in the configuration values. Alternatively, the secret can be created manually and simply referenced by the configuration.

Option 1: Let Helm manage the secret

To have Helm automatically manage the secret based on the PEM formatted certificate and key, add a record to ingress.secrets as described in the following snippet.

ingress:
  secrets:
    - name: <secret-name>
      key: |-
        -----BEGIN RSA PRIVATE KEY-----
        ...
        -----END RSA PRIVATE KEY-----
      certificate: |-
        -----BEGIN CERTIFICATE-----
        ...
        -----END CERTIFICATE-----

Option 2: Manually creating the secret

To manually create the secret in Kubernetes, execute the following command: This will create a secret named “secret-name”.

kubectl create secret tls secret-name --cert=tls.crt --key=tls.key

Configure the Ingress

The ingress controllers must be configured as to the name of the secret holding the certificate and key files. Additionally, the DNS hostname or IP address, covered by the certificate, which Must be used to access the ingress, must be set in the configuration.

ingress:
  hostname: <dns-hostname>
  tls: true
  secretName: <secret-name>

zitadel:
  ingress:
    tls:
      - hosts:
          - <dns-hostname>
        secretName: <secret-name>

confd:
  ingress:
    hostname: <dns-hostname>
    tls: true
    secretName: <secret-name>

mib-frontend:
  ingress:
    hostname: <dns-hostname>
    tls: true
    secretName: <secret-name>

dns-hostname - A valid DNS hostname for the cluster which is valid for the certificate. For compatibility with Zitadel and CORS restrictions, this MUST be the same DNS hostname listed as the first entry in global.hosts.manager.
secret-name - An arbitry name used to identify the Kubernetes secret containing the TLS certificate and key. This has a maximum length limitation of 53 characters.

Loading Maxmind GeoIP databases

The Maxmind GeoIP databases are required if GeoIP lookups are to be performed by the manager. If this functionality is used, then Maxmind formatted GeoIP databases must be configured. The following databases are used by the manager.

GeoIP2-City.mmdb - The City Database.
GeoLite2-ASN.mmdb - The ASN Database.
GeoIP2-Anonymous-IP.mmdb - The VPN and Anonymous IP database.

A helper utility has been provided on the ISO called generate-maxmind-volume that will prompt the user for the locations of these 3 database files, and the name of a volume, which will be created in Kubernetes. After running this command, set the manager.maxmindDbVolume property in the configuration to the volume name.

To run the utility, use:

/mnt/esb3027/generate-maxmind-volume

Installing the Chart

Install the acd-manager helm chart using the following command: (This assumes the configuration is in ~/values.yaml)

helm install acd-manager /mnt/esb3027/helm/charts/acd-manager --values ~/values.yaml --timeout 10m

By default, there is not expected to be much output from the helm install command itself. If you would like to see more detailed information in real-time throughout the deployment process, you can add the --debug flag to the command:

helm install acd-manager /mnt/esb3027/helm/charts/acd-manager --values ~/values.yaml --timeout 10m --debug

Note: The --timeout 10m flag increases the default Helm timeout from 5 minutes to 10 minutes. This is recommended because the default may not be sufficient on slower hardware or in resource-constrained environments. You may need to adjust the timeout value further depending on your system’s performance or deployment conditions.

Monitor the chart rollout with the following command:

kubectl get pods

The output of which should look similar to the following:

NAME                                             READY   STATUS      RESTARTS   AGE
acd-cluster-postgresql-0                         1/1     Running     0          44h
acd-manager-6c85ddd747-5j5gt                     1/1     Running     0          43h
acd-manager-confd-558f49ffb5-n8dmr               1/1     Running     0          43h
acd-manager-gateway-7594479477-z4bbr             1/1     Running     0          43h
acd-manager-grafana-78c76d8c5-c2tl6              1/1     Running     0          43h
acd-manager-kafka-controller-0                   2/2     Running     0          43h
acd-manager-kafka-controller-1                   2/2     Running     0          43h
acd-manager-kafka-controller-2                   2/2     Running     0          43h
acd-manager-metrics-aggregator-f6ff99654-tjbfs   1/1     Running     0          43h
acd-manager-mib-frontend-67678c69df-tkklr        1/1     Running     0          43h
acd-manager-prometheus-alertmanager-0            1/1     Running     0          43h
acd-manager-prometheus-server-768f5d5c-q78xb     1/1     Running     0          43h
acd-manager-redis-master-0                       2/2     Running     0          43h
acd-manager-redis-replicas-0                     2/2     Running     0          43h
acd-manager-selection-input-844599bc4d-x7dct     1/1     Running     0          43h
acd-manager-telegraf-585dfc5ff8-n8m5c            1/1     Running     0          43h
acd-manager-victoria-metrics-single-server-0     1/1     Running     0          43h
acd-manager-zitadel-69b6546f8f-v9lkp             1/1     Running     0          43h
acd-manager-zitadel-69b6546f8f-wwcmx             1/1     Running     0          43h
acd-manager-zitadel-init-hnr5p                   0/1     Completed   0          43h
acd-manager-zitadel-setup-kjnwh                  0/2     Completed   0          43h

The output contains a “READY” column, which indicates the number of ready pods on the left, and the number of requested pods on the right. Pods with status “Completed” are one time commands that have terminated successfully and can be ignored in this output. For “Running” pods, once all pods have the same number on both sides of the “READY” status the rollout is complete.

If a Pod is marked as “CrashLoopBackoff” or “Error” this means that either one of the containers in the pod has failed to deploy, or that the container has terminated in an Error state. See the Troubleshooting Guide to help diagnose the problem. The Kubernetes cluster will retry failed pod deployments several times, and the number in the “RESTARTS” column will show the number of times that has happened. If a pod restarts during the initial rollout, this may simply be that the state of the cluster was not as expected by the pod at that time, and this can be safely ignored. After the initial rollout has completed, the pods should stabilize, and multiple restarts may be an indication that something is wrong. In that case, refer to the Troubleshooting Guide for more information.

Next Steps

For post-installation steps, see the Post Install Guide.

3.6 - Configuration Guide

Configuration Guide

Overview

When deploying the acd-manager helm chart, a configuration file containing the chart values must be supplied to Helm. The default values.yaml file can be found on the ISO in the chart’s directory. Helm does not require that the complete file be supplied at install time, as any files supplied via the --values command will be merged with the defaults from the chart. This allows the operator to maintain a much simpler configuration file containing only the modified values. Additionally, values may be individually overridden by passing --set key=value to the Helm command. However, this is discouraged for all but temporary cases, as the same arguments must be specified any time the chart is updated.

The default values.yaml file is located on the ISO under the subpath /helm/charts/acd-manager/values.yaml Since the ISO is mounted read-only, you must copy this file to a writable location to make changes. Helm supports multiple --values arguments where all files will be merged left-to-right before being merged with the chart defaults.

Applying the Configuration

After updating the configuration file, you must perform a helm upgrade for the changes to be propagated to the cluster. Helm tracks the changes in each revision, and supports rolling back to previous configurations. During the initial chart installation, the configuration values will be supplied to Helm through the helm install command, but to update an existing installation, the following command line shall be used instead.

helm upgrade acd-manager /mnt/esb3027/helm/charts/acd-manager --values /path/to/values.yaml

Note: Both the helm install and helm upgrade commands take many of the same arguments, and a shortcut exists helm upgrade --install which can be used in place of either, to update an existing installation, or deploy a new installation if one did not previously exist.

If the configuration update was unsuccessful, you can roll back to a previous revision using the following command. Keep in mind, this will not change the values.yaml file on disk, so you must revert the changes to that file manually, or restore the file from a backup.

helm rollback acd-manager <revision_number>

You can view the current revision number of all installed charts with helm list --all

If you wish to temporarily change one or more values, for instance to increase the manager log level from “info” to “debug”, you can do so with the --set command.

helm upgrade acd-manager /mnt/esb3027/helm/charts/acd-manager --values /path/to/values.yaml --set manager.logLevel=debug

It is also possible to split the values.yaml into multiple individual files, for instance to separate manager and metrics values in two files using the following commands. All files will be merged left to right by Helm. Take notice however, that doing this will require all values files to be supplied in the same order any time a helm upgrade is performed in the future.

helm upgrade acd-manager /mnt/esb3027/helm/charts/acd-manager --values /path/to/values1.yaml --values /path/to/values2.yaml

Before applying new configuration, it is recommended to perform a dry-run to ensure that the templates can be rendered properly. This does not guarantee that the templates will be accepted by Kubernetes, only that the templates can be properly rendered using the supplied values. The rendered templates will be output to the console.

helm upgrade ... --dry-run

In the event that the helm upgrade fails to produce the desired results, e.g. if the correct configuration did not propagate to all required pods, simply performing a helm uninstall acd-manager followed by the original helm install command will force all pods to be redeployed. This is service affecting however and should only be performed as a last-resort as all pods will be destroyed and recreated.

Configuration Reference

In this section, we break down the configuration file and look more in-depth into the options available.

Globals

The global section, is a special-case section in Helm, intended for sharing global values between charts. most of the configuration properties here can be ignored, as they are intended as a means of globally providing defaults that affect nested subcharts. The only necessary field here is the hosts configuration.

global:
  hosts:
    manager:
      - host: manager.local
    routers:
      - name: default
        address: 127.0.0.1
    edns_proxy: []
    geoip: []

key	Type	Description
global.hosts.manager	Array	List of external IP addresses or DNS hostnames for all nodes in the Manager cluster
global.hosts.routers	Array	List of ESB3024 AgileTV CDN Director instances
global.hosts.edns_proxy	Array	List of EDNS Proxy addresses
global.hosts.geoip	Array	List of GeoIP Proxy addresses

The global.hosts.manager record contains a list of objects containing a single host field. The first of which is used by several internal services to contact Zitadel for user authentication and authorization. Since Zitadel, which provides these services enforces CORS protections, this must match exacly the Origin used to access Zitadel.

The global.hosts.routers record contains a list of objects each with a name and address field. The name field is a unique identifier used in URLs to refer to the Director instance, and the address field is the IP address or DNS name used to communicate with the Director node. Only Director instances run outside of this cluster need to be specified here, as instances running in Kubernetes can utilize the cluster’s auto- discovery system.

The global.hosts.edns_proxy record contains a list of objects each with an address and port field. This list is currently unused.

The global.hosts.geoip record contains a list of objects each with an address and port field. This list should refer to the GeoIP Proxies used by the Frontend GUI. Currently only one GeoIP proxy is supported.

Common Parameters

This section contains common parameters that are namespaced to the acd-manager chart. These should be left at their default values under most circumstances.

Key	Type	Description
kubeVersion	String	Override the Kubernetes version reported by .Capabilities
apiVersion	String	Override the Kubernetes API version reported by .Capabilities
nameOverride	String	Partially override `common.names.name`
fullnameOverride	String	Fully override `common.names.name`
namespaceOverride	String	Fully override `common.names.namespace`
commonLabels	Object	Labels to add to all deployed objects
commonAnnotations	Object	Annotations to add to all deployed objects
clusterDomain	String	Kubernetes cluster domain name
extraDeploy	Array	List of extra Kubernetes objects to deploy with the release
diagnosticMode.enabled	Boolean	Enable Diagnostic mode (All probes will be disabled and the command will be overridden)
diagnosticMode.command	Array	Override the command when diagnostic mode is enabled
diagnosticMode.args	Array	Override the command line arguments when diagnostic mode is enabled

Manager

This section represents the configuration options for the ACD Manager’s API server.

Key	Type	Description
manager.image.registry	String	The docker registry
manager.image.repository	String	The docker repository
manager.image.tag	String	Override the image tag
manager.image.digest	String	Override a specific image digest
manager.image.pullPolicy	String	The image pull policy
manager.image.pullSecrets	Array	A list of secret names containing credentials for the configured image registry
manager.image.debug	boolean	Enable debug mode for the containers
manager.logLevel	String	Set the log level used in the containers
manager.replicaCount	Number	Number of manager replicas to deploy. This value is ignored if the Horizontal Pod Autoscaler is enabled
manager.containerPorts.http	Number	Port number exposed by the container for HTTP traffic
manager.extraContainerPorts	Array	List of additional container ports to expose
manager.livenessProbe	Object	Configuration for the liveness probe on the manager container
manager.readinessProbe	Object	Configuration for the readiness probe on the manager container
manager.startupProbe	Object	Configuration for the startup probe on the manager container
manager.customLivenessProbe	Object	Override the default liveness probe
manager.customReadinessProbe	Object	Override the default readiness probe
manager.customStartupProbe	Object	Override the default startup probe
manager.resourcePreset	String	Set the manager resources according to one common preset
manager.resources	Object	Set request and limits for different resources like CPU or memory
manager.podSecurityContext	Object	Set the security context for the manager pods
manager.containerSecurityContext	Object	Set the security context for all containers inside the manager pods
manager.maxmindDbVolume	String	Name of a Kubernetes volume containing Maxmind GeoIP, ASN, and Anonymous IP databases
manager.existingConfigmap	String	Reserved for future use
manager.command	Array	Command executed inside the manager container
manager.args	Array	Arguments passed to the command
manager.automountServiceAccountToken	Boolean	Mount Service Account token in manager pods
manager.hostAliases	Array	Add additional entries to /etc/hosts in the pod
manager.deploymentAnnotations	Object	Annotations for the manager deployment
manager.podLabels	Object	Extra labels for manager pods
manager.podAnnotations	Object	Extra annotations for the manager pods
manager.podAffinityPreset	String	Allowed values `soft` or `hard`
manager.podAntiAffinityPreset	String	Allowed values `soft` or `hard`
manager.nodeAffinityPreset.type	String	Allowed values `soft` or `hard
manager.nodeAffinityPreset.key	String	Node label key to match
manager.nodeAffinityPreset.values	Array	List of node labels to match
manager.affinity	Object	Override the affinity for pod assignments
manager.nodeSelector	Object	Node labels for manager pod assignments
manager.tolerations	Array	Tolerations for manager pod assignment
manager.updateStrategy.type	String	Can be set to `RollingUpdate` or `Recreate`
manager.priorityClassName	String	Manager pods’ priorityClassName
manager.topologySpreadConstraints	Array	Topology Spread Constraints for manager pod assignment spread across the cluster among failure-domains
manager.schedulerName	String	Name of the Kubernetes scheduler for manager pods
manager.terminationGracePeriodSeconds	Number	Seconds manager pods need to terminate gracefully
manager.lifecycleHooks	Object	Lifecycle Hooks for manager containers to automate configuration before or after startup
manager.extraEnvVars	Array	List of extra environment variables to add to the manager containers
manager.extraEnvVarsCM	Array	List of Config Maps containing extra environment variables to pass to the Manager pods
manager.extraEnvVarsSecret	Array	List of Secrets containing extra environment variables to pass to the Manager pods
manager.extraVolumes	Array	Optionally specify extra list of additional volumes for the manager pods
manager.extraVolumeMounts	Array	Optionally specify extra list of additional volume mounts for the manager pods
manager.sidecars	Array	Add additional sidecar containers to the manager pods
manager.initContainers	Array	Add additional init containers to the manager pods
manager.pdb.create	Boolean	Enable / disable a Pod Disruption Budget creation
manager.pdb.minAvailable	Number	Minimum number/precentage of pods that should remain scheduled
manager.pdb.maxUnavailable	Number	Maximum number/percentage of pods that may be made unavailable
manager.autoscaling.vpa	Object	Vertical Pod Autoscaler Configuration. Not used for self-hosted clusters
manager.autoscaling.hpa	Object	Horizontal Pod Autoscaler. Automatically scale the number of replicas based on resource utilization

Gateway

The parameters under the gateway namespace are mostly identical to those of the manager section above, but which affect the NGinx Proxy Gateway service. The additional properites here are described in the following table.

Key	Type	Description
gateway.service.type	String	Service Type
gateway.service.ports.http	Number	The service port
gateway.service.nodePorts	Object	Allows configuring the exposed node port if the `service.type` is “NodePort”
gateway.service.clusterIP	String	Override the ClusterIP address if the `service.type` is “ClusterIP”
gateway.service.loadBalancerIP	String	Override the LoadBalancer IP address if the `service.type` is “LoadBalancer”
gateway.service.loadBalancerSourceRanges	Array	Source CIDRs for the LoadBalancer
gateway.service.externalTrafficPolicy	String	External Traffic Policy for the service
gateway.service.annotations	Object	Additional custom annotations for the manager service
gateway.service.extraPorts	Array	Extra ports to expose in the manager service. (Normally used with the `sidecar` value)
gateway.service.sessionAffinity	String	Control where client requests go, to the same pod or round-robin
gateway.service.sessionAffinityConfig	Object	Additional settings for the sessionAffinity

Selection Input

The parameters under the selectionInput namespace are mostly identical to those of the manager section above, but which affect the selection input consumer service. The additional properties here are described in the following table.

Key	Type	Description
selectionInput.kafkaTopic	String	Name of the selection input kafka topic

Metrics Aggregator

The parameters under the metricsAggregator namespace are mostly identical to those of the manager section above, but which affect the metrics aggregator service.

Traffic Exposure

These parameters determine how the various services are exposed over the network.

Key	Type	Description
service.type	String	Service Type
service.ports.http	Number	The service port
service.nodePorts	Object	Allows configuring the exposed node port if the `service.type` is “NodePort”
service.clusterIP	String	Override the ClusterIP address if the `service.type` is “ClusterIP”
service.loadBalancerIP	String	Override the LoadBalancer IP address if the `service.type` is “LoadBalancer”
service.loadBalancerSourceRanges	Array	Source CIDRs for the LoadBalancer
service.externalTrafficPolicy	String	External Traffic Policy for the service
service.annotations	Object	Additional custom annotations for the manager service
service.extraPorts	Array	Extra ports to expose in the manager service. (Normally used with the `sidecar` value)
service.sessionAffinity	String	Control where client requests go, to the same pod or round-robin
service.sessionAffinityConfig	Object	Additional settings for the sessionAffinity
networkPolicy.enabled	Boolean	Specifies whether a NetworkPolicy should be created
networkPolicy.allowExternal	Boolean	Doesn’t require server labels for connections
networkPolicy.allowExternalEgress	Boolean	Allow the pod to access any range of port and all destinations
networkPolicy.allowExternalClientAccess	Boolean	Allow access from pods with client label set to “true”
networkPolicy.extraIngress	Array	Add extra ingress rules to the Network Policy
networkPolicy.extraEgress	Array	Add extra egress rules to the Network Policy
networkPolicy.ingressPodMatchLabels	Object	Labels to match to allow traffic from other pods.
networkPolicy.ingressNSMatchLabels	Object	Labels to match to allow traffic from other namespaces.
networkPolicy.ingressNSPodMatchLabels	Object	Pod labels to match to allow traffic from other namespaces.
ingress.enabled	Boolean	Enable the ingress record generation for the manager
ingress.pathType	String	Ingress Path Type
ingress.apiVersion	String	Force Ingress API version
ingress.hostname	String	Match HOST header for the ingress record
ingress.ingressClassName	String	Ingress Class that will be used to implement the Ingress
ingress.path	String	Default path for the Ingress record
ingress.annotations	Object	Additional annotations for the Ingress resource.
ingress.tls	Boolean	Enable TLS configuration for the host defined at `ingress.hostname`
ingress.selfSigned	Boolean	Create a TLS secret for this ingress record using self-signed certificates generated by Helm
ingress.extraHosts	Array	An array with additional hostnames to be covered by the Ingress record.
ingress.extraPaths	Array	An array of extra path entries to be covered by the Ingress record.
ingress.extraTls	Array	TLS configuration for additional hostnames to be covered with this Ingress record.
ingress.secrets	Array	Custom TLS certificates as secrets
ingress.extraRules	Array	Additional rules to be covered with this Ingress record.

Persistence

The following values control how persistent storage is used by the manager. Currently these have no effect as the Manager does not use any persistent volume claims, however they are documented here as the same properties are used in several subcontainers to configure persistence.

Key	Type	Description
persistence.enabled	Boolean	Enable persistence using Persistent Volume Claims
persistence.mountPath	String	Path where to mount the volume
persistence.subPath	String	The subdirectory of the volume to mount
persistence.storageClass	String	Storage class of backing Persistent Volume Claim
persistence.annotations	Object	Persistent Volume Claim annotations
persistence.accessModes	Array	Persistent Volume Access Modes
persistence.size	String	Size of the data volume
persistence.dataSource	Object	Custom PVC data source
persistence.existingClaim	String	The name of an existing PVC to use for persistence
persistence.selector	Object	Selector to match existing Persistent Volume for data PVC

Other Values

The following are additional parameters for the chart.

Key	Type	Description
defaultInitContainers	Object	Configuration for default init containers.
rbac.create	Boolean	Specifies whether Role-Based Access Control Resources should be created.
rbac.rules	Object	Custom RBAC rules to apply
serviceAccount.create	Boolean	Specifies whether a ServiceAccount should be created
serviceAccount.name	String	Override the ServiceAccount name. If not set, a name will be generated automatically.
serviceAccount.annotations	Object	Additional Service Account annotations (evaluated as a template)
serviceAccount.automountServiceAccountToken	Boolean	Automount the service account token for the service account.
metrics.enabled	Boolean	Enable the export of Prometheus metrics. Not currently implemented
metrics.serviceMonitor.enabled	Boolean	If true, creates a Prometheus Operator ServiceMonitor
metrics.serviceMonitor.namespace	String	Namespace in which Prometheus is running
metrics.serviceMonitor.annotations	Object	Additional custom annotations for the ServiceMonitor
metrics.serviceMonitor.labels	Object	Extra labels for the ServiceMonitor
metrics.serviceMonitor.jobLabel	String	The name of the label on the target service to use as the job name in Prometheus
metrics.serviceMonitor.honorLabels	Boolean	Chooses the metric’s labels on collisions with target labels
metrics.serviceMonitor.tlsConfig	Object	TLS configuration used for scrape endpoints used by Prometheus
metrics.serviceMonitor.interval	Number	Interval at which metrics should be scraped.
metrics.serviceMonitor.scrapeTimeout	Number	Timeout after which the scrape is ended.
metrics.serviceMonitor.metricRelabelings	Array	Specify additional relabeling of metrics.
metrics.serviceMonitor.relabelings	Array	Specify general relabeling
metrics.serviceMonitor.selector	Object	Prometheus instance selector labels

Sub-components

Confd

Key	Type	Description
confd.enabled	Boolean	Enable the embedded Confd instance
confd.service.ports.internal.	Number	Port number to use for internal communication with the Confd TCP socket

MIB Frontend

There are many additional properties that can be configured for the MIB Frontend service which are not specified in the configuration file. The mib-frontend helm Chart follows the same basic template as the acd-manager chart so documenting them all here would be unnecessarily repeatative. Virtually every property in this chart can be configured under the mib-frontend namespace and be valid.

Key	Type	Description
mib-frontend.enabled	Boolean	Enable the Configuration GUI
mib-frontend.frontend.resourcePreset	String	Use a preset resource configuration.
mib-frontend.frontend.resources	Object	Use custom resource configuration.
mib-frontend.frontend.autoscaling.hpa	Object	Horizontal Pod Autoscaler configuration for MIB Frontend component

ACD Metrics

There are many additional properties that can be configured for the ACD metrics service which are not specified in the configuration file. The acd-metrics helm Chart follows the same basic template as the acd-manager chart, as do each of its subcharts. Documenting them all here would mostly be unnecessarily repeatative. Virtually any property in this chart can be configured under the acd-metrics namespace and be valid. For example, setting the resource preset for grafana can be achieved by setting acd-metrics.grafana.resourcePreset etc.

Key	Type	Description
acd-metrics.enabled	Boolean	Enable the ACD Metrics components
acd-metrics.telegraf.enabled	Boolean	Enable the Telegraf Database component
acd-metrics.prometheus.enabled	Boolean	Enable the Prometheus Service Instance
acd-metrics.grafana.enabled	Boolean	Enable the Grafana Service Instance
acd-metrics.victoria-metrics-single.enabled	Boolean	Enable Victoria Metrics Service instance

Zitadel

Zitadel does not follow the same template as many of the other services. Below is a list of Zitadel specific properties.

Key	Type	Description
zitadel.enabled	Boolean	Enable the Zitadel instance
zitadel.replicaCount	Number	Number of replicas in the Zitadel deployment
zitadel.image.repository	String	The full name of the image registry and repository for the Zitadel container
zitadel.setupJob	Object	Configuration for the initial setup job to configure the database
zitadel.zitadel.masterkeySecretName	String	The name of an existing Kubernetes secret containing the Zitadel Masterkey
zitadel.zitadel.configmapConfig	Object	The Zitadel configuration. See Configuration Options in ZITADEL
zitadel.zitadel.configmapConfig.ExternalDomain	String	The external domain name or IP address to which all requests must be made.
zitadel.service	Ojbect	Service configuration options for Zitadel
zitadel.ingress	Object	Traffic exposure parameters for Zitadel

The zitadel.zitadel.configmapConfig.ExternalDomain MUST be configured with the same value used as the first entry in in global.hosts.manager. Cross-Origin Resource Sharing (CORS) is enforced with Zitadel, and only this origin specified here will be allowed to be used to access Zitadel. The first entry in the global.hosts.manager Array will be used by internal services, and if this does not match, authentication requests will not be accepted.

For example, if the global.hosts.manager entries look like this:

global:
  hosts:
    manager:
      - host: foo.example.com
      - host: bar.example.com

The Zitadel ExternalDomain must be set to foo.example.com, and all requests to Zitadel must use foo.example.com. e.g https://foo.example.com/ui/console. Requests made to bar.example.com will result in HTTP 404 errors.

Redis and Kafka

Both the redis and kafka subcharts follow the same basic structure as the acd-manager chart, and the configurable values in each are nearly identical. Documenting the configuration of these charts here would be unnecessarily redundant. However, the operator may wish to adjust the resource configuration for these charts at the following locations:

Key	Type	Description
redis.master.resources	Object	Resource configuration for the Redis master instance
redis.replica.resources	Object	Resource configuration for the Redis read-only replica instances
redis.replica.replicaCount	Number	Number of Read-only Redis replica instances
kafka.controller.resources	Object	Resource configuration for the Kafka controller
kafka.controller.replicaCount	Number	Number of Kafka controller replica instances to deploy

Resource Configuration

All resource configuration blocks follow the same basic schema which is defined here.

Key	Type	Description
resources.limits.cpu	String	The maximum CPU which can be consumed before the Pod is terminated.
resources.limits.memory	String	The maximum amount of memory the pod may consume before being killed.
resources.limits.ephemeral-storage	String	The maximum amount of storage a pod may consume
resources.requests.cpu	String	The minimum available CPU cores for each Pod to be assigned to a node.
resources.requests.memory	String	The minimum available Free Memory on a node for a pod to be assigned.
resources.requests.ephemeral-storage	String	The minimum amount of storage a pod requires to be assigned to a node.

CPU values are specified in units of 1/1000 of a CPU e.g. “1000m” represents 1 core, “250m” is 1/4 of 1 core. Memory and Storage values are specified with the SI suffix, e.g. “250Mi” is 250MB, “3Gi” is 3GB, etc.

Most services also include a resourcePreset value which is a simple String representing some common configurations.

The presets are as follows:

Preset	Request CPU	Request Memory	Request Storage	Limit CPU	Limit Memory	Limit Storage
nano	100m	128Mi	50Mi	150m	192Mi	2Gi
micro	250m	256Mi	50Mi	375m	384Mi	2Gi
small	500m	512Mi	50Mi	750m	768Mi	2Gi
medium	500m	1024Mi	50Mi	750m	1536Mi	2Gi
large	1.0	2048Mi	50Mi	1.5	3072Mi	2Gi
xlarge	1.0	3072Mi	50Mi	3.0	6144Mi	2Gi
2xlarge	1.0	3072Mi	50Mi	6.0	12288Mi	2Gi

When considering the resource requests vs. limits, the request values should represent the minimum resource usage necessary to run the service, while the limits represent the maximum resources each pod in the deployment will be allowed to consume. The resource request and limits are per pod, so a service using “large” presets with 3 replicas will need a minimum of 3 full cores, and 6GB of available memory to start and may consume up to a maximum of 4.5 Cores and 9GB of memory across all nodes in the cluster.

Security Contexts

Most charts used in the deployment contain configuration for both Pod and Container security contexts. Below is additional information about the parameters there-in.

Key	Type	Description
podSecurityContext.enabled	Boolean	Enable the Pod Security Context
podSecurityContext.fsGroupChangePolicy	String	Set filesystem group change policy for the nodes
podSecurityContext.sysctls	Array	Set kernel settings using sysctl interface for the pods
podSecurityContext.supplementalGroups	Array	Set filesystem extra groups for the pods
podSecurityContext.fsGroup	Number	Set Filesystem Group ID for the pods
containerSecurityContext.enabled	Boolean	Enable the container security context
containerSecurityContext.seLinuxOptions	Object	Set SELinux options for each container in the Pod
containerSecurityContext.runAsUser	Number	Set runAsUser in the containers Security Context
containerSecurityContext.runAsGroup	Number	Set runAsGroup in the containers Security Context
containerSecurityContext.runAsNonRoot	Boolean	Set runAsNonRoot in the containers Security Context
containerSecurityContext.readOnlyRootFilesystem	Boolean	Set readOnlyRootFilesystem in the containers Security Context
containerSecurityContext.privileged	Boolean	Set privileged in the container Security Context
containerSecurityContext.allowPrivilegeEscalation	Boolean	Set allowPrivilegeEscalation in the container’s security context
containerSecurityContext.capabilities.drop	Array	List of capabilities to be dropped in the container
containerSecurityContext.seccompProfile.type	String	Set seccomp profile in the container

Probe Configuration

Each Pod uses healthcheck probes to determine the readiness of the pod. Three probe types are defined. startupProbe, readinessProbe, and livenessProbe. They all contain exactly the same configuration options, the only difference between the probe types is when they are executed.

Liveness Probe: Checks if the container is running. If this probe fails, Kubernetes restarts the container, assuming it is stuck or unhealthy.
Readiness Probe: Determines if the container is ready to accept traffic. If it fails, the container is removed from the service load balancer until it becomes ready again.
Startup Probe: Used during container startup to determine if the application has started successfully. It helps to prevent the liveness probe from killing a container that is still starting up.
The following table describes each of these properties:

Property	Description
enabled	Determines whether the probe is active (`true`) or disabled (`false`).
initialDelaySeconds	Time in seconds to wait after the container starts before performing the first probe.
periodSeconds	How often (in seconds) to perform the probe.
timeoutSeconds	Number of seconds to wait for a probe response before considering it a failure.
failureThreshold	Number of consecutive failed probes before considering the container unhealthy (for liveness) or unavailable (for readiness).
successThreshold	Number of consecutive successful probes required to consider the container healthy or ready (usually 1).
httpGet	Specifies that the probe performs an HTTP GET request to check container health.
httpGet.path	The URL path to request during the HTTP GET probe.
httpGet.port	The port number or name where the HTTP GET request is sent.
exec	Specifies that the probe runs the specified command inside the container and expects a successful exit code to indicate health.
exec.command	An array of strings representing the command to run

Only one of httpGet or exec may be specified in a single probe. These configurations are mutually exclusive.

3.7 - Networking

Network and Firewall requirements

Port Usage

The following table describes the minimal firewall setup required between each node in the cluster for the Kubernetes cluster to function properly. Unless otherwise specified, these rules must allow traffic to pass between any nodes in the cluster.

Protocol	Port	Source	Destination	Description
TCP	2379-2380	Server	Server	Etcd Service
TCP	6443	Any	Server	K3s Supervisor and Kubernetes API Server
UDP	8472	Any	Any	Flannel VXLAN
TCP	10250	Any	Any	Kubelet Metrics
TCP	5001	Any	Server	Spegel Registry Mirror
TCP	9500	Any	Any	Longhorn Management API
TCP	8500	Any	Any	Longhorn Agent
Any	N/A	10.42.0.0/16	Any	K3s Pods
Any	N/A	10.43.0.0/16	Any	K3s Services
TCP	80	Any	Any	Optional Ingress HTTP traffic
TCP	443	Any	Any	Ingress HTTPS Traffic

The following table describes the required ports which must be allowed through any firewalls for the manager application. Access to these ports must be allowed from any client which requires access to these services towards any node in the cluster.

Protocol	Port	Description
TCP	443	Ingress HTTPS Traffic
TCP	3000	Grafana
TCP	9095	Kafka
TCP	9093	Alertmanager
TCP	9090	Prometheus
TCP	6379	Redis

Note: Port 443 is duplicated in both of the above tables. Port 443 is used by the internal applications running within the cluster to access Zitadel so all nodes in the cluster must have access to that port, and it’s also used to provide ingress services from outside the cluster for multiple applications.

Firewall Rules

What follows is an example script that can be used to open the required ports using firewalld. Adjust the commands as necessary to fit the environment.

# Allow Kubernetes cluster ports (between nodes)
firewall-cmd --permanent --add-port=2379-2380/tcp
firewall-cmd --permanent --add-port=6443/tcp
firewall-cmd --permanent --add-port=8472/udp
firewall-cmd --permanent --add-port=10250/tcp
firewall-cmd --permanent --add-port=5001/tcp
firewall-cmd --permanent --add-port=9500/tcp
firewall-cmd --permanent --add-port=8500/tcp
# Allow all traffic from specific subnets for K3s pods/services
firewall-cmd --permanent --add-rich-rule='rule family="ipv4" source address="10.42.0.0/16" accept'
firewall-cmd --permanent --add-rich-rule='rule family="ipv4" source address="10.43.0.0/16" accept'
# Allow optional ingress HTTP/HTTPS traffic
firewall-cmd --permanent --add-port=80/tcp
firewall-cmd --permanent --add-port=443/tcp

# Allow ports for the manager application (from anywhere)
firewall-cmd --permanent --add-port=443/tcp
firewall-cmd --permanent --add-port=3000/tcp
firewall-cmd --permanent --add-port=9095/tcp
firewall-cmd --permanent --add-port=9093/tcp
firewall-cmd --permanent --add-port=9090/tcp
firewall-cmd --permanent --add-port=6379/tcp

# Reload firewalld to apply changes
firewall-cmd --reload

IP Routing

Proper IP routing is critical for cluster communication. The network must allow nodes to route traffic to each other’s pod CIDRs (e.g., 10.42.0.0/16, 10.43.0.0/16) and external clients to reach ingress and services. Verify that your network infrastructure permits routing between these subnets; otherwise, nodes may not communicate properly, impacting cluster functionality.

Handling Multiple Zones with Kubernetes Interfaces

Kubernetes creates virtual network interfaces for pods within the node’s network namespace. These interfaces are typically not associated with any specific firewalld zone by default. Firewalld applies rules to the primary physical interface (such as eth0), not directly to the pod interfaces.

3.8 - Storage Guide

Working with Longhorn Storage

Overview

Longhorn is an open-source distributed block storage system designed specifically for Kubernetes. It provides persistent storage for stateful applications by creating and managing storage volumes that are replicated across multiple nodes to ensure high availability. Longhorn integrates seamlessly with Kubernetes, allowing users to dynamically provision, attach, and manage persistent disks through standard Kubernetes PersistentVolumeClaims (PVCs).

Longhorn deploys a set of controller and replica engines as containers on each node, forming a distributed storage system. When a volume is created, Longhorn replicates data across multiple nodes, ensuring durability even in the event of node failures. The system also handles snapshots, backups, and restores, offering robust data protection. Kubernetes automatically mounts these volumes into Pods, providing persistent storage for stateful applications to operate reliably.

graph TD
    subgraph Cluster Nodes
        Node1["Node 1"]
        Node2["Node 2"]
        Node3["Node 3"]
    end

    subgraph Longhorn Components
        Controller["Longhorn Controller"]
        Replica1["Replica (Node 1)"]
        Replica2["Replica (Node 2)"]
        Replica3["Replica (Node 3)"]
    end

    subgraph Storage Volume
        Volume["Persistent Volume"]
    end

    Node1 -->|Runs| Replica1
    Node2 -->|Runs| Replica2
    Node3 -->|Runs| Replica3

    Controller -->|Manages| Volume
    Replica1 & Replica2 & Replica3 -->|Replicate Data| Volume

Accessing the configuration GUI

Longhorn provides a web-based frontend for managing storage configurations across the Kubernetes cluster. This UI allows users to configure various aspects of the storage engine, such as the number of replicas, backup settings, snapshot management, and more.

Since this frontend does not include any authentication mechanisms and improper use could lead to significant data loss, access is restricted. To securely access the UI, a manual port-forward must be established.

You can set up a temporary connection to the Longhorn frontend using the following kubectl port-forward command:

kubectl port-forward -n longhorn-system --address 0.0.0.0 svc/longhorn-frontend 8888:80

This command forwards local port 8888 to the Longhorn frontend service in the cluster. You can then access the UI by navigating to:

http://k3s-server:8888

This connection remains active as long as the port-forward command is running. To stop it, simply press Ctrl+C. Make sure to run this command only when needed, and avoid leaving the UI accessible without proper authentication.

3.9 - Metrics and Monitoring

“Monitoring the CDN”

The ESB3027 AgileTV CDN Manager includes a built-in metrics and monitoring solution based on Telegraf, Prometheus, and Grafana. A set of default Grafana dashboards provides visibility into CDN performance, displaying host metrics such as CPU, memory, network, and disk utilization—collected from the Director and Cache nodes via Telegraf—as well as streaming metrics from each Director instance. These metrics are stored in a Time-Series Database and visualized through Grafana dashboards. Additionally, the system supports custom dashboards using Prometheus as a data source, offering flexibility for customers to monitor all aspects of the CDN according to their specific needs.

Accessing Grafana

To access Grafana, point a browser towards any node in the cluster on port 3000. e.g. http://manager.local:3000/ and log in using the default administrator account credentials listed below.

Known Limitation: Grafana does not currently support Single-Sign-On (SSO) using Zitadel accounts.

Username: admin
Password: edgeware

On the left column, click Dashboards and select the Dashboard you wish to view.

Custom Dashboards

The grafana instance uses persistent storage within the cluster for data storage. Any custom dashboards or modifications to existing dashboards will be saved in the persistent storage volume, and will persist across software upgrades.

Billing and Licensing

A separate VictoriaMetrics Time-Series Database is included within the metrics component of the manager. It periodically scrapes usage data from Prometheus to calculate aggregated statistics and verify license compliance. This data is retained for at least one year. Grafana can also use this database as a source to display long-term usage metrics.

3.10 - Operations Guide

How to operate ESB3027 Agiletv CDN Manager

Overview

This guide details some of the common commands that will be necessary to operate the ESB3027 AgileTV CDN Manager software. Before starting, you will need at least a basic understanding of the following command line tooling.

Getting and Describing Kubernetes Resources

The two most common commands in Kubernetes are get and describe for a specific resource such as a Pod or Service. Using kubectl get typically lists all resources of a particular type; for example, kubectl get pods will display all pods in the current namespace. To obtain more detailed information about a specific resource, use kubectl describe <resource>, such as kubectl describe pod postgresql-0 to view details about that particular pod.

When describing a pod, the output includes a recent Event history at the bottom. This can be extremely helpful for troubleshooting issues, such as why a pod failed to deploy or was restarted. However, keep in mind that this event history only reflects the most recent events from the past few hours, so it may not provide insights into problems that occurred days or weeks ago.

Obtaining Logs

Each Pod maintains its own logs for each container. To fetch the logs of a specific pod, use kubectl logs <pod_name>. Adding the -f flag will stream the logs in follow mode, allowing real-time monitoring. If a pod contains multiple containers, by default, only the logs from the primary container are shown. To view logs from a different container within the same pod, use the -c <container_name> flag.

Since each pod maintains its own logs, retrieving logs from all replicas of a Deployment or StatefulSet may be necessary to get a complete view. You can use label selectors to collect logs from all pods associated with the same application. For example, to fetch logs from all pods belonging to the “acd-manager” deployment, run:

kubectl logs -l app.kubernetes.io/name=acd-manager

To find the labels associated with a specific Deployment or ReplicaSet, describe the resource and look for the “Labels” field.

The following table describes the common labels currently used by deployments in the cluster.

Component Labels

Label (key=value)	Description
app.kubernetes.io/component=manager	Identifies the ACD Manager service
app.kubernetes.io/component=confd	Identifies the confd service
app.kubernetes.io/component=frontend	Identifies the GUI (frontend) service
app.kubernetes.io/component=gateway	Identifies the API gateway service
app.kubernetes.io/component=grafana	Identifies the Grafana monitoring service
app.kubernetes.io/component=metrics-aggregator	Identifies the metrics aggregator service
app.kubernetes.io/component=mib-frontend	Identifies the MIB frontend service
app.kubernetes.io/component=server	Identifies the Prometheus server component
app.kubernetes.io/component=selection-input	Identifies the selection input service
app.kubernetes.io/component=start	Identifies the Zitadel startup/init component
app.kubernetes.io/component=primary	Identifies the PostgreSQL primary node
app.kubernetes.io/component=controller-eligible	Identifies the Kafka controller-eligible node
app.kubernetes.io/component=alertmanager	Identifies the Prometheus Alertmanager
app.kubernetes.io/component=master	Identifies the Redis master node
app.kubernetes.io/component=replica	Identifies the Redis replica node

Instance, Name, and Part-of Labels

Label (key=value)	Description
app.kubernetes.io/instance=acd-manager	Helm release instance name (acd-manager)
app.kubernetes.io/instance=acd-cluster	Helm release instance name (acd-cluster)
app.kubernetes.io/name=acd-manager	Resource name: acd-manager
app.kubernetes.io/name=confd	Resource name: confd
app.kubernetes.io/name=grafana	Resource name: grafana
app.kubernetes.io/name=mib-frontend	Resource name: mib-frontend
app.kubernetes.io/name=prometheus	Resource name: prometheus
app.kubernetes.io/name=telegraf	Resource name: telegraf
app.kubernetes.io/name=zitadel	Resource name: zitadel
app.kubernetes.io/name=postgresql	Resource name: postgresql
app.kubernetes.io/name=kafka	Resource name: kafka
app.kubernetes.io/name=redis	Resource name: redis
app.kubernetes.io/name=victoria-metrics-single	Resource name: victoria-metrics-single
app.kubernetes.io/part-of=prometheus	Part of the Prometheus stack
app.kubernetes.io/part-of=kafka	Part of the Kafka stack

Restarting a Pod

Since Kubernetes maintains a fixed number of replicas for each Deployment or ReplicaSet, deleting a pod will cause Kubernetes to immediately recreate it, effectively restarting the pod. For example, to restart the pod acd-manager-6c85ddd747-5j5gt, run:

kubectl delete pod acd-manager-6c85ddd747-5j5gt

Kubernetes will automatically detach that pod from any associated Service, preventing new connections from reaching it. It then spawns a new instance, which goes through startup, liveness, and readiness probes. Once the new pod passes the readiness probes and is marked as ready, the Service will start forwarding new traffic to it.

If multiple replicas are running, traffic will be distributed among the existing pods while the new pod is initializing, ensuring a seamless, zero-downtime operation.

Stopping and Starting a Deployment

Unlike traditional services, Kubernetes does not have a concept of stopping a service directly. Instead, you can temporarily scale a Deployment to zero replicas, which has the same effect.

For example, to stop the acd-manager Deployment, run:

kubectl scale deployment acd-manager --replicas=0

To restart it later, scale the deployment back to its original number of replicas, e.g.,

kubectl scale deployment acd-manager --replicas=1

If you want to perform a simple restart of all pods within a deployment, you can delete all pods with a specific label, and Kubernetes will automatically recreate them. For example, to restart all pods with the component label “manager,” use:

kubectl delete pod -l app.kubernetes.io/component=manager

This command causes Kubernetes to delete all matching pods, which are then recreated, effectively restarting the service without changing the deployment configuration.

Running command inside a pod

Sometimes it is necessary to run a command inside an existing Pod such as obtaining a bash shell.

Using the kubectl exec -it <podname> -- <command> can be used to do just that. Assuming we need to run the confcli tool inside the confd pod acd-manager-confd-558f49ffb5-n8dmr that can be accomplished using the following command:

kubectl exec -it acd-manager-confd-558f49ffb5-n8dmr -- /usr/bin/python3.11 /usr/local/bin/confcli

Note: The confd container does not have a shell, so specifying the python interpreter is necessary on this image.

Monitoring resource usage

Kubernetes includes an internal metrics API which can give some insight into the resource usage of the Pods and of the Nodes.

To list the current usage of the Pods in the cluster issue the following:

kubectl top pods

This will give output similar to the following:

NAME                                             CPU(cores)   MEMORY(bytes)
acd-cluster-postgresql-0                         3m           44Mi
acd-manager-6c85ddd747-rdlg6                     4m           15Mi
acd-manager-confd-558f49ffb5-n8dmr               1m           47Mi
acd-manager-gateway-7594479477-z4bbr             0m           10Mi
acd-manager-grafana-78c76d8c5-c2tl6              18m          144Mi
acd-manager-kafka-controller-0                   19m          763Mi
acd-manager-kafka-controller-1                   19m          967Mi
acd-manager-kafka-controller-2                   25m          1127Mi
acd-manager-metrics-aggregator-f6ff99654-tjbfs   4m           2Mi
acd-manager-mib-frontend-67678c69df-tkklr        1m           26Mi
acd-manager-prometheus-alertmanager-0            2m           25Mi
acd-manager-prometheus-server-768f5d5c-q78xb     5m           53Mi
acd-manager-redis-master-0                       12m          18Mi
acd-manager-redis-replicas-0                     15m          14Mi
acd-manager-selection-input-844599bc4d-x7dct     3m           3Mi
acd-manager-telegraf-585dfc5ff8-n8m5c            1m           27Mi
acd-manager-victoria-metrics-single-server-0     2m           10Mi
acd-manager-zitadel-69b6546f8f-v9lkp             1m           76Mi
acd-manager-zitadel-69b6546f8f-wwcmx             1m           72Mi

Querying the metrics API for the nodes gives the aggregated totals for each node:

kubectl top nodes

Yields output similar to the following:

NAME                 CPU(cores)   CPU(%)   MEMORY(bytes)   MEMORY(%)
k3d-local-agent-0    118m         0%       1698Mi          21%
k3d-local-agent-1    120m         0%       661Mi           8%
k3d-local-agent-2    84m          0%       1054Mi          13%
k3d-local-server-0   115m         0%       1959Mi          25%

Taking a node out of service

To temporarily take a node out of service for maintenance, you can do so with minimal downtime, provided there are enough resources on other nodes in the cluster to handle the pods from the target node.

Step 1: Cordon the node.
This prevents new pods from being scheduled on the node:

kubectl cordon <node-name>

Step 2: Drain the node.
This moves existing pods off the node, respecting DaemonSets and local data:

kubectl drain <node-name> --ignore-daemonsets --delete-local-data

The --ignore-daemonsets flag skips DaemonSet-managed pods, which are typically managed separately.
The --delete-local-data flag removes any local ephemeral data stored on the node.

Once drained, the node is effectively out of service.

To bring the node back into service:
Uncordon the node with:

kubectl uncordon <node-name>

This allows Kubernetes to schedule new pods on the node. It won’t automatically move existing pods back; you may need to manually restart or reschedule pods if desired. Since the node now has more available resources, Kubernetes will attempt to schedule new pods there to balance the load across the cluster.

Backup and restore of persistent volumes

The Longhorn storage driver, which provides the persistent storage used in the cluster, (See the Storage Guide for more details) provides built-in mechanisms for backup, restore, and snapshotting volumes. This can be performed entirely from within the Longhorn WebUI. See the relevant section of the Storage Guide for details on accessing that UI, since it requires setting up a port forward, which is described there.

See the relevant Longhorn Documentation for how to configure Longhorn and to manage Snapshotting and Backup and Restore.

3.11 - Post Installation Guide

Steps to take after installation

After installing the cluster, there are a few steps that should be taken to complete the setup.

Create an Admin User

The ESB3027 AgileTV CDN Manager ships with a default user account, but this account is only intended as a way to log in and create an actual user. Attempting to authenticate other services such as the MIB Frontend Configuration GUI, may not work using this pre-provisioned account.

You will need the IP address or DNS name specified in the configuration as both the first manager host and the Zitadel External Domain.

global:
  hosts:
    manager:
      - host: manager.local

Using a web browser, connect to the following URL, replacing manager.local with the IP or DNS name from the configuration above:

https://manager.local/ui/console

You must authenticate using the default credentials:

Username: admin@agiletv.dev
Password: Password1!

It will ask you to set up Multi-Factor Authentication, however you MUST skip this step for now, as it is not currently supported everywhere in the manager’s APIs.

On the menu bar at the top of the screen, click “Users” and proceed to create a New User. Enter the required information, and for now, ensure the “Email Verified” and “Set Initial Password” boxes are checked. Zitadel will attempt to send a confirmation EMail if the “Email Verified” box is not checked, however on initial installation, the SMTP server details have not been configured.

You should now be able to authenticate to the MIB Frontend GUI at https://manager.local/gui using the credentials for the new user.

Configure an SMTP Server

Zitadel requires an SMTP server to be configured in order to send validation emails and support communication with users for password resets, etc. If you have an SMTP server, you can configure it by logging back into the Zitadel Web UI at https://manager.local/ui/console, clicking on “Default Settings” at the top of the page, and configuring the SMTP provider from the menu on the left. After this has been performed, if a new user account is created, an E-Mail will be sent to the configured E-Mail address with a verification link, which must be clicked before the account will be valid.

3.12 - Releases

ESB3027 AgileTV CDN Manager releases

3.12.1 - Release esb3027-1.4.0

Build date

2025-10-23

Release status

Type: production

Included components

ACD Configuration GUI 2.3.9

Compatibility

This release has been tested with the following product versions:

AgileTV CDN Director, ESB3024-1.22.0

Breaking changes from previous release

A full installation is required for this version
If the field confd.confd.image.tag is set in the present configuration file it must be removed or updated before upgrading

Change log

NEW: Monitoring and Metrics support [ESB3027-17]
NEW: Support for horizontal scaling [ESB3027-63]
NEW: Deploy GUI container with Manager [ESB3027-67]
NEW: Support Kafka redundancy [ESB3027-125]
NEW: Support for Redis high availability [ESB3027-126]
NEW: Add Prometheus Container [ESB3027-130]
NEW: Add Grafana Container [ESB3027-131]
NEW: External DNS Name configuration should be global [ESB3027-180]
NEW: Deploy hardware metrics services acd-metrics-aggregator and acd-telegraf-metrics-database in k8s cluster [ESB3027-189]
NEW: REST API Performance Improvements [ESB3027-208]
NEW: “Star”/Make a Grafana dashboard the home page [ESB3027-243]
NEW: Support for remote TCP connections for confd subscribers [ESB3027-244]
NEW: Persist long term usage data [ESB3027-248]
NEW: New billing dashboard [ESB3027-249]
NEW: [ANSSI-BP-028] System Settings - Network Configuration and Firewalls [ESB3027-258]
NEW: [ANSSI-BP-028] System Settings - SELinux [ESB3027-260]
NEW: Support deploying GUI independently from manager [ESB3027-278]
NEW: Automatically generate Zitadel secret [ESB3027-280]
NEW: Deprecate the generate-ssl-secret command [ESB3027-281]
NEW: Deprecate the generate-zitadel-mastekey command [ESB3027-285]
FIXED: Access to services restricted with SELinux in Enforcing mode [ESB3027-32]
FIXED: Authentication token payload contains invalid user details [ESB3027-47]
FIXED: Unexpected 200 OK response to non-existent confd endpoint [ESB3027-154]
FIXED: Multiple restarts encountered for selection-input service on startup [ESB3027-155]
FIXED: Installer script requires case-sensitive hostnames [ESB3027-158]
FIXED: Installer script does not support configuring additional options [ESB3027-214]
FIXED: Selection input API accepts keys containing non-urlsafe characters [ESB3027-216]
FIXED: Installation fails on minimal RHEL installation [ESB3027-287]
FIXED: Kafka consumer configuration warning logged on startup [ESB3027-294]

Deprecated functionality

None

System requirements

Known limitations

Installation of the software is only supported using a self-hosted configuration.

3.12.2 - Release esb3027-1.2.1

Build date

2025-05-22

Release status

Type: production

Compatibility

This release is compatible with the following product versions:

AgileTV CDN Director, ESB3024-1.20.1

Breaking changes from previous release

None

Change log

FIXED: Installer changes ownership of /var, /etc/ and /usr [ESB3027-146]
FIXED: K3s installer should not be left on root filesystem [ESB3027-149]

Deprecated functionality

None

System requirements

A minimum CPU architecture level of x86-64-v2 due to inclusion of Oracle Linux 9 inside the container. While all modern CPUs support this archetecture level, virtual hypervisors may default to a CPU type that has more compatibility with older processors. If this minimum CPU architecture level is not attained the containers may refuse to start. See Operating System Compatibility and Building Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9 for the x86-64-v2 Microarchitecture Level for more information.

Known limitations

Installation of the software is only supported using a self-hosted configuration.

3.12.3 - Release esb3027-1.2.0

Build date

2025-05-14

Release status

Type: production

Compatibility

This release is compatible with the following product versions:

AgileTV CDN Director, ESB3024-1.20.1

Breaking changes from previous release

None

Change log

NEW: Remove .sh extension from all scripts on the ISO [ESB3027-102]
NEW: The script load-certificates.sh should be called generate-ssl-secret [ESB3027-104]
NEW: Add support for High Availability [ESB3027-108]
NEW: Enable the K3s Registry Mirror [ESB3027-110]
NEW: Support for Air-Gapped installations [ESB3027-111]
NEW: Basic hardware monitoring support for nodes in K8s Cluster [ESB3027-122]
NEW: Separate docker containers from ISO [ESB3027-124]
FIXED: GUI is unable to make DELETE request on api/v1/selection_input/modules/blocked_referrers [ESB3027-112]

Deprecated functionality

None

System requirements

A minimum CPU architecture level of x86-64-v2 due to inclusion of Oracle Linux 9 inside the container. While all modern CPUs support this archetecture level, virtual hypervisors may default to a CPU type that has more compatibility with older processors. If this minimum CPU architecture level is not attained the containers may refuse to start. See Operating System Compatibility and Building Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9 for the x86-64-v2 Microarchitecture Level for more information.

Known limitations

Installation of the software is only supported using a self-hosted configuration.

3.12.4 - Release esb3027-1.0.0

Build date

2025-04-17

Release status

Type: production

Compatibility

This release is compatible with the following product versions:

AgileTV CDN Director, ESB3024-1.20.0

Breaking changes from previous release

None

Change log

This is the first production release

Deprecations from previous release

None

System requirements

A minimum CPU architecture level of x86-64-v2 due to inclusion of Oracle Linux 9 inside the container. While all modern CPUs support this archetecture level, virtual hypervisors may default to a CPU type that has more compatibility with older processors. If this minimum CPU architecture level is not attained the containers may refuse to start. See Operating System Compatibility and Building Red Hat Enterprise Linux 9 for the x86-64-v2 Microarchitecture Level for more information.

Known limitations

Installation of the software is only supported using a self-hosted, single-node configuration.

3.13 - API Guides

ESB3027 AgileTV CDN Manager API Guides

3.13.1 - Healthcheck API

Healthchecks

This API provides endpoints to verify the liveness and readiness of the service.

Liveness Check

Endpoint:
GET /api/v1/health/alive

Purpose:
Ensures that the service is running and accepting connections. This check does not verify dependencies or internal health, only that the service process is alive and listening.

Response:

Success (200 OK):

{
  "status": "ok"
}

Failure (503 Service Unavailable):
Indicates the service is not alive, possibly due to a critical failure.

Example Request

GET /api/v1/health/alive HTTP/1.1
Host: your-host
Accept: */*

Example Response

HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Content-Type: application/json

{
  "status": "ok"
}

Readiness Check

Endpoint:
GET /api/v1/health/ready

Purpose:
Verifies if the service is ready to handle requests, including whether all dependencies (such as databases or external services) are operational.

Response:

Success (200 OK):

{
  "status": "ok"
}

Failure (503 Service Unavailable):
Indicates the service or its dependencies are not yet ready.

Example Request

GET /api/v1/health/ready HTTP/1.1
Host: your-host
Accept: */*

Example Response

HTTP/1.1 200 OK
Content-Type: application/json

{
  "status": "ok"
}

Notes

These endpoints are typically used by load balancers, orchestrators like Kubernetes, or monitoring systems to assess service health.
The liveness endpoint confirms the process is running; the readiness endpoint confirms the service and its dependencies are fully operational and ready to serve traffic.

3.13.2 - Authentication API

API for integrating with Zitadel for Authentication and Authorization

The manager offers a simplified authentication and authorization API that integrates with the Zitadel IAM system. This flow is a streamlined custom OAuth2-inspired process:

Session Establishment:
Users authenticate by sending their credentials to the Login endpoint, which returns a session ID and session token.
Token Exchange:
The session token is exchanged for a short-lived, signed JWT access token via the Token Grant flow. This access token can be used to authorize API requests, and its scopes determine what resources and actions are permitted. The token should be protected, as it grants the bearer the rights specified by its scopes as long as it is valid.

Send user credentials to initiate a session:

POST /api/v1/auth/login HTTP/1.1
Accept: application/json, */*;q=0.5
Content-Type: application/json
Host: localhost:4464

{
    "email": "test@example.com",
    "password": "test"
}

Response:

{
    "expires_at": "2025-01-29T15:49:47.062354+00:00",
    "session_id": "304646367786041347",
    "session_token": "12II6yYYfN8UJ5ij-bac6IRRXX6t9qG_Flrlow_fukXKqvo9HFDVZ7a76Exj7Gn-uVRx04_reCaXew",
    "verified_at": "2025-01-28T15:49:47.054169+00:00"
}

Logout

To terminate a session, send:

POST /api/v1/auth/logout HTTP/1.1
Accept: application/json
Content-Type: application/json
Host: localhost:4464

{
    "session_id": "304646367786041347",
    "session_token": "12II6yYYfN8UJ5ij-bac6IRRXX6t9qG_Flrlow_fukXKqvo9HFDVZ7a76Exj7Gn-uVRx04_reCaXew"
}

Response:

{
    "status": "Ok"
}

Token Grant

After establishing a session, exchange the session token for a short-lived access token:

POST /api/v1/auth/token HTTP/1.1
Accept: application/json
Content-Type: application/json
Host: localhost:4464

{
    "grant_type": "session",
    "scope": "foo bar baz",
    "session_id": "304646818908602371",
    "session_token": "wfCelUhfSb4DKJbLCwg9dr59rTeaC13LF2TXH1tMqXz68ojL8LE9M-dCcwsKgrwjcXkjj9y49wWvdQ"
}

Note: The scope parameter is a space-delimited string defining the permissions requested. The API responds with an access token, which is a JWT that contains embedded scopes and other claims, and must be kept secret.

Response example:

{
    "access_token": "eyJ0eXAiOiJKV1QiLCJhbGciOiJFUzI1NiIsImp3ayI6eyJ1c2UiOiJzaWciLCJhbGciOiJFUzI1NiIsImtpZCI6ImFjZC1tYW5hZ2VyLWVzMjU2LWtleSIsImt0eSI6IkVDIiwiY3J2IjoiUC0yNTYiLCJ4IjoiWWxpYVVoSXpnaTk1SjV4NXdaU0tGRUhyWldFUTdwZDZUR2JrTEN6MGxLcyIsInkiOiJDcWNWY1MzQ1pFMjB2enZiWFdxRERRby00UXEzYnFfLUlPZWNPMlZudkFzIn0sImtpZCI6ImFjZC1tYW5hZ2VyLWVzMjU2LWtleSJ9.eyJleHAiOjE3MzgwODAwMjIsImlhdCI6MTczODA3OTcyMiwibmJmIjoxNzM4MDc5NzIyLCJzdWIiOiJ0ZXN0QGV4YW1wbGUuY29tIiwiZ2l2ZW5fbmFtZSI6IiIsImZhbWlseV9uYW1lIjoiVGVzdCBVc2VyIiwiZW1haWwiOiJ0ZXN0QGV4YW1wbGUuY29tIiwic2NvcGUiOiJmb28gYmFyIGJheiJ9.uRmmszZfkrbJpQxIRpxmHf4gL6omvsOQHeuQYd00Bj8PNwQejNA2ZJO3Q_PsE0qb1IrMX5bsCC_k9lWUFMNQ1w",
    "expires_in": 300,
    "scope": "foo bar baz",
    "token_type": "bearer"
}

The access token can then be included in API requests via the Authorization header as Bearer <token>.

3.13.3 - Router API

Miscellaneous Routing APIs

The /api/v1/routing/validate endpoint evaluates routing rules for a specified IP address. If the IP is blocked according to the configured rules, the endpoint responds with a 401 Unauthorized.

Limitations

Supported Classifier Types: Only classifiers of type GeoIP, Anonymous IP, and IPRange are supported. Other classifiers require additional information which is not available to the Manager, so they are assumed not to match.
Policy Behavior: Since the exact path taken through the rules during the initial request is unknown, a “default allow” policy is in effect. This means that unless an IP explicitly matches a rule that denies it, the response will be 200 OK, indicating the IP is allowed.

Request

Method:
GET /api/v1/routing/validate?ip=<IP_ADDRESS>

Headers:
Accept: */* (or as needed)

Example:

GET /api/v1/routing/validate?ip=1.1.1.1 HTTP/1.1
Accept: */*
Host: localhost
User-Agent: HTTPie/3.2.4

Response

Blocked IP:
Returns 401 Unauthorized if the IP matches a block rule.

HTTP/1.1 401 Unauthorized

Allowed IP:
Returns 200 OK if the IP does not match a block rule (or if no matching rule is found due to the “default allow” policy).

HTTP/1.1 200 OK

Default-Allow Policy

The routing validation API uses a default-allow policy: if a request does not match any rule, it is allowed. This approach is intentional and designed to prevent valid sessions from being accidentally dropped if your configuration uses advanced features or rule types that are not fully supported by the Manager. Since the Manager only supports a subset of all possible classifier types and rule logic, it cannot always determine the exact path a request would take through the full configuration. By defaulting to allow, the system avoids inadvertently blocking legitimate traffic due to unsupported or unrecognized configuration elements.

To ensure sensitive or restricted IPs are blocked, you must add explicit deny rules at the top of your ruleset. Rules are evaluated in order, and the first match applies.

Best Practice: Place your most specific deny rules first, followed by general allow rules. This ensures that deny conditions are always checked before any allow conditions.

Example Ruleset (confd/confcli syntax)

{
  "rules": [
    {
      "name": "deny-restricted",
      "type": "deny",
      "condition": "in_session_group('Restricted')",
      "onMiss": "allow-general"
    },
    {
      "name": "allow-general",
      "type": "allow",
      "condition": "always()",
      "onMatch": "main-host"
    }
  ]
}

The first rule denies requests from the Restricted session group.
The second rule allows all other requests.

Note: With a default-allow policy, any request not explicitly denied will be permitted. Always review your ruleset to ensure that deny rules are comprehensive and prioritized.

3.13.4 - Selection Input API

Selection Input API

This API allows you to store arbitrary JSON data in synchronization across all Director instances via Kafka. It is based on the Selection Input API provided by the Director. You can create, delete, and fetch selection input entries at arbitrary paths.

Known Limitations

Parent Path Access: Accessing a parent path (e.g., /foo) will not return all nested structures under that path.
Field Access Limitation: It is not possible to query nested fields directly. For example, if /foo/bar contains {"baz": {"bam": "boom"}}, querying /foo/bar/baz/bam will not return "boom". You can only query /foo/bar/baz to retrieve {"bam": "boom"}.

API Usage

Create New Keys

Create multiple entries under a specified path by POSTing a JSON object where each key-value pair corresponds to a key and its associated data.

Request:

POST /api/v1/selection_input/<path>

Body Example:

{
    "key1": {...},
    "key2": {...}
}

Example:
POST to /api/v1/selection_input/modules/keys with the above body creates:

/modules/keys/key1 with value {...}
/modules/keys/key2 with value {...}

Delete a Key

Remove a specific key at a given path.

Request:

DELETE /api/v1/selection_input/<path>/<key>

Example:
To delete key2 under /modules/keys:

DELETE /api/v1/selection_input/modules/keys/key2

Fetch a Key

Retrieve the data stored under a specific key.

Request:

GET /api/v1/selection_input/<path>/<key>

Example:
To fetch key1 under /modules/keys:

GET /api/v1/selection_input/modules/keys/key1

Response:

{
    "key1": {...}
}

Fetch All Keys Under a Path

Retrieve all selection input data stored under a parent path.

Request:

GET /api/v1/selection_input/<path>

Example:
To get all keys under /modules/keys:

GET /api/v1/selection_input/modules/keys

Response:

{
    "key1": {...},
    "key2": {...}
}

Filtering, Sorting, and Limiting Results

You can refine the list of keys returned by adding query parameters:

search=<string>: Filter results to include only keys matching the search string.
sort=<asc|desc>: Sort keys in ascending or descending order before filtering.
limit=<number>: Limit the number of results returned (positive integer).

Note:

Sorting occurs prior to filtering and limiting.
The order of query parameters does not affect the request.

Example:

GET /api/v1/selection_input/modules/keys?search=foo&sort=asc&limit=10

3.13.5 - Operator UI API

Operator UI API Guide

This API provides endpoints to retrieve and manage blocked tokens, user agents, and referrers used within the Operator UI.

Endpoints

Retrieve List of Blocked Tokens

GET /api/v1/operator_ui/modules/blocked_tokens/

Fetches a list of blocked tokens, supporting optional filtering, sorting, and limiting.

Query Parameters:

search (optional): Filter tokens matching the search term.
limit (optional): Limit number of results.
sort (optional): Sort order, "asc" or "desc" (default: "asc").

Responses:

200 OK with JSON array of blocked tokens.
404 Not Found if no tokens found.
500 Internal Server Error on failure.

Retrieve a Specific Blocked Token

GET /api/v1/operator_ui/modules/blocked_tokens/{token}

Fetches details of a specific blocked token.

Path Parameter:

token: The token string to retrieve.

Responses:

200 OK with JSON object of the token.
404 Not Found if token does not exist.
500 Internal Server Error on failure.

Retrieve List of Blocked User Agents

GET /api/v1/operator_ui/modules/blocked_user_agents/

Fetches a list of blocked user agents, with optional sorting and limiting.

Query Parameters:

limit (optional): Limit number of results.
sort (optional): "asc" or "desc" (default: "asc").

Responses:

200 OK with JSON array of user agents.
404 Not Found if none found.
500 Internal Server Error on failure.

Retrieve a Specific Blocked User Agent

GET /api/v1/operator_ui/modules/blocked_user_agents/{user_agent}

Retrieves details of a specific blocked user agent.

Path Parameter:

user_agent: URL-safe Base64 encoded string (without padding). Decode before use; if decoding fails, the server returns 400 Bad Request.

Responses:

200 OK with JSON object of the user agent.
404 Not Found if not found.
500 Internal Server Error on failure.

Retrieve List of Blocked Referrers

GET /api/v1/operator_ui/modules/blocked_referrers/

Fetches a list of blocked referrers, with optional sorting and limiting.

Query Parameters:

limit (optional): Limit number of results.
sort (optional): "asc" or "desc" (default: "asc").

Responses:

200 OK with JSON array of referrers.
404 Not Found if none found.
500 Internal Server Error on failure.

Retrieve a Specific Blocked Referrer

GET /api/v1/operator_ui/modules/blocked_referrers/{referrer}

Retrieves details of a specific blocked referrer.

Path Parameter:

referrer: URL-safe Base64 encoded string (without padding). Decode before use; if decoding fails, return 400 Bad Request. The response includes the decoded referrer.

Responses:

200 OK with JSON object containing the referrer.
404 Not Found if not found.
500 Internal Server Error on failure.

Additional Notes

For User Agents and Referrers, the path parameters are URL-safe Base64 encoded (per RFC 4648, using - and _ instead of + and /) with padding (=) removed. Clients should remove padding when constructing requests and restore it before decoding.
All endpoints returning specific items will respond with 404 Not Found if the item does not exist.
Errors during processing will return 500 Internal Server Error with an error message.

3.14 - Use Cases

Common use cases and examples

3.14.1 - Custom Deployments

How to selectively deploy components in acd-manager

In some environments, it may not be necessary to run all components of the ESB3027 AgileTV CDN Manager—such as when certain features are not used, or when components like the MIB Frontend Configuration GUI are hosted separately, for example, in a public cloud environment. The examples in this guide illustrate scenarios and the configuration properties needed to achieve specific configurations.

Manager Without Metrics and Monitoring Support

If metrics and monitoring are not required—perhaps because an existing monitoring solution is in place—it is possible to disable the deployment of Telegraf, Prometheus, Grafana, and VictoriaMetrics. You can choose to skip the entire metrics suite or disable individual components as needed.

Keep in mind, that disabling certain components may require adjustments elsewhere in the configuration. For example, disabling Prometheus will necessitate modifications to Grafana and VictoriaMetrics configurations, since they depend on Prometheus being available.

To disable all metrics components, set:

acd-metrics.enabled: false

Applying this configuration will prevent the deployment of the entire metrics suite. To disable individual components within the metrics framework, set their respective enabled flags to false. For example, to disable only Grafana but keep other metrics components active:

acd-metrics.grafana.enabled: false

Manager Without the MIB Frontend Configuration GUI

If the MIB-Frontend GUI will not be used to configure the ESB3024 AgileTV CDN Director instances, this component can be disabled by setting:

mib-frontend.enabled: false

This is also useful if the frontend is hosted in a separate cluster—such as in a public cloud like AWS —or if the manager is deployed within a customer’s network without the frontend.

3.15 - Troubleshooting Guide

How to troubleshoot ESB3027 AgileTV CDN Manager

This guide helps diagnose common issues with the acd-manager deployment and its associated pods.

1. Check Pod Status

Verify all pods are running:

kubectl get pods

Expected:

Most pods should be in Running state with READY as 1/1 or 2/2.
Pods marked as 0/1 or 0/2 are not fully ready, indicating potential issues.

2. Investigate Unready or Failed Pods

Example:

kubectl describe pod acd-manager-6c85ddd747-rdlg6

Look for events such as CrashLoopBackOff, ImagePullBackOff, or ErrImagePull.
Check container statuses for error messages.

3. Check Pod Logs

Fetch logs for troubleshooting:

kubectl logs acd-manager-6c85ddd747-rdlg6

For pods with multiple containers:

kubectl logs acd-manager-<pod_name> -c <container_name>

Focus on recent errors or exceptions.

4. Verify Connectivity and Dependencies

PostgreSQL: Confirm the acd-cluster-postgresql-0 pod is healthy and accepting connections.
Kafka: Check kafka-controller pods are running and not experiencing issues.
Redis: Ensure Redis master and replicas are healthy.
Grafana, Prometheus, VictoriaMetrics: Confirm these services are operational.

5. Check Resource Usage

High CPU or memory can cause pods to crash or become unresponsive:

kubectl top pods

Actions:

Scale resources if needed.
Review resource quotas and limits.

6. Check Events in Namespace

kubectl get events --sort-by='.lastTimestamp'

Look for warnings or errors related to pod scheduling, network issues, or resource constraints.

7. Restart Problematic Pods

Sometimes, restarting pods can resolve transient issues:

kubectl delete pod <pod_name>

Kubernetes will automatically recreate the pod.

8. Verify Configurations and Secrets

Check ConfigMaps and Secrets for correctness:

kubectl get configmaps
kubectl get secrets

Confirm environment variables and mounted volumes are correctly configured.

9. Check Cluster Network

Ensure network policies or firewalls are not blocking communication between pods and external services.

10. Additional Tips

Upgrade or Rollback: If recent changes caused issues, consider rolling back or upgrading the deployment.
Monitoring: Use Grafana and VictoriaMetrics dashboards for real-time insights.
Documentation: Consult application-specific logs and documentation for known issues.

Summary Table

Issue Type	Common Checks	Commands
Pod Not Ready	Describe pod, check logs	`kubectl describe pod`, `kubectl logs`
Connectivity	Verify service endpoints	`kubectl get svc`, `curl` from within pods
Resource Limits	Monitor resource usage	`kubectl top pods`
Events & Errors	Check cluster events	`kubectl get events`
Configuration	Validate configs and secrets	`kubectl get configmaps`, `kubectl get secrets`

If issues persist, consider scaling down and up components or consulting logs and metrics for deeper analysis.

3.16 - Glossary

ESB3027 AgileTV CDN Manager definitions of commonly used terms

Access Token: A credential used to authenticate and authorize access to resources or APIs on behalf of a user, usually issued by an authorization server as part of an OAuth 2.0 flow. It contains the necessary information to verify the user’s identity and define the permissions granted to the token holder.
Bearer Token: A type of access token that allows the holder to access protected resources without needing to provide additional credentials. It’s typically included in the HTTP Authorization header as Authorization: Bearer <token>, and grants access to any resource that recognizes the token.
Chart: A Helm Chart is a collection of files that describe a related set of Kubernetes resources required to deploy an application, tool, or service. It provides a structured way to package, configure, and manage Kubernetes applications.
Cluster: A group of interconnected computers or nodes that work together as a single system to provide high availability, scalability and redundancy for applications or services. In Kubernetes, a cluster usually consists of one primary node, and multiple worker or agent nodes.
Confd: An AgileTV backend service that hosts the service configuration. Comes with an API, a CLI and a GUI.
ConfigMap (Kubernetes): A Kubernetes resource used to store non-sensitive configuration data in key-value pairs, allowing applications to access configuration settings without hardcoding them into the container images.
Containerization: The practice of packaging applications and their dependencies into lightweight portable containers that can run consistently across different computing environments.
Deployment (Kubernetes): A resource object that provides declarative updates to applications by managing the creation and scaling of a set of Pods.
Director: The AgileTV Delivery OTT router and related services.
ESB: A software bundle that can be separately installed and upgraded, and is released as one entity with one change log. Each ESB is identified with a number. Over time, features and functions within an ESB can change.
Helm: A package manager for Kubernetes that simplifies the development and management of applications by using pre-configured templates called charts. It enables users to define, install, and upgrade complex applications on Kubernetes.
Ingress: A Kubernetes resource that manages external access to services within a cluster, typically HTTP. It provides routing rules to manage traffic to various services based on hostnames and paths.
K3s: A lightweight Kubernetes cluster developed by Rancher Labs. This is a complete Kubernetes system deployed as a single portable binary.
K8s: A common abbreviation for Kubernetes.
Kafka: Apache Kafka is an open-source distributed event streaming platform designed for building real-time data pipelines and streaming applications. It enables the publication, subscription, storage, and processing of streams of records in a fault-tolerant and scalable manner.
Kubectl: The command-line tool for interacting with Kubernetes clusters, allowing users to deploy applications, manage cluster resources, and inspect logs or configurations.
Kubernetes: An open-source container orchestration platform designed to automate scaling, and management of containerized applications. It enables developers and operations teams to manage complex applications consistently across various environments.
LoadBalancer: A networking tool that distributes network traffic across multiple servers or Pods to ensure no single server becomes overwhelmed, improving reliability and performance.
Manager: The AgileTV Management Software and related services.
Namespace: A mechanism for isolating resources within a Kubernetes cluster, allowing multiple teams or applications to coexist without conflict by providing a scope for names.
OAuth2: An open standard for authorization that allows third-party applications to gain limited access to a user’s resources on a server without exposing the user’s credentials.
Pod: The smallest deployable unit in Kubernetes that encapsulates one or more containers, sharing the same network and storage resources. It serves as a logical host for tightly coupled applications, allowing them to communicate and function effectively within a cluster.
Router: Unless otherwise specified, an HTTP router that manages an OTT session using HTTP redirect. There are also ways to use DNS instead of HTTP.
Secret (Kubernetes): A resource used to store sensitive information, such as passwords, API keys, or tokens in a secure manner. Secrets are encoded in base64 and can be made available to Pods as environment variables or mounted as files, ensuring that sensitive data is not exposed in the application code or configuration files.
Service (Kubernetes): An abstraction that defines a logical set of Pods and a policy to access them, enabling stable networking and load balancing to ensure reliable communication among application components.
Session Token: A session token is a temporary, unique identifier generated by a server and issued to a user upon successful authentication.
Stateful Set (Kubernetes): A Kubernetes deployment which guarantees ordering and uniqueness of Pods, typically used for applications that require stable network identities and persistent storage such as with databases.
Topic (Kafka): A category or feed name to which records (messages) are published. Messages flow through a topic in the order in which they are produced, and multiple consumers can subscribe to the stream to process the records in real time.
Volume (Kubernetes): A persistent storage resource in Kubernetes that allows data to be stored and preserved beyond the lifecycle of individual Pods, facilitating data sharing and durability.
Zitadel: An open-source identity and access management (IAM) platform designed to handle user authentication and authorization for applications. It provides features like single-sign-on (SSO), multi-factor authentication (MFA), and support for various authentication protocols.

4 - AgileTV Cache (esb2001,esb3004)

Information about the AgileTV Cache Orbit version is available in EDGS-103 Orbit TV Server User Guide¹ and information about the AgileTV Cache SW Streamer version is available in EDGS-171 SW Streamer User Guide¹.

If you don’t have an AgileTV CDN Solutions Support account please contact us here. ↩︎ ↩︎

5 - BGP Sniffer (esb3013)

Information about the AgileTV BGP Sniffer is available in EDGS-214 ESB3013 User Guide¹.

If you don’t have an AgileTV CDN Solutions Support account please contact us here. ↩︎

6 - AgileTV Convoy Manager (classic) (esb3006)

Information about the classic Orbit CDN Management System (aka Convoy) is available in EDGS-069 Convoy Management Software User Guide¹.

If you don’t have an AgileTV CDN Solutions Support account please contact us here. ↩︎

7 - Orbit CDN Request Router (esb3008)

Information about the convoy based Orbit Request Router is available in EDGS-197 ESB3008 HTTP Request Router - User Guide¹.

If you don’t have an AgileTV CDN Solutions Support account please contact us here. ↩︎

Components

1 - AgileTV CDN Director (esb3024)

1.1 - Getting Started

Requirements

Hardware

Operating System Compatibility

Firewall Recommendations

Installation

Operations

Configuration Process

API Key Management

Configuration Basics

Integration with Convoy

Additional Resources

Ready for Production

1.2 - Installation

1.2.1 - Installing a 1.22 release

Upgrading From an Earlier ESB3024 Router Release

Troubleshooting

1.2.1.1 - Configuration changes between 1.20 and 1.22

Confd configuration changes

Removed services.routing.settings.usageLog.enabled

Replaced forwardHostHeader with headersToForward

Added selectionInputFetchBase

Added the requestHeader classifier

Added patternSource to the subnet classifier

1.2.2 - Installing a 1.20 release

Upgrading From an Earlier ESB3024 Router Release

Troubleshooting

1.2.2.1 - Configuration changes between 1.18 and 1.20

Confd configuration changes

Added Kafka bootstrap server settings

Added data streams settings

Added allowAnyRedirectType setting

1.2.3 - Installing a 1.18 release

Upgrading From an Earlier ESB3024 Router Release

Troubleshooting

1.2.3.1 - Configuration changes between 1.16 and 1.18

Confd Configuration Changes

Added Content Popularity Settings

1.2.4 - Installing a 1.16 release

Upgrade from and earlier ESB3024 Router release

Troubleshooting

1.2.4.1 - Configuration changes between 1.14 and 1.16

Confd configuration changes

Added region GeoIP classifier

Added integration.routing.gui configuration

Added services.routing.accounts configuration

1.2.5 - Installing a 1.14 release

Upgrade from and earlier ESB3024 Router release

Troubleshooting

1.2.5.1 - Configuration changes between 1.12.1 and 1.14

Confd configuration changes

Renamed services.routing.settings.allowedProxies

Added services.routing.tuning.general.restApiMaxBodySize

1.2.6 - Installing a 1.12 release

Upgrade from ESB3024 Router release 1.10

Troubleshooting

1.2.6.1 - Configuration changes between 1.10.2 and 1.12

Confd configuration changes

Added services.routing.translationFunctions.hostRequest

Added services.routing.translationFunctions.session

Removed services.routing.settins.managedSessions configuration

Added services.routing.tuning.general.maxActiveManagedSessions tuning parameter.

1.2.7 - Installing release 1.10.x

Upgrade from ESB3024 Router release 1.8.0

Troubleshooting

1.2.7.1 - Configuration changes between 1.8.0 and 1.10.x

Confd configuration changes

Added integration.convoy section

Removed services.routing.apiKey configuration

Added services.routing.settings.qoeTracking

Added healthChecks sections to the hosts

Added hashAlgorithm to the consistentHashing rule

1.2.8 - Installing release 1.8.0

Upgrade

Troubleshooting

1.2.8.1 - Configuration changes between 1.6.0 and 1.8.0

Confd configuration changes

Added enabled to contentPopularity

Removed `services.routing.settings.usageLog.enabled`

Replaced `forwardHostHeader` with `headersToForward`

Added `selectionInputFetchBase`

Added the `requestHeader` classifier

Added `patternSource` to the `subnet` classifier

Added `allowAnyRedirectType` setting

Added `region` GeoIP classifier

Added `integration.routing.gui` configuration

Added `services.routing.accounts` configuration

Renamed `services.routing.settings.allowedProxies`

Added `services.routing.tuning.general.restApiMaxBodySize`

Added `services.routing.translationFunctions.hostRequest`

Added `services.routing.translationFunctions.session`

Removed `services.routing.settins.managedSessions` configuration

Added `services.routing.tuning.general.maxActiveManagedSessions` tuning parameter.

Added `integration.convoy` section

Removed `services.routing.apiKey` configuration

Added `services.routing.settings.qoeTracking`

Added `healthChecks` sections to the hosts

Added `hashAlgorithm` to the `consistentHashing` rule

Added `enabled` to `contentPopularity`

Added `selectionInputItemLimit` to `tuning`

Added `forwardHostHeader` to `hostGroups`

Added `translationFunctions` block

Renamed `sessionGroupIds` to `sessionGroupNames`

Added `managedSessions` block

Added `recentDurationMilliseconds`

Raw configuration – `/v2/configuration`

Validate Configuration – `/v2/validate_configuration`

`/v3/selection_input`

Example `PUT` request

Example `POST` request

Example `GET` request

Example `DELETE` request

`/v1/selection_input`

Example successful request (`PUT`)

Example unsuccessful request (`PUT`)

Example successful request (`GET`)

Example successful specific value request (`GET`)

Example successful request (`DELETE`)

Example successful specific value request (`DELETE`)

Example unsuccessful request (`DELETE`)

Subnets – `/v1/subnets`

Subrunner Resource Usage – `/v1/usage`

Metrics – `/m1/v1/metrics`

Node Visit Counters – `/v1/node_visits`

Node Visit Graph – `/v1/node_visits_graph`

Session list - `/v1/sessions`

Session details - `/v1/sessions/<id: str>`

Content List - `/v1/content`

Lua scripts – `/v1/lua/<path str>.lua`

Example request (`PUT`)

Example request (`PUT`, from file)

Example request (`GET`)

Example request (`DELETE`)

List Lua scripts – `/v1/lua`

Debug a Lua expression – `/v1/lua/debug`